Technology Template

It is fine to go for a walk after Botox, but youll want to avoid power-walking, running, and any exercise that gets your heart pumping (raises blood pressure) for at least 2 hours (to minimize any risk of bruising).

Botox does not age you, in fact, it makes you look much more youthful when properly injected by a skilled physician.

No, we dont believe Botox causes weight gain. In medicine, when a prescribed substance is believed to have caused an adverse effect (such as weight gain), its reported - meaning its publicly registered so physicians and scientists can learn about it and be on the lookout for similar problems. When there are enough similar stories, a clinical study is run to determine if there is a true link between the two. There have been no reports of weight gain registered as related to Botox - meaning not even 1 person has had that reported as an adverse effect thus far. Now the reason we say we dont believe Botox causes weight gain is because until there is a study proving it, we cannot be 100% certain - no one can. But there is no reason to believe Botox would or could cause weight gain at this time.

Botox is not associated with any disorders of the brain.

Botox isnt responsible for an aged appearance when it wears off - its actually the lack of Botox thats responsible for you looking older! However, there is a misconception that youll look older after it wears off, so let us explain what we believe is happening there: say youre 35 when you start Botox, and you get it regularly until your 50th birthday, when you decide you want to all natural. Well, the Botox has been keeping your skin wrinkle-free and your brows nicely arched and lifted for 15 years. Suddenly, after it wear off, your brows are sagging and youre covered in wrinkles - it must be proof Botox ages us, right?! No, youve just stopped working against aging and its caught it up with you, as it naturally will. Those who keep regular with their Botox can expect to look great for their age, but nothing can suspend time. We recommend regular Botox, skin resurfacing, and a great skincare routine to keep you looking your absolute best!

Botox is a highly purified biochemical agent produced by a specific type of bacteria & has been used in medicine for decades with an unsurpassed safety record.

Botox is not a steroid, nor is it related to the steroid family of medications.

In the hands of a skilled provider administering Botox to the right candidate can soften under eye wrinkles. It’s important to choose a provider who knows when to say no to prevent aggravating puffiness or sagging of this delicate area.

Side effects and complications are very uncommon at our practice, due to our highly skilled and experienced physician injectors. The most commonly reported are a temporary decrease in brow height or an asymmetry in the brow. Localized pain, infection, inflammation, tenderness, swelling, redness, and bleeding/bruising have been reported nationally, but these effects extremely rare among our patients. When your question has been answered, please flair your post.

There is not a very long recovery period for Botox. The first day is the most important as the Botox starts to take effect. After Botox is injected, the proteins start to diffuse in the treated area. Strenuous activity increases blood pressure and may make bruising more pronounced, so if you notice a bruise forming, we recommend skipping working out for that day. The only restriction you need to worry about after Botox injections is not to rub the treated areas for at least 90 minutes. We also recommend you don’t apply makeup over the injection sites, or really touch them, for at least a few minutes (while the wound is still open).

There are no restrictions for food or alcohol after Botox.

Because Botox works by blocking chemical signals to muscles and glands, it can also be useful in treating conditions like migraines or hyperhidrosis (excessive sweating). In cosmetic uses, Botox can effectively relax wrinkles, folds, and neck bands.

Botox has several uses but is most commonly used for cosmetic purposes. Since it is a neuromodulator, it blocks the nerve signals to your muscles temporarily. This is used effectively in the cosmetic industry to give you a wrinkle-free facial appearance. A lifetime of muscle movement gives you a tired or angry look when the furrows on your brow or the laugh lines around your lips deepen. Botox reduces these lines, taking years off your appearance. You can get help with excessive sweating and migraines as well at a Botox center. If you are wondering how much Botox near me costs, you must understand that it depends on your individual treatment requirement. Botox usually costs $16 per unit and when used for your facial wrinkles and lines, the treatment will typically be about $250 to $600. An experienced cosmetic physician will give you the best results since they know how much and where to administer it. Physicians with good knowledge of the neuromodulator use small amounts in different muscles that are overactive to ensure a harmony is created in your face. This is what differs the natural results from that ‘pulled’ appearance some people end up with after their Botox treatment. This is why you must ensure that your focus remains on seeing a good injector rather than the cost at the Botox center you visit.

Botox is a minimally-invasive rejuvenation procedure that aims to reduce the dynamic lines and wrinkles in the upper face. However, it’s important to choose a trained cosmetic physician to administer Botox to ensure you get your desired results. With age, repetitive facial movements like squinting and frowning can cause creases and lines on your face that can make you look angrier or more tired than you feel. Botox treatment helps relax your active facial muscles, allowing the wrinkled skin to repair itself and smooth out lines. It’s an effective treatment for moderate to severe frown lines, as well as crow’s feet near the eyes. In comparison to other invasive methods for facial rejuvenation, your Botox treatment will only take a few minutes. Fine needles are used to inject Botox into your facial muscles and, contrary to popular belief, every wrinkle does not have to be separately treated. Botox is primarily a neuromodulator that temporarily blocks the signals from the nerves to the muscles, allowing them to relax. This is what smooths out lines and creases formed by muscular movement over time. Botox is a safe treatment approved by the FDA, as long as it is administered by an injector who has sufficient experience and the expertise to achieve good results by customizing the amount and area of treatment for specific patients. Your success with Botox depends on the clinical condition, dosage of Botox, and the frequency of treatment. Your Botox treatment will usually show results within 24 hours and you will see its maximum effects within 30 days after your procedure. With repeated treatment sessions, your response to Botox also improves. Mostly, the results achieved from Botox last for around 3 to 6 months, after which you can opt for additional treatments to maintain your results.

Because Botox works by blocking chemical signals to muscles and glands, it can also be useful in treating conditions like migraines or hyperhidrosis (excessive sweating). In cosmetic uses, Botox can effectively relax wrinkles, folds, and neck bands.

There are a few studies that indicate Botox may be helpful for relieving allergy symptoms for those with treatment-resistant allergies, in particular for those with sinus-related symptoms. However, this is a newer treatment, with a very different injection technique than cosmetic Botox injections, and one best left to an ENT or Allergist with the proper training. Cosmetic injections for wrinkles do not have the same effect.

There are no restrictions for food or alcohol after Botox.

Yes, Botox can be used to lift your eyebrows, but it doesnt have to be. Speak to your injector about your ideal results in detail, so that they can help you achieve a natural and youthful look.

Botox may be used for cosmetic purposes in an adult patient of any age. It’s not uncommon to begin treatment at age 50. The results are dependent on many factors and vary from person to person.

The manufacturers of Botox do not recommend any special face exercises after Botox.

Botox can be started as early as age 18. The advantage to starting earlier is that it’s easier to prevent the signs of aging, then it is to reverse them.

Side effects and complications are very uncommon at our practice, due to our highly skilled and experienced physician injectors. The most commonly reported are a temporary decrease in brow height or an asymmetry in the brow. Localized pain, infection, inflammation, tenderness, swelling, redness, and bleeding/bruising have been reported nationally, but these effects extremely rare among our patients.

20. You may lay down after Botox, but for 2 hours refrain from lying on your face. Putting pressure on your face can cause the Botox to move around under the skin, causing it to spread and take affect differently than intended.

When Botox is overdone & the skin looks stretched/frozen it can give a shine. Choosing the right provider is key in creating a natural, more youthful appearance & improving skin quality to give a healthy glow.

Botox is one of the common injectables that is used in a wide range of medical and cosmetic applications. It is a safe, flexible and non invasive procedure that is becoming increasingly popular. The treatment can take effect as soon as 3 to 5 days after the treatment, with the final results becoming visible after about 2 weeks. For first time users of Botox injections, it is important to understand that the first treatment may not lead to optimal and long lasting results. After multiple treatment sessions, your muscles get conditioned and respond well to Botox injections. With each session, the results will begin to last longer since your muscles can be trained to make less or smaller movements when emoting. When used for cosmetic purposes, results from Botox injections may last from 4 to 6 months. However, after your first treatment, you may need a touch up session within 3 months itself. Some of the factors that contribute to how long your Botox injections last include: · How much the product is diluted · The targeted area · The dosage of Botox units used · Your age When the wrinkles on your skin are etched too deeply or when Botox injections are used on aged patients, Botox may not smoothe wrinkles as expected. You must always consult a trained cosmetic physician before choosing a treatment to receive optimal results.

9. True Botox complications are very rare. Side effects like forehead heaviness, droopy eyelids, or imbalanced smile are greatly decreased when using a skilled provider. These potential side effects may be corrected or resolve on their own.

For 2 hours immediately following your Botox injections, do not run, work-out, do Yoga or rub your face.

People who have a history of these 3 cited medical conditions must have a discussion with their Primary Care Physician prior to a Botox consultation/treatment: 1. A.L.S., 2. Myastenia Gravis, 3. Lambert-Eaton Syndrome.

The majority of your results, and cost for treatment comes from who injects you, not which of these products is utilized. The costs of all three agents are similar if an injector uses the products properly. 2.5 units of Dysport is roughly equivalent to 1 unit each of Xeomin and Botox, so the price-per-unit is less expensive for Dysport, but you need 2.5 times more Dysport to achieve the same results of Botox. You can enroll in additional savings programs for both Dysport and Botox at our practice.

There have been several studies into which of these 3 products lasts longer, kicks in sooner, etc. Of course, each company wants to claim their product is in some way superior to the others. There may be a minor advantage for Dysport kicking in quicker, but Botox probably lasts a little longer. A skilled injector should be comfortable using each of these products.

Longevity of results is determined by the amount of product used, but at a certain point, additional Botox doesn’t yield an advantage. Only experienced providers understand this number, and it varies quite a bit from patient to patient. Building longevity is achieved through routine injections, returning for next treatment before the effects fully dissipate. In other words, if you come back for treatment before the benefits have gone away, you will notice the effects to last longer and longer over time.

Unfortunately, there are a lot of inexperienced injectors out there causing many completely avoidable complications. These include frozen faces, odd-looking brows, startled appearance and more. Unfortunately, we spend much time fixing other’s poor outcomes. A desirable provider will discuss not only what types of results you can achieve but what is being done to avoid any issues. The process of having Botox should include discussion of goals and a well thought out plan. There is an art to this process and experience is necessary to create a masterpiece.

NO. Botox and Dysport injections should be very comfortable and not require downtime. We ask our patients to refrain from rubbing the area or exercising for 90 minutes after, and the use of ice on the area should be avoided. Patients immediately sense the experience of our physicians the first time they are injected here. The way a patient is positioned, using the tiniest of available needles, proper technique, and a gentle touch is a big part of a great experience.

These are our recommendations for being a savvy consumer during your treatments: Look for an experienced physician who spends a large portion of their work time providing these types of injections. You can confirm this by asking about awards from Allergan and Merz. The top injectors receive yearly awards from each of these companies based on the volume of product used. There is a very clear correlation between high quantity purchased and high level of experience, and since experience is the best indicator of expected result, this is the key to finding a good provider and getting a good result. Our practice currently ranks in the top 250 in the country for Allergan, makers of Botox. This was previously named Diamond level. This is a position we’ve maintained over the last 6 years. With Merz, makers of Dysport, we are at the Presidential Champion level. Know how many units are being used and what “areas” are being treated, not just the dollar figure. Practices charge differently for these injections – some by the “area” treated and some by the number of units used, with price by unit varying quite a bit between practices. Knowing what you’re paying for is important, so you can understand the value and the expected results. Come for next treatment before results have fully dissipated to boost longevity. A 3 month routine will boost the effects of these injections and allow you to use less product over time, which not only saves you money but keeps you looking wonderful year-round. Avoid treatment provided by non-physicians who may very well not be licensed to do these injections in the state you are in. In NJ, one needs to be a physician to legally provide these injections.

Jeuveau costs $16 per unit at our New Jersey offices.

Although Jeuveau was originally rumored to be cheaper than Botox in the months leading up to its debut in the U.S., the actual purchase price for Jeuveau is no cheaper than Botox, and is actually more expensive than Botox for many practices.

We price NewTox (Jeuveau) by unit - at $16 per unit. The number of units used varies by individual and area treated. Generally, for wrinkle reduction, patients can expect between $200 - 700, with those with deeper wrinkles needing more product injected to achieve their goals.

Yes! Jeuveau has been evaluated in clinical studies for safety and approved by the FDA as safe for use in adults.

Jeuveau and Botox are two brands of the same product. Unlike Dysport\u00ae – (abobotulinumtoxinA)‎, Xeomin\u00ae (incobotulinumtoxinA), and MYOBLOC\u00ae (rimabotulinumtoxinB), the other FDA-Approved botulinum toxins for wrinkle reduction, Jeuveau (prabotulinumtoxinA-xvfs) and BOTOX\u00ae (onabotulinumtoxinA) can be stored, injected, and dosed identically. Botox is the most common cosmetic treatment in America and accounts for about 70% of all wrinkle-relaxing injections. A new product that offers identical results, storage, and use may become more popular than Botox, but it seems unlikely at this time.

Jeuveau is the newest neuromodulator on the US market (approved by the FDA for safety and efficacy). There are other alternatives to Botox that have been around a little longer in the US, including Dysport, Xeomin, and Myobloc - and there are some more that should be available in the next year or so - but dont worry, we will, as always, offer every one that is useful (can be used to create natural results), works (is effective both in studies and when compared to other options in real life), and is safe (FDA clinical trials focus on safety and provide us with data on how safe the treatments are). Having all of the options available and being used by our team of physician injectors, means youll never have to settle for the second best treatment option at Reflections.

No, Jeuveau does not add volume, and so its not considered a filler. Instead, Jeaveau is an injectable neuromodulator, which helps reduce wrinkles by decreasing the intensity of repetitive facial expressions.

No, Jeuveau is not cheaper. Originally, there were some rumors it would be, but once it became available for doctors to purchase, it was made clear that Botox and Jeuveau actually cost almost exactly the same amount, and so the price for patients is nearly always very similar. At our practice, we price all neuromodulators the same for the same dosage, or impact. And the reason we do that, is because theyre essentially the same thing, and we want patients to listen to our recommendations about which will create the best result, not which one costs a few dollars less.

Jeuveau is available at a treatment option for wrinkles at both of our New Jersey offices, provided by any of our physician injectors.

Jeuveau completed clinical trials before receiving FDA Approval. FDA Approval is considered the gold standard worldwide for efficacy and safety. Beyond these clinical studies, Jeuveau was first introduced to the Korean market in 2014 under the name Nabota, and so we have some good data as well about what happens when Jeuveau is used outside of closely controlled scientific studies. So far, there have been absolutely no adverse events (or complications) reported with Jeuveau – which most are attributing to the fact that this the same molecule as Botox, and with almost 20 years of use, we’ve gotten really good at using this product safely and effectively.

Yes! Dysport is great for creating a soft, natural relaxation of forehead wrinkles.

Yes! We can use Dysport to help reduce some wrinkles under the eyes. By relaxing the muscles that causes your lower eyelid to lift during squinting, we can help reduce horizontal wrinkling in that area.

Yes! When injected to create a nonsurgical browlift, Dysport can be used to lift your eyebrows. Our expert physician injectors know how to create a natural-looking (and moving) eyebrow lift.

Sure! Dysport and Botox can be used one after the other, or even at the same time by the same patient, so long as they are being injected by someone who understands how to use both safely. Our physician injectors will help you choose the right product(s) for you, and inject them in the way that will create the most natural results.

Yes! Dysport helps slow down the squinting muscles that cause crows feet, and smooths out wrinkles in that area.

Xeomin contains highly diluted botulinum toxin type A, which is a widely used for both medical and cosmetic treatment and is the same protein as Botox and Dysport. This chemical solution affects nerve impulses and can be used in small doses to block muscle nerve activity. This works by temporarily blocking nerve signals to the muscles which will prevent the facial muscles from contracting when making expressions. Decreasing the intensity of muscle contractions will help soften the wrinkles on the face and avoid further lines from forming. Although this treatment is not a permanent solution to these signs of aging, recurrent treatment of Xeomin can provide long-lasting results.

Xeomin, Dysport, and Botox are all different brands, and very slightly different versions, of the same molecule. They work in the same way: they reduce the repeated facial motions and expressions that create wrinkles. However, there are some very small differences between these products: For some people, these products take effect at different rates. It hasn’t been proven to occur for all individuals. Some people are allergic to one brand of neuromodulator and find that using a different brand works just fine for them. We price all three of these products so that you would pay the same amount for the same result with each.

The longevity of your Xeomin treatment may vary depending on how quickly your body metabolizes the solution. Typically, your results will last between three to four months before requiring additional treatment. This injectable is not a permanent fix for certain signs of aging, but through ongoing treatment, the results can be long-lasting. When coming to Reflections Center for your Xeomin appointment, you will be able to schedule your future appointments to help ensure you maintain your newly rejuvenated appearance.

When looking for an alternative to Xeomin, there are two other neuromodulators on the market today. Both containing slightly different versions of the same protein molecule, Botox and Dysport are other treatment options to consider. Each patient is different and may require different treatment to achieve the desired results. In order to determine which treatment is best for you, please schedule your complimentary consultation.

Although risks and side effects for Xeomin are very uncommon, It is critical to ensure that you are not allergic Xeomin or botulinum toxin, more specifically. Side effects may include asymmetry of the treated region or prominence of the injection site. These conditions are infrequent and, through the help of our expert injectors the chances of the side effects a significantly reduced. Our cosmetic physicians are highly trained to maximize patient safety and provide the most natural-looking results.

Yes, but only after 1 hour has passed since injection, and youll need to be more careful than usual about cleanliness as you apply your makeup. Thoroughly wash your hands and brush/makeup applicator prior to applying makeup, and avoid covering the injection insertion points for 24 hours.

Yes, absolutely you can wash your face after Juvederm. You want to first wash your hands thoroughly, and then be gentle as you wash your face so as not to rub vigrously or manipulate the filler (for the first 36 hours after injection) and to not irritate or rub into the injection insertion points.

Juvederm is hydrophilic, meaning it loves water. It will draw water molecules to itself, and hold them in place in the skin. In this way, Juvederm sometimes appears to swell slightly, especially directly after it is placed. There is, obviously, a limit to the number of water molecules Juvederms molecules can hold on to, so the effect is fairly mild and limited in nature. This is different than some other hyaluronic acid fillers, such as Restylane, which does not attract water. We cover this in more detail in our blog Restylane vs. Juvederm.

No, Juvederm itself stays the same. However, what you tend to feel immediately upon injection is firmness due to swelling and inflammation (think of how a newly-bruised area will feel like a firm bump). While we will do our best not to bruise you, you should expect swelling and firmness that will resolve within a few days, and will likely not be visible to others, but you will be able to feel it when you touch the area. As that swelling is dissipating, Juvederm will also be attracting water to itself, and these 2 effects happening simultaneously may feel as if Juvederm is softening.

You will see immediate volumization with Juvederm which varies according to the area injected. For example, lips look plumper, nasal labial folds are softened and temple deficits are improved all giving you a more youthful look and feeling!

Juvederm came out in 2006 - or received approval by the FDA, based on a clinical trial that determined its safety and efficacy.

Any filler in the wrong hands may cause complications including damage to the skin and/or blindness. That is why it is so important to use an experienced and skilled injector.

Yes, but it should not if it is injected properly and you take the proper post-injection precautions. Proper injection technique deposits filler into the right planes of the tissues and in the right droplet sizes, making it less likely to migrate. As for post-care, youll want to avoid pressing and manipulating the treatment area for 36 hours, to allow filler to naturally settle into its new home. This doesnt mean you cant touch the area, but you wouldnt want to lay on your face to have a massage, for instance, or wear a tightly-fitting motorcycle helmet - for those 36 hours directly after injection.

Although you \u201ccan\u201d drink alcohol after Juvederm, it is best to wait 6 hours especially after having your lips injected. Both alcohol and salt consumption increase water retention/swelling and or bruising.

You can certainly use a single syringe of Juvederm across multiple locations in one treatment for one patient - for example, splitting the syringe between the lips and smile lines. However, it is not advisable you split a syringe between patients or between sittings, as this increases the risk of infection and contamination. Some offices will sell half syringes of Juvederm, as you can get Juvederm in a half-sized syringe from the manufacturer. We do not sell half-syringes at our practice, since each 1ml standard syringe is equivalent to 1/5 of a teaspoon in volume. 1/10 of a teaspoon is just too small to make a visible change, and we find patients are really happiest with 1-2 full syringes of Juvederm, even for small tweaks to their looks.

Juvederm adds volume due to it being composed of Hyaluronic Acid. Studies have shown that Juvederm injections do increase/stimulate some collagen production.

How long your Juvederm will last depends upon 3 factors: Injection technique Location being injected (lips vs. cheeks vs. jawline) Your metabolism Juvederm being placed in the right depth and plane within the tissue, and in the right size of droplets will affect how long the product lasts - and really how well it stands up to movement and metabolic processes. The location being injected determines the amount of movement that the product will have to endure. Juvederm is less durable under intense movement than some of the newer gel fillers, such as Refyne or Vollure. Finally, certain individuals will notice they metabolize, or break down, hyaluronic acid fillers (which are long-chain sugar molecules) much faster than others. Many times, runners will complain they just seem to metabolize filler like no one else. Theres no studies yet to show why this may be - whether its the effect from intense cardio or whether those who enjoy running more commonly have a naturally higher metabolism - and it doesnt seem to happen for all runners. So its just anecdotal for now. But you should be aware there does seem to be a subset of people for whom Juvederm and other fillers dont seem to last nearly as long. This subset is a true minority, but it is real.

While both Juvederm and Botox can help you look and feel refreshed and more youthful they treat different signs of aging. For example, Juvederm is used to in deep creases like the nasal labial folds to restore your natural contour, in your lips to restore youthful volume. Botox is used to slow down lines created by overactive muscles such as crow’s feet and frown lines. They both treat premature signs of aging

Juvederm is a hyaluronic acid(HA) filler that plumps and fills the skin. It should only be injected by doctors, physician assistants (P.A.), or ARNPs in a medically safe environment, by New Jerseys legal standards. In the hands of a skilled and experience injector, it is very safe and can create very natural results to either tweak your appearance, or restore the changes made by aging.

We do not usually inject less than 1 syringe of Juvederm.

The natural-ness of your Juvederm result is completely dependant upon the skill and expertise of your injector. Think of Juvederm like paint and the injector like the painter. The result can be a masterpiece, or a mess - it totally depends upon the injector.

One of the best ways to help your Juvederm last longer, and to save you money in the long term, is to have your next treatment before this treatment fully wears off. We cover this in more detail in our blog How to Make Your Filler & Botox Last Longer.

Generally, 1-2 syringes of filler are needed for marionette lines. We often inject more than 1 type of filler for a given area, so that may be just 1 syringe of Juvederm, and 1 syringe of another filler, etc. We cover this in more detail on our blog

There is no reason medical Juvederm cannot be injected 1 syringe immediately after another. However, like all injections, swelling is expected and naturally occurs with Juvederm injections. Generally, after weve placed 1-2 syringes (depending upon the individual), swelling will start to distort the area a little bit. At which point, we will stop injection and allow that swelling to subside over the course of 2 weeks. This is how we ensure our results are precise and natural-appearing. For this reason, patients wishing to achieve a bigger transformation for any single area may need to have their treatments staged over a couple of treatments. However, this is the exception, not the rule. Most patients are very happy with the results from 1-2 syringes in a single area.

Juvederm is not covered by insurance. Health insurance does not cover cosmetic treatments unless they are caused by a disease (not by natural aging). You should call your insurance carrier if you have questions about their coverage, as it does vary by plan. Our office does not accept health insurance for payment, but you may be able to submit treatments to them for reimbursement.

Patients age 18 or older are suitable candidates for Juvederm. You should start Juvederm at any age over 18 when you desire to make a change to your appearance.

Juvederm and Restylane both tend to last around the same amount of time when injected in a similar style, in the same location, and in the same patient.

Yes, Juvederm can be dissolved using hyaluronidase or hylenex. Our practice, unfortunately, sees many patients each week that need filler injected by other providers dissolved and revised. With Juvederm, the most common complaint is lumps and bumps, especially in the lips. We do recommend you wait at least 2 weeks after your initial injection to make any decision about dissolving, since swelling can mimic bumpy filler for at least the first few weeks. Our physician injectors will evaluate you for revision and dissolving of filler during your free consultation. Please contact us to schedule a consultation if you are considering dissolving your Juvederm.

Yes, Juvederm dissolves over time, as do all hyaluronic acid fillers. Generally, we say it lasts about 6-12 months. The rate of breakdown (or duration of result) is greatly affected in Juvederm specifically by the amount of movement in the area where it is placed. For instance, mouths move quite a lot, and Juvederm breaks down much faster here than it will in the nose, where the tissues move far less. The dissolving nature of Juvederm is what allows us to dissolve it with an enzyme if there is a complication or undesired result, and many patients very much like having this option available to them.

When Juvederm is injected by a qualified and experienced injector the potential for \u201cfiller lumps\u201d is dramatically reduced. Most lumps are broken down by your body’s own mechanism and resolve on their own. If they do not smooth out in 2 weeks, your injector can dissolve them.

You will see an immediate change from Juvederm, but your final results should be settled in by the 2-week mark, if not before. In the first few days, you will see and feel some swelling, and that usually is worst on the day after injection, and then usually mostly gone by day 3-5.

Juvederm is not very painful in the way we perform the injections. Patients should expect to feel a small pinch as we make the insertion points, but because the product is mixed with numbing lidocaine and most commonly injected with a blunt-tip cannula, the rest of the procedure feels like pressure, not pain. This procedure can be completely numbed for, as your dentist does before filling a cavity, for those who are particularly sensitive.

Bumps and lumps are not expected with Juvederm. Contact your injector and let them know if you are experiencing lumps or bumps.

JUVEDERM\u00ae injections are tolerated quite well. Some patients desire pre-treatment with topical anesthetic. For lip enhancement we recommend local anesthetic injections similar to what a dentist provides. There is no discomfort after the procedure. If there is mild swelling or bruising, this is generally short lived.

To make your Volbella last longer, you should stay hydrated internally by drinking water, reduce the amount of sun exposure you receive and avoid compressive forces to area where it was injected. For example if it is injected for vertical lip lines caused by side sleeping, consider use of a side sleeping pillow to take pressure off the treatment area.

Volbella itself doesnt tend to swell, but with any injection, you can expect your body to swell in reaction to the needles and cannulas used. Swelling with Volbella tends to be mild compared to other fillers, since the filler itself isnt swelling (unlike most other fillers). Certain areas of the face are more prone to swelling, including the lips and under eyes, and certain individuals are more prone to swelling than others. For fine lines not on the lips or undereyes, we dont typically see swelling thats visible or lasts beyond a few hours. Lips and under eyes tend to swell more during the first 24 hours, and then slowly resolve over a few days. Again, it should be really mild with Volbella - especially as compared to other fillers.

It could.... we typically dont use it there because its not great at the 2 most common under eye concerns: 1. deep tear trough indentations that need filling in (Volbella flows like water and doesnt offer lifting or support for skin in indentations) and 2. wrinkles caused by repetitive motion by muscles (Volbella is like water, and does not provide resistance against the damage to the skin caused by repetitive facial expressions). Volbella would work well for someone with etched-in crows feet or lots of tiny fine lines around the eyes. But for these other, more common concerns, we typically use Restylane or Silk, sometimes Belotero.

Yes, but you wouldnt be happy with the result. Heres why: Volbella could be used for nearly any place on the face or body, but the marionette lines are caused by repetitive motions made by your mouth, which cause the skin to folds and crinkle, creating weak spots in the skin’s underlying support structure, which will become the wrinkles and indentations you see over time. Volbella flows like water, making it great for fine lines, but it doesn’t hold up well or \u201cbounce back\u201d from repetitive motions in the way refyne or vollure do, and it doesn’t create the firm support needed to smooth out indentations or wrinkles and folds. There’s a reason we stock so many fillers at our practice, and it’s because we understand that each filler really only does 1 or 2 things best – and when you try to use it for other things, it’s going to require a lot more product (higher cost) and break down way faster than it should.

We wouldnt use more than 1 syringe of Volbella for the lips, or really for any other single placement area. Heres why: Volbella doesnt add volume, lift, or shape in a meaningful way - and there are so many other fillers that do that work better. So we may sometimes use 1 syringe of Volbella at the skins surface for smoothing, and 1+ syringes of other fillers to make other changes, in the same appointment.

Juvederm Volbella is a very thin filler most commonly used for lip definition, to shape the cupid’s bow and also for lines around lips and eyes.

You can - and you shouldnt. Our physician injectors massage and form the filler as they place it, as needed (Volbella flows like water, so generally does not need this). Once weve placed your filler, you should avoid massage or rubbing the filler for at least 48 hours to allow it to settle into the placements weve made. If you do massage or rub your filler during this time, often youll end up pushing it out of place and have weird lumps and bumps - although specifically with Volbella, youd have a hard time making it into bumps or lumps because it just is such a thin, water-like filler.

It could, but it definitely shouldnt be. Voluma is a very stiff, bouncy, lifting filler and that could create problems in 2 ways: Voluma could become visible through the thinner-than-usual skin under the eyes, creating weird lumps and bumps (this is why Voluma is injected deep into tissues of the face and never superficially) Voluma creates lift in the areas where its injected - and too much lift under the eyes could create a puffy, unnatural look Now, sometimes you will see the undereye of a patient improve after having had Voluma injected, but that Voluma is injected into the cheeks. When thats the case, what was happening is a deflated and heavy cheek was pulling downward, creating jowls, and distorting the undereye. Typically this is not just aging, but also some weight fluctuations that leads to this kind of change. Lifting and supporting that cheek with Voluma, will release the weight on the undereye, and allow it to return to its natural shape, and if it was naturally not indented, this will fix the problem.

Most patients wont see a big difference from just 1 syringe of Voluma in their cheeks. 1 syringe of filler is equivalent to 1/5 of a teaspoon, so splitting that between your cheeks is only going to offer a small tweak in your appearance. However, most patients are very happy with 2-4 syringes in their cheeks, and that can be broken up across several appointments if you prefer to keep your transformation as discreet and affordable as possible. This is exactly the sort of thing we love to discuss when creating treatment plans during the free consultation.

All patients will have varying degrees of volume loss as well as unique aesthetic goals which is why we recommend that patient’s schedule a complimentary consultation with one of our cosmetic physician injectors. They will assess your degree of volume loss and take your goals into account before making their recommendations.

Yes, both with aging and weight loss, we will often lose some of the fat in our cheekbones. This causes the cheeks skin to fall downward and in towards the mouth, creating the beginnings of jowls. Over time, that skin and muscles on the cheeks below will be strained and start to lose more of their elasticity and fall deeper and deeper into the jowls, and when that happens, really only surgery can fix it. But most patients between the ages of 40 and 60 can see significant improvement in jowls with Voluma injections.

You can have swelling after Voluma, though most patients do not have visible swelling. This is because Voluma is injected so deeply that the top layers of the skin dont really get too bothered by the process, and so swelling is almost never noticeable. However, some patients do feel the swelling in the form of mild tenderness for a day or so after.

Like all hyaluronic acid(HA) fillers, Voluma can be dissolved by injecting hyaluronidase (also called hylanex). Voluma is more difficult to dissolve when compared to other fillers, because its cross-linking structure protects it from breaking down (thats also why it lasts longer than other fillers). For that reason, youll want an experienced dissolver of Voluma, if you decide to go that route, because theres a fine line between enough to dissolve your Voluma, and not too much to dissolve your natural HA. Voluma is probably one of the most common dissolve requests we see, and if youre curious about the process, we recommend you watch this video from our patient: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=v42kiWAVAkg

Juvederm Voluma is a dermal filler that was created in order to add lift and volume back to the cheek area to restore a more youthful shape to the face while and minimizing wrinkles and creases. The results from Voluma are immediately noticeable and can last for up to two years.

Voluma works immediately. In fact, most patients walk out of the office thrilled with the instant results they have from Voluma.

We dont inject Voluma into the red part of the lips for lip augmentation, but it can be really helpful for firming up the skin-tone upper portion of the lip for those with deep lip lines and a loss of support for that skin.

Yes, Voluma is a unique formulation of cross-linked hyaluronic acid (HA) molecules.

In general, an average amount of Voluma is 1-2 syringes per cheek.

Theres really no reason you cant get Voluma as frequently as you want, provided that youre not going beyond a reasonable amount. We do recommend you dont re-treat the same area for at least 2 weeks because there is a small possibility during the two week window that swelling could be interfering with the visible results.

Yes, Voluma is more expensive for any doctor to buy from the manufacturer than Juvederm, and so thats why its more expensive for the patient, as well.

Vollure comes pre-mixed with lidocaine, a numbing medicine. Most patients do not need additional numbing, or anesthetic. However, we do have lidocaine injections and ice packs available.

Our practice takes every precaution to avoid bruising with dermal filler injections. We use Accuvein, a special light technology that allows our doctors to visualize your veins prior to injection, and we use blunt-tip cannulas whenever possible to inject Vollure. A blunt-tip cannula is a small tube with a blunt tip that can easily push through tissues and around blood vessels without harming them, to inject Vollure without using a needle. This technique may not be ideal for some treatment areas, depending on the individual’s anatomy. If you do end up with a bruise, we offer arnica to help the bruise resolve faster. We also offer complimentary laser treatments to help break up the bruise and clear it away faster. You can greatly reduce the risk of a bruise by avoiding blood thinning medications and food/drinks prior to injection. The most common blood thinners are Vitamin E, wine and alcohol, and blood thinning prescription medications. Do not stop any prescription medications without the consent of the prescribing physician.

Vollure’s full results are seen immediately. This is not always the case with dermal fillers and is not true of Voluma and Juvederm, which are hydrophilic, meaning they absorb and hold onto more water over time. Because Vollure’s real results are visible as they are injected, this product allows for a level of precision very few other products can come close to. There will be some swelling from your injections which typically resolves in a few days to a week, which can obscure your results at first. Often, especially with lip injections, we have patients call us the day after their injections very worried. It is typical to have some swelling the day after. This will resolve within a few days, and patients usually find they are extremely happy with the end result after this swelling resides. Should you find you are not, Vollure can be \u201creversed\u201d using an enzyme injection.

Alternative treatment options vary by concern being treated. You can view a full list of treatment options by symptom by clicking the \u201ctreated areas\u201d titles above, which will direct you to a page that covers that particular concern in detail, as well as all treatment options and who is best-suited to each. Vollure is most similar to Restylane’s Refyne and Defyne dermal fillers. However, depending on the individual’s anatomy, our physician injectors may recommend other dermal fillers, such as Volbella, Juvederm Ultra XC, Bellafill, Belotero, Sculptra, Radiesse, or Restylane as a better match for the result you’re looking to achieve. Our skill lies in matching each patient with the best possible treatment for their needs, to create a natural result.

Vollure has a thin consistency and is most effective when injected superficially. It is useful in areas with repetitive motion, such as the nasolabial folds. There are other more robust dermal fillers which are preferable for contouring cheeks such as Voluma, Restylane Lyft and Restylane Contour.

It can, but we dont recommend it for under the eyes. We prefer fillers that flow over cohesive gels like Vollure for this treatment area, because fillers that arent very soft and flowing will often appear lumpy under the thin skin below the eyes.

Yes, Vollure, (& all Hyaluronic Acid dermal fillers) have been shown to stimulate collagen long term. In addition to the initial water retention and contouring benefits, H.A. fillers do create neo-collagenesis (new collagen synthesis) over an extended period of time.

Depending upon the area injected, swelling from Vollure may last as short as 2 days and is usually resolved within 1 week.

You should expect some redness and mild swelling at the injection sites. This typically resolves within a few hours. Swelling can linger for a few days up to a week after injection. You can apply makeup over top of your injections to mask the redness before leaving our office, for complete discretion. There is no need to refrain from workouts or any other activity, with one exception: you should not rub vigorously or massage the injected area.

Usually, injections can be performed directly following your complimentary consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians. The entire injection process can take between 10 and 45 minutes, depending on the complexity and number of syringes used.

We discourage patients from trying to discern the actual dermal filler to have injected. Here’s why: there are nuances to each product that does truly make some products better-suited to particular treatments and/or cases. However, the best indicator of your result is the injector. Injectors each have their own ways of approaching treatments – little tricks they use or special techniques that they find work well for their injection style, and their familiarity and comfort with a product play a large role into what they can make that product do for you. So we tell patients that for the best results, they should select an experienced and skilled provider, clearly communicate what result they hope to achieve, and then allow the physician to select the tools to achieve that goal.

Injections with Vollure don’t hurt very much at all. This is because Vollure comes mixed with lidocaine, a numbing medicine. So while you will feel the initial pin-prick of the injection, you’re unlikely to feel much after that. The area will stay numb for a few hours following injection. Those who are concerned or particularly sensitive can request additional pre-injection numbing injections with lidocaine or can use ice prior to injection to numb the treatment area (avoiding the initial pin-prick of Vollure).

Vollure has been approved by the FDA for its safety and efficacy. This means it has been studied in variety of individuals to ensure it is safe and effective for all skin types and a variety of concerns. The FDA clinical studies were focused around correction of moderate to severe facial wrinkles and folds, such as nasolabial folds in adults over the age of 21. So while it is technically \u201coff-label\u201d to inject other parts of the face, we consider this to be a safe use of this product because it is so similar to a handful of other hyaluronic acid fillers which have been used for years to inject throughout the face.

Yes - normal sleeping on a pillow shouldnt be rough enough to distort or move your fillers. What you dont want to do is smoosh your face into a massage table right after its injected, or anything on that same level of pressure with a firm object. You only need to worry about this for the first 48 hours.

They can - and heres how: its likely you wont wait for your filler to entirely break down before you come back in, so when we inject filler on top of filler, and especially when that filler is placed in the same area, then the actual HA molecules should have less surface-area-contact with your tissues, which in studies has been shown to allow them to be more resistant to breaking down - making them last longer!

yes - this is the most common amount of Juvederm our patients have injected into their lips.

Yes, juvederm is a very natural result when it is injected by a skilled injector - and at a rate of only 1, max 2, syringes per appointment when being used to build up the lips. Juvederm can be used in much larger quantities in a single session when used in other locations - but unnatural lip filler with juvederm is unfortunately common because of the demand for kylie-level results in a single session at a low low price (i.e. not very skilled injectors doing the injecting). When you get bad lip filler, unfortunately the only fix is to dissolve it, and then pay more to have an experienced injector inject it correctly - so we do recommend you avoid that route.

Usually only 1 - and the times when you would need 2, the second syringe would likely be a different formulation, or brand, of filler.

When Kybella is used in the hands of an experienced and skilled provider there is very minimal risk or nerve irritation, however this has not been shown to be permanent. Do not let a non-physician inject kybella.

Kybella is FDA approved for use in the area under the chin (submental region). Its use in jowls is considered off label but it is very effective in this region, and in the hands of an experienced physician it should be safe.

Kybella is deoxycholic acid and therefore does not dissolve H.A or Hyaluronic Acid fillers. There is an entirely different substance – Hyaluronidase dissolves fillers.

Each patient’s treatment plan will be customized to their aesthetic goals during their consultation. The number of treatments will vary between 2 and 6, with most patients needing between 3 and 5 treatments to see maximum results. Once you’ve reached your full results, we do not anticipate you needing more treatments, as long as you maintain the results with a healthy diet and exercise.

Kybella is FDA-approved for use in the submental area below the chin and through the neck and has been shown to be very safe and effective in treating these areas. However, there have not been sufficient clinical studies to show safety and efficacy in other parts of the body.

Changes are expected to become more evident after the second treatment takes full effect. Usually, results improve through 3 months after the second treatment session.

Kybella is priced by the number of vials used, with smaller areas requiring fewer vials than larger areas. Each treated area will need at least 2 injection sessions, and up to 4 or more, depending upon how much fat there is to treat. Typically, a double chin or jowls is going to cost around $900 – 1800 per treatment, making the final cost $1800 – 3600+.

Some patients will experience mild swelling and potential bruising in the injection site for 2-3 days after injection. To minimize swelling, you will be instructed to wear a compression chin strap for the first 24 hours following treatment. We are happy to accommodate your schedule with evening and weekend hours. You should expect to see full results from each session at about a month after injection, at which time you should come in for your next session until you have reached the desired level of correction. It is not expected that you will need re-treatment in the future.

The injections take 15-20 minutes for the physician to perform. You will numb prior to injection, so you should plan to be in the office for about an hour total with each treatment.

Your doctor will numb the area with lidocaine, the same way your dentist numbs you before you have a cavity filled. After the numbing wears off there can be some tenderness that can be relieved by ibuprofen.

Kybella may be used to reduce fat on the inner knees; however it is not FDA approved for this area.

The broken-down fat cells will gradually be flushed out by your body’s natural metabolic process.

Not quite yet – it takes the body some time to flush out the dead fat cells, so you will have to wait 4-6 weeks to see your results.

You should start to see results after one treatment, but most patients need at least two Kybella sessions for optimal results.

Your double chin could return if you gain a significant amount of weight after your injections.

The fat cells targeted by the injections cannot come back but other fat cells can grow if a stable weight is not maintained.

If your skin is beginning to age and has lost its elasticity, it may appear a little loose after Kybella treatment. A quick skin tightening treatment can fix this.

The results of Kybella are permanent as long as you maintain a stable weight.

Yes! Kybella permanently destroys fat cells, although you can still gain weight again if you do not stick to a healthy diet and exercise routine.

Results from Radiesse injections for volumetric changes are visible right away, but the final result takes months to develop. That’s because Radiesse is an injectable that offers some volume replacement in the short-term, but over the long-term Radiesse stimulates the body to build new collagen, a process which can take 3-6 months, and this improves the result you see over time. Results from Radiesse are usually seen immediately but improve over the first week after injection. For skin tightening and skin improvement using hyperdilute Radiesse, the result is not visible until that collagen has started to build up, around month 3 to 6.

Radiesse is a bio-stimulatory injectable comprised of \u201cCalcium hydroxylapatite\u201d in a gel base. It is a filler most commonly used for the following areas: Cheeks, NLF (nasolabial folds) peri-oral area, jaw line and hands. We also use it in a hyper-dilute manner to improve texture and firmness of the skin on the face as well as the chest, knees, arms and buttocks. The beauty of Radiesse is that it stimulates your body to naturally produce your own collagen.

Each person reacts differently to Radiesse, and each individual will need different things to reach their cosmetic goals, which is why it’s difficult to answer if you’ll need more than one treatment. However, in general, patients seeking volume restoration (liquid facelift, hand rejuvenation, etc.) need only 1 treatment to see great results from Radiesse. Typically those results last about 1 to 2 years. For skin tightening, we do see that patients with mild skin laxity can get great results from a single treatment, whereas those patients with more severe skin looseness and textural issues may need more. Again, theseresults last from 1 to 2 years. Typically we see all patients back for a 3 month check-in after Radiesse injections to make sure we’ve reached your goal, or are very close (since you can have more results develop between month 3 and 6).

Results from Radiesse have been shown to last at least 1 year from the final injections.

We can only speak to what we charge for Radiesse, and this does vary quite a bit by practice. We are neither the cheapest, nor the most expensive, and we make sure our pricing allows our physicians to spend quality time with our patients, working in their best interest to create the very best possible results. Radiesse starts at $750 at our practice. The total cost of your Radiesse procedure may be more, depending upon how much Radiesse you’ll need to accomplish your cosmetic goals.

Most people are good candidates for Radiesse injections, but there are a few people who should avoid Radiesse as a treatment option. You should avoid Radiesse if: - you have severe allergic reactions that have included throat swelling (anaphylaxis), or have multiple severe allergies, and there is a concern that you might have a reaction to one or more of the ingredients in Radiesse - you have a bleeding disorder - you have an active skin infection near the area you want treated (we will just need to clear up the infection prior to injection)

We use lidocaine in our injections of Radiesse. Radiesse + (Radiesse Plus) comes with some lidocaine already mixed in, but when we use Radiesse we always mix lidocaine in with it (so long as the patient is not allergic to lidocaine). Lidocaine is a numbing agent that works very similarly to the novocaine that dentists inject right before filling a cavity. Since we do not typically inject into the nerve bundles as dentists do, the effect is much less widespread and doesn’t last as long, but the numbing effect makes Radiesse injections an easy procedure.

There’s no real \u201cdowntime\u201d with Radiesse. You should expect, as with any injection, to have some redness and swelling. You’ll likely be numb for an hour or so after injection. Redness usually dissipates within an hour, too. Swelling can take 24-48 hours to go down, but is generally not noticeable to others.

It is not advised to take Ibuprofen or any other NSAIDs for a 24 hour period after Radiesse injections. You may however take Tylenol.

Radiesse should not be massaged for the first 24 hours as this might increase swelling and bruising.

It is recommended to wait 24 hours prior to working our or doing strenuous activity following Radiesse injections. Any increased blood flow may increase swelling and bruising.

No, unlike hyaluronic acid fillers, radiesse is not reversible. Radiesse is a dermal filler comprise of a biostimulatory agent in a gel base. The gel base give an immediate improvement and then breaks down over a period of weeks. The biostimulatory agent stimulates your body to produce collagen and this breaks down over a period of 12-15 months.

A lot of patients have asked us to compare Radiesse vs. Radiesse Plus. The truth is, they’re the exact same product, but Radiesse comes pre-mixed with a numbing agent called lidocaine. When we use Radiesse we mix in lidocaine, making the treatments exactly the same for our patients. The only person who would really need to know which one of these 2 was used is someone who has an allergy to lidocaine. If that is something you’ve experienced, please do let us know, as lidocaine is the most common numbing injection we use in our practice, but we do have other options available to make your procedures comfortable.

Radiesse is a safe and effective treatment that creates natural results in the hands of a skilled physician injector. Unfortunately, we live in a world with lots of inexperienced and under-qualified injectors. Most of the serious side effects of Radiesse can be attributed to a lack of knowledge and skill on the injectors’ part. There have been published incidences of nodules (lumps) forming when Radiesse is injected into the lips and when Radiesse is not diluted enough for superficial injections. For this reason, we do not inject the lips with Radiesse, and we prefer \u201csuper-dilution\u201d of Radiesse for any areas with thin skin and/or superficial injection techniques. For our patients, side effects are what you would expect for any injection: - redness at the injection site (goes away within an hour) - swelling (typically gone within 24-48 hours) - bruising (very rare with Radiesse, but we can laser bruising away if this happens to you)

Most of the time, bumps that you feel directly after injections is just pin-point swelling. We counsel our patients to give themselves 2 weeks to fully recover from the trauma of injection in order to evaluate any bumps or lumps. 90% of the time, it will resolve during that time, and its truly just a firm spot that was disrupted a bit more than the surrounding tissues during injection. These are often spots you can feel, but cant see. Beyond that 2 weeks, if you still have lumps or bumps, we like to see our patients back in for an evaluation. We can always dissolve Restylane - but rarely need to do so.

We recommend you not drink for the 24 hours before and after your injections with Restylane or any other type of filler, because alcohol thins the blood. With any blood thinner (including alcohol, Vitamin E, pain relievers, and prescription blood thinners), a small bruise can turn into a much bigger bruise - and we know our patients want to avoid bruising from fillers. However, it doesnt really pose a true health risk to drink after Restylane injections - its just a precaution to help reduce the risks of bruising. So dont worry if you forget and accidentally have a glass of wine after.

Sure! In fact, we sometimes inject Restylane while youre laying down! Filler, once placed, isnt going to move around unless you vigorously rub or massage it. We do recommend you avoid traditional face-down massages for at least 24 hours after injection, though.

Yes! Restylane is a great filler for dark circles. We cover filler for dark circles in much more detail on our dark circles treatments page.

You can - but should you? If you mean can you mix them together to create some hybrid injectable filler solution - yeah, you could do that safely. Probably not an ideal thing to do since these 2 fillers behave very differently. More likely youre wondering if you can have both Restylane and Juvederm injected - perhaps youre worried about having them injected in the same area, or even on the same day - either of those scenarios is just fine as well.

Injections with Lyft don’t hurt very much at all. This is because Lyft comes mixed with lidocaine, a numbing agent. So while you will feel the initial pin-prick of the injection, you’re unlikely to feel much after that. The area will stay numb for a few hours following injection. Those who are concerned or particularly sensitive can request additional pre-injection numbing injections with lidocaine or can use ice prior to injection to numb the treatment area (avoiding the initial pin-prick of Lyft).

You should expect some redness and mild swelling at the injection sites. This typically resolves within a few hours. Swelling can linger for a few days up to a week after injection. You can apply makeup over top of your injections to mask the redness before leaving our office, for complete discretion. There is no need to refrain from workouts or any other activity, with one exception: you should not rub vigorously or massage the injected area.

We discourage patients from trying to discern the actual dermal filler to have injected. Here’s why: there are nuances to each product that does truly make some products better-suited to particular treatments and/or cases. However, the best indicator of your result is the injector. Injectors each have their own ways of approaching treatments – little tricks they use or special techniques that they find work well for their injection style, and their familiarity and comfort with a product play a large role into what they can make that product do for you. For example, some physicians prefer Voluma because it swells as it attracts and holds onto more water with time, and that gives it more of a lift over time. But some physicians prefer that Lyft doesn’t change over time, allowing them to be very precise in their injections. Each physician may prefer one of these products over another for the same treatment areas in different patients. It’s very individualized. So we tell patients that for the best results, they should select an experienced and skilled provider, clearly communicate what result they hope to achieve, and then allow the physician to select the tools to achieve that goal.

Lyft comes pre-mixed with lidocaine, a numbing medicine. Most patients do not need additional numbing, or anesthetic. However, we do have lidocaine injections and ice packs available.

These products are one and the same. Originally called Perlane, the product was rebranded as Lyft after receiving FDA appproval for cheek lifting injections.

Our practice takes every precaution to avoid bruising with dermal filler injections. We use Accuvein, a special light technology that allows our doctors to visualize your veins prior to injection, and we typically use blunt-tip cannulas for injecting Lyft. A blunt-tip cannula is a small tube with a blunt tip that can easily push through tissues and around blood vessels without harming them, to inject Lyft without using a needle. If you do end up with a bruise, we offer arnica to help the bruise resolve faster. We also offer complimentary laser treatments to help break up the bruise and clear it away faster. You can greatly reduce the risk of a bruise by avoiding blood thinning medications and food/drinks prior to injection. The most common blood thinners are Vitamin E, wine and alcohol, and blood thinning prescription medications. Do not stop any prescription medications without the consent of the prescribing physician.

Lyft’s full results are seen immediately. This is not always the case with dermal fillers and is not true of Voluma. Because Lyft’s real results are visible as they are injected, this product allows for a level of precision very few other products can come close to. There will be some swelling from your injections which typically resolves in a few days to a week, which can obscure your results at first.

Lyft was previously known as Perlane. It was one of the very first dermal fillers to receive FDA approval for safety and efficacy, and has one of the longest histories of continuous and safe use, at over a decade of continuous use.

Usually, injections can be performed directly following your complimentary consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians. The entire injection process can take between 10 and 45 minutes, depending on the complexity and number of syringes used.

In studies, Refyne lasts about 12 months. Out here in the real world, we counsel patients that the duration of your result really depends upon which filler was used, which injection technique was used, where the filler was placed in your body - and most importantly - your metabolism rate. Because at the end of the day, HA filler lasts as long as it takes your body to break it down and metabolize it.

Refyne can be injected nearly anywhere - but the best use cases are areas where the filler needs to be placed closer to the surface of the skin, and the area is subjected to a lot of movement. For example, around the mouth and to support and smooth out lines and wrinkles. Both of these placements, the filler needs to be able to hold up to the beating it will take from being squished and moved around during normal facial expressions. Older HA filler formulations were bad at that - and so filler wouldnt last very long. Refyne and Defyne were formulated as gels to allow them to bounce back and last longer in areas with lots of movement. Defyne is the firmer of the two, and works best for deeper placements. Refyne is a bit softer, and so it creates a more natural result when placed superficially, as compared to Defyne. Whatever your goals, our office keeps all of the FDA-Approved fillers in stock and our physician injectors will happily direct you towards the optimal filler for your goals (both aesthetically, and budget-wise).

Yes! All Hyaluronic Acid (HA) fillers provide immediate results, including Refyne.

Refyne costs $750 per syringe at our New Jersey offices. And we do offer discounts when you purchase more than 1 syringe of filler at the same visit, in addition to savings and loyalty programs that will also save you money on each injectable visit (as well as most other treatments, too).

Defyne and Refyne are very similar, but Defyne is firmer and that means if you place it too close to the surface, youll be able to feel it, which is not ideal. So Refyne is softer and what we use closer to the surface of the skin, for that reason. Otherwise, theyre very similar fillers.

Yes! Refyne works very well for the lips because its made to hold up to high movement in that area. However, you may also want to consider Kysse, which was developed by the same manufacturer, with the lips specifically in mind.

Sculptra ranges between $950-1050 per vial. We accept financing for all bills over $1000. You can purchase multiple treatment sessions to reach that limit, if needed. Find more information, as well as how to apply online before your consultation, here on our financing options page.

Sculptra is very different from other dermal fillers. The most popular dermal fillers, like Restylane, Juvederm, and Voluma, are made of hyaluronic acid(HA). These fillers create an immediate result that very gradually dissipates as the body metabolizes the HA. Typically the dissolving process takes between 6 and 18 months. On the other hand, Sculptra works slowly over 1-3 months to stimulate your body to build more of its own new cells (collagen cells) for results that last over 2 years (they’re your own cells, so they stick around for a really long time). Where HA fillers are used to spot treat areas of concern, Sculptra treats wide-spread concerns. Your entire face ages and loses collagen, so it makes sense that natural facial rejuvenation should be done in a global, widespread process to create the most natural and balanced results. On the other hand, while Sculptra can’t really be used to correct asymmetries or unbalanced proportions in the way HA fillers can. For example, say your undereyes have lose fat volume much faster than the rest of your face. That is not easily corrected with Sculptra, but is better-suited to an HA filler spot treatment. Lip augmentation is better treated with HA filler, whereas lip lines are often better-treated with Sculptra or other collagen-stimulating treatments.

Scuptra is often prescribed as the treatment of choice for HIV-positive patients who experience severe facial wasting (gaunt appearance) due to their illness. In this case, insurance does cover treatment. However, we have never seen insurance approve to pay for Sculptra for any other circumstance. We do not accept insurance payments, but if you are HIV-positive and seeking Sculptra injections, we can provide you with itemized billing to submit to your insurance carrier for reimbursement. Any denials or appeals by your insurance will be your responsibility entirely.

Sculptra injections are deeper than Botox – around the same depth as Voluma. We want our patients to be comfortable, so we do typically mix a numbing anesthetic (similar to what your dentist injects before filling a cavity) into the Sculptra, to make the injections comfortable. The numbing wears off normally in a few hours. We can also offer patients a mix of nitrous oxide (laughing gas) to reduce anxiety, for those who are particularly sensitive to or nervous about injections. Combined, these medications keep even the most sensitive patients comfortable.

For most patients, the answer is no – there’s no downtime after Sculptra injections. Bruising is possible, so that would be the one time when patients do take some time away from work or social activities. We take bruising seriously – and work hard to ensure this doesn’t happen. The first thing we do is to ensure we’re using sharp needles. For all of our injections, we swap out to new, sharp needles frequently. This is one of the best ways to prevent bruising. We also use a special blood vessel visualization tool called the Accuvein to help us avoid hitting blood vessels during injections, which is what causes the very worst bruising. We also request patients stop all blood thinning over-the-counter medications and supplements 2-3 weeks prior to Sculptra injections, including vitamin E, fish oil, aspirin or other nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), and ginkgo biloba. Do not stop taking prescription medications without first getting the approval of the prescribing physician. Should you have bruising following your treatment, we can use our VBeam laser to break up the bruise and make the healing and recovery process much faster. If this happens to you, simply contact our office and we’ll get you in for treatment ASAP. Bruise-reduction follow-ups and laser treatments are provided free of charge to our Sculptra patients. Typically this will reduce the duration of a bruise to 2-3 days max. The fluid of the injection makes wrinkles look like they are completely gone right after the procedure. This injected volume will disappear after the first week as the fluid is absorbed. Makeup can be applied right away after Sculptra injections.

Sculptra is injected into the skin in tiny amounts, swapping in fresh needles. Local anesthetic is injected along with the Sculptra, making the treatment quite comfortable. Each Sculptra treatment session generally takes from 20 minutes to 30 minutes, depending on the number of areas treated and the effects you want to achieve.

Sculptra’s most serious risks are allergic reaction and granulomas (bumps). We can do an allergy test if you suspect you may be allergic to Sculptra. This is very rare. The risk of granulomas can be significantly reduced by using proper injection technique and following post-injection care instructions, including massage. Tenderness and mild swelling are the most common side effects. Some patients do experience bruising. See the question above regarding downtime to learn more about what to expect following your injections.

Sculptra is currently owned by Galderma, the same dermal filler company responsible for the Restylane line of dermal fillers and Dysport.

The most common alternatives to Sculptra that we recommend are: - Other Dermal Fillers when the concern needs more of a \u201cspot treatment\u201d or when a patient wants a more immediate result. - Lifting Threads when the issue is more related to loose skin than volume loss, the skin can be lifted for an immediate result, without surgery, using these threads. They are also dissolving and encourage collagen production, for natural, long-lasting results.

It is important to thoroughly massage the treated areas for five minutes, five times daily, for five days to seven days after each treatment, to allow for the even distribution of the product and to ensure natural-looking results. You will be instructed in how to perform these massages during your first treatment session. It is very important to complete these. You may be tempted to skip massages because you’re busy, or because you’re tender where you were injected. Do not skip these. They are critical to ensuring you get the results you desire from Sculptra. You can really maximize the effect from Sculptra by combining it with other procedures and treatments, such as: - Lifting Threads made from similar dissolving substances that encourage collagen growth make for a nice lifting addition and instant results for both face and body. - Laser Skin Resurfacing can be used to create channels for Sculptra to penetrate deeply into the skin topicaly. This is a cutting-edge application of Sculptra that generates more collagen from laser skin resurfacing, without the risk of bruising or swelling.

Poly-L-Lactic Acid was first used in cosmetic surgery as dissolving sutures. Plastic surgeons found that having sutures dissolve on their own (vs. physically removing them) created better scars, but it wasn’t just because they weren’t disrupting the wound during its healing process to remove the stitches – it was also because as these stitches dissolved, the body laid down collagen in their place. Collagen forms the structural support mesh in the deepest layers of the skin. Replenishing and restoring collagen creates skin that is bouncier, firmer, tighter, smoother, and more youthful, naturally. So naturally, this discovery that PLA could be used to get the body to build more collagen has been used in several applications for cosmetic outcomes. Silhouette InstaLift is the most popular other PLA cosmetic treatment at use in the U.S. currently. These dissolving lifting threads can be used in combination with Sculptra to create an immediate lifting effect that builds new collagen to support tissue into maintaining this new, lifted position.

Reflections offers an exclusive Rewards program, in addition to Galderma’s Aspire rewards. To learn more please visit our Rewards Plus Program page.

Studies show that Defyne can last up to 12 months when placed in the lips.

Defyne can be used most anywhere on the face - but here at Reflections our physicians find Defyne creates the most natural results when used for the Nasolabial Folds, and when indicated, as a layering filler (over something stiffer like Voluma or Restylane Lyft) in the cheeks and chin.

You will see your initial result right after the Defyne is injected. However, it may take about 2 weeks for it to settle (swelling to go down) and for you to see your final effects.

Restylane Defyne is a firmer version of the same technology used in Refyne. Both are cohesive gels that act a bit like memory foam - bounding back after movement.

Defyne is better for areas where your natural tissue is firmer. Refyne is its softer counterpart. Can Defyne be used in lips? Yes, but is it better for chins? yes. and is Refyne softer like lips? yes. If you used Defyne in the lips, it would probably be in the cutaneous non-red area surrounding the lip, for support (which we lose as we age).

Defyne has been shown to last up to 12 months in clinical studies. The speed at which your body will break down Defyne depends upon your metabolism, where the Defyne is injected, and the injection technique used.

Silk can be injected anywhere, but the best injectors know Silk is really only the best filler for certain areas and certain patients. Those are: under eyes and lips for patients who need superficial injection and/or who have very thin skin.

At our New Jersey offices, Silk costs $700 per syringe with injection by a cosmetic physician.

Restylane is firmer and more solid than Silk. Silk lasts longer than Restylane and tends to be a little more expensive.

Yes, we frequently use Silk under the eyes to fill in dark circles caused by tear trough deformity. It is particularly nice for those with thin skin, as it is a very water-like filler, and doesnt have the risk of lumpy-bumpy appearance that other fillers might have.

Silk creates immediate changes. You may have some swelling after injection, usually around 24-72 hours, that may obscure your results, but you will see an immediate impact.

Bellafill is injected with a very fine needle during a comfortable procedure that requires no downtime. Bellafill injections are well tolerated and contains lidocaine in its formulation, providing local anesthetic during the injection process. You may notice slight swelling, redness, or bruising following Bellafill injections. These effects are temporary and don’t generally interfere with any activities. Avoid sunbathing, exercise, alcohol and cold outdoor activities for six hours after treatment.

Bellafill can help patients suffering from particular types of acne scars, by replacing lost collagen and creating a smoother skin surface3. The criteria for Bellafill treatment are nuanced, and depend upon the actual structure of each of your scars, so a consultation with one of our physician injectors is recommended to determine which of your scars can benefit from Bellafill injections.

You won’t need to take time off from most of your regular activities, but you will need to avoid sunbathing, exercise, alcohol and cold outdoor activities for six hours after treatment. With all dermal filler injections there is a small risk of redness, swelling, and bruising. The experience and skill of our expert physician injectors help reduce these risks. In particular, the advanced cannula injection and micro-needle techniques used by our doctors reduces the risk of bruising, and allows for more accurate and natural placement of the filler.

The cost for Bellafill at Reflections is $800 per syringe. Patients generally use a single syringe to treat acne scarring. However, an exact quote based upon your treatment plan will be provided during your complimentary consultation with one of our expert physician injectors.

One week before Bellafill injections, avoid taking St. John’s wart, high doses of vitamin E, aspirin, Advil, Nuprin, and any other agents that increase bruising. If you are prone to cold sores, we may want to institute antiviral therapy before injecting near the lips. Bellafill should not be used in areas of active skin infection, including herpes outbreaks. Bellafill hasn’t been tested in pregnant or breastfeeding women.

The beneficial effects of Bellafill are noticed immediately, and are proven to last 5 years. Bellafill stimulates the body to produce collagen in the months that follow treatment, and the new collagen that you build is a long-lasting improvement.

There is no anesthesia required to receive jawline injections; you will be awake throughout the appointment. Some injectable products include lidocaine within their formula to aid in patient comfort. For others, you may receive a topical numbing cream. It is common to do the injection using a thin, blunt tube called a cannula to make the treatment safe, more comfortable and limit the downtime.

Any injections into the jawline have some risks, but are generally considered safe. Before your non-surgical jawline sculpting appointment, a physician will carefully review your health history and examine the treatment area to determine you are a suitable candidate for the procedure.

The longevity of any jawline injection result depends on the patient and the product used. However, its common for results to last between up to 2 years and possibly longer. Botox, of course, is not a filler, and only lasts 3-4 months.

Injectable appointments are completed relatively quickly. The treatment usually takes no more than 45 minutes, and the actual injection portion is generally 15 minutes or less of this, as most of the time is spent planning the treatment prior to injection.

One of the major benefits of injectables compared to other treatments is that there is no downtime. Most injectable treatments can cause some swelling, redness, and potentially bruising, but these are very temporary and should subside within a few hours or days from the injection. You can return to your normal routine immediately after your injection appointment if you choose. However, you will be encouraged to avoid strenuous activity such as exercise for at least 24 hours after receiving injectable treatments.

The cost of jawline injections depends on the products chosen, the amount of product necessary, and other factors. The average cost for a jawline filler injection is about $1,000-$3,400. The cost of your non-surgical jawline contouring will be explained after a thorough consultation.

One of the major benefits of injectables compared to other treatments is that there is no downtime. Most injectable treatments can cause some swelling, redness, and potentially bruising, but these are very temporary and should subside within a few hours or days from the injection. You can return to your normal routine immediately after your injection appointment if you choose. However, you will be encouraged to avoid strenuous activity such as exercise for at least 24 hours after receiving injectable treatments.

Yes! Most people can safely have chin fillers. To find out if chin fillers are right for you, please contact us to schedule a free consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians.

Dermal Fillers for your chin could start at $750 and range upwards of $4,000 - this depends on which types of filler you have and how many syringes of each. We cover pricing in detail in detail in the section above entitled Cost of Chin Fillers.

Getting rid of hyaluronic acid(HA) fillers is fairly easy - we just inject hyaluronidase or hyalenex into the treated area, and they will dissolve the filler. There are 3 popular Non-HA fillers: Radiesse, Belotero, and Sculptra. Generally Sculptra and Belotero arent used in the chin. Belotero cannot be dissolved or removed, and for that reason we dont use it very much at all at our practice - because your face changes so much as you age and it generally ends up looking unnatural over time. Sculptra is very rarely used in the chin for augmentation, but both Sculptra and Radiesse can theoretically be at least partially dissolved, though its less of a guarantee than an HA filler and generally a slower process. If youd like to meet with one of our doctors to discuss your chin filler removal options, please contact us to schedule a free consultation.

No - we can make chin fillers very comfortable, and we do that by providing our patients with a variety of numbing options. We cover that in detail in the section above titled Treatment Process for Chin Filler: Step by Step What to Expect.

Belotero Balance is delivered into the skin through a very fine needle. For patients that desire it, a topical anesthetic can be used. For areas such as the lips, local anesthetic injections like those used by dentists are used to numb the treatment area.

Avoid taking St. John’s Wort, high doses of vitamin E, aspirin, Advil, Nuprin, and any other agents that can increase bruising for a one week period before injections. If you are prone to cold sores we may want to institute antiviral therapy before injecting the lips.

The results from a Belotero Balance treatment are immediate and last for six to eight months.

You may notice slight swelling, redness or bruising following the injections, but these effects are temporary and don’t generally interfere with any activities. It is advisable to avoid sunbathing, exercise, alcohol, and cold outdoor activities for six hours after treatments.

Yes! Qwo dissolves the bands that create individual deep dimples, treating one of the most stubborn types of cellulite.

Yes, Qwo is an injectable treatment that dissolves deep dimples. Sculptra and Radiesse can be used to smooth and tighten the skin, which also improves the wavy appearance of cellulite. Kybella can be used to dissolve fat bulges. All 4 are injectable treatments that can improve cellulite.

Yes, we use Qwo for the butt, outer thigh, and backs of thighs. Currently, were not treating inner thighs or fronts of thighs with this treatment, although we do offer other cellulite treatments for those areas.

Yes- in fact, there are several different types of injectable treatments that can treat cellulite. Qwo works for deep dimples, Sculptra and Radiesse smooth out the skin, and Kybella dissolves fat bulges.

Qwos results appear to be permanent. This treatment was first formulated and used in clinical trials just a few years ago, so we cant be 100% certain, but theres no reason to believe the results would be undone by the body.

Lip fillers typically last between 6 and 18 months depending upon the brand of filler used, how its injected, and your individual metabolism.

Choosing the right facility and physicians to perform your dermal filler treatment can make the difference between looking naturally great and looking “done” (or worse). It’s important to find a medical practice where only physicians perform injections (in New Jersey it is illegal for any non-physician to inject dermal fillers, including advanced-trained nurses), and one that uses many different dermal fillers, as each is better for different areas of the face and certain cosmetic concerns (some practices use one filler everywhere, with less than stellar results).

Volume We will determine the best approach to enhancing your lips based on your treatment goals, your anatomy, and your age. The vermilion border, the junction between the white and red part of the lips, is an important area to treat with dermal fillers. By injecting this region, we can define the lip border better, similar to wearing lip liner. This can also help with lines that cross through this area. To increase the volume we inject the body of the lip (red area). This can create a pouty look and avert the lip outwards so that more of red shows. As a general rule we would like the bottom lip to be one and a half times the size of the upper lip (or 40/60, upper to lower lip), though we can create other proportions, if the patient requests (a lip ratio of 1:1 is more popular in Latin America, and can create a beautiful, natural lip profile for many patients). Happy appearance The oral commissures are located in the corners of the mouth. This area usually increases in size with age. Filling this area turns the corners of the lips horizontally, or even upwards creating a more positive and happy appearance. Shape and curve The philtrum consists of the two lines in the center of the upper lip that connects to the nose. By enhancing this double-ridge, it is possible to give the upper lip more shape and curve, enhancing the sensuality of the lips. Upper lip The cupid’s bow or the V-shaped area in the center of the upper lip can also be enhanced with dermal fillers. Done in conjunction with the philtrum, it can achieve a pleasant overall shape to the upper lip.

Licensing and certifications for dermal fillers and other cosmetic treatments can be really confusing, so we’ll break down the details in a separate blog, but the answer is yes, our physician injectors are licensed to perform dermal filler injections, and they each have several years of experience doing so. Currently, only physicians inject fillers at our practices, because we want to ensure our patients have the safest experience possible, and achieve the best results possible. It’s also important to look for a practice like ours that performs these treatments all day long — you don’t want a doctor who dabbles in dermal fillers to be warming up on you! We honestly aren’t trying to toot our own horn here, but it’s important to do a little research and find a facility with the skill and the tools to treat you right. You can double-check the experience of your provider by asking to see their awards from the manufacturers of each dermal filler. Galderma (makers of Restylane, Sculptra, and Dysport), Allergan (makers of Juvederm, Kybella, and Botox), and Merz (makers of Xeomin and Radiesse) all award physicians based on skill and experience.

The best filler for your goals will likely be different from the best filler for your friend’s goals, even if you both want to treat the same area. The reason for this is that each person is unique, the changes occurring under your skin are different, and in order to make your results as natural-appearing as absolutely possible, we will need to use different types of filler for different treatment areas and different patients. This is why our practice stocks every single kind of FDA-Approved Dermal Filler, and we regularly use each of them, so that we are always able to grab just the right thing for you. We provide complimentary in-person consultations with our physician injectors, to ensure patients get the assessment and guidance they need in order to make an informed decision about their filler treatment.

Using an ultra-fine needle or a smooth-tipped cannula, dermal fillers are injected into the skin. The physician will massage the treatment area then continue injecting the filler along the length of the wrinkle or fold until the maximum correction has been achieved. We blend lidocaine into all of our dermal fillers to reduce bruising and make for the most comfortable treatment experience possible.

There are basically 7 types of fillers, and each type works a little differently: Hyaluronic Acid (Juvederm, Voluma, Volbella, Vollure, Defyne, Reyne, Silk, Lyft, Belotero, Restylane) Calcium Hydroxylapatite (CaHA) (Radiesse) Poly-L-Lactic Acid (Sculptra) Collagen with polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) beads (Bellafil) Collagen Fat Transfer Illegal Substances (including silicone) Hyaluronic acid fillers are by far the most common. They provide soft, natural results as the molecules of filler attract and bind water molecules in the skin, stimulating the production of collagen. The volume beneath the skin increases, restoring a smoother, more youthful appearance. The body metabolizes and absorbs the injected hyaluronic acid over time. Hyaluronic Acid fillers have an antidote of sorts, called hyaluronidase, which is very helpful in our practice when patients come to see us upset about how their results from another practice turned out. Calcium Hydroxylapatite (CaHA) (brand name: Radiesse) and Poly-L-Lactic Acid (brand name: Sculptra) are solutions injected under the skin to stimulate collagen. They can be used to create stiff volume, which is useful for contouring bony areas of the face, or to smooth, firm, and tighten the skin, which can reduce wrinkles and cellulite. They have also even been used in butt augmentation. Collagen is a more permanent filler, and we tend to avoid is because our bodies are not permanent things – they change over time, and so it can be very difficult to create a result with these that will not look unnatural as the body around it changes with time. There are, however, situations where we do make use of these products. Fat transfer is a method of transferring your own fat, usually taken from your abdomen or love handles, to create a very natural and long-lasting result. Finally, illegal substances such as silicone are often to blame for the worst filler results – the disfigured and seriously ill patients you sometimes see on the news. It’s important to be an educated consumer because there are people out there who don’t know what they’re doing (or at least we hope that’s the case). Our physicians provide free in-person consultations where we educate the patient about what’s possible, what’s safe, and what their options are. Please feel free to schedule an appointment, at the very least you’ll walk away with the knowledge you need to stay safe.

We use numbing injections that can be customized to your preference to ensure the treatment is as comfortable (and numb) as you would like. Most fillers either come mixed with lidocaine, or we mix them with lidocaine prior to injection. Lidocaine is a numbing agent that’s very similar to what a dentist gives you prior to filling a cavity. Since a dentist injects that medicine directly into your nerve bundles, you feel nothing of a cavity being filled. This is called a nerve block, and we’re happy to do that for you if you really don’t want to feel anything. However, by putting the lidocaine in with the filler, we’re able to avoid those additional injections for numbing, and this lower dose of lidocaine wears off much faster, so you’re not fully numb for several hours after. This is the numbing most patients prefer, but again, we can customize this to your preference.

Although it varies by patient and depends on the particular dermal filler used, results from dermal filler injections are immediate and typically last for six to 24 months, depending upon the filler used and the area treated. Most patients report that the area treated continues to look improved even after the filler has been fully resorbed.

Immediately following the injections, you may experience: Minor redness generally lasts no longer than 1 hour, and for most patients, this dissipates before they leave the office (15 minutes) Swelling generally increases for the first 24 hours, before resolving within 48-72 hours. Certain areas swell much more, like the lips, and other areas don’t tend to swell at all, such as the temples. Tiny scabs may also form at the injection sites, though this doesn’t happen for most patients. It’s more common when a cannula is used. Don’t pick the scars, but you can apply makeup over them. They generally don’t last beyond day 2. Bruises are thankfully not that common in our patients (we take some measures to reduce our bruise rate because we know it’s what our patients worry about the most). If you do end up with a bruise, please call and let us know. We can do a laser treatment that will break the bruise up, and this makes the bruise dissipate in just a couple of days (vs. having to cover it with makeup for a week or longer). These symptoms typically disappear within two to three days. Allergic reactions are extremely rare. There is no need for bandaging and most patients are able to resume normal activities immediately following the treatment., even if they’re going back to work and don’t want their coworkers to know.

Avoid aspirin, ibuprofen, Vitamin E, fish oil, and other blood thinners for at least a week before treatment.

Laser treatments will not shorten how long the results of your dermal filler treatment will last. Many patients get terrific results combining the two.

Some fillers last forever, but most do not. Most fillers create results that last 6 months to 24 months, meaning you’ll want to schedule maintenance appointments to ensure your results remain excellent over time. There are a couple of things you can do to improve the longevity of your results, in fact, we made a video about it. Check it out here: https://www.reflectionscenter.com/maximize-botox-and-fillers-results/

Fillers made from hyaluronic acid can be dissolved using a substance called hyaluronidase. The following fillers are hyaluronic acid fillers which can respond to hyaluronidase: Belotero, Restylane, Restylane Silk, Restylane Lyft (previously Perlane), Juvederm, and Juvederm Voluma. Sculptra, Radiesse, and Bellafill are not hyaluronic acid and are not able to be dissolved.

There’s minimal downtime needed for any filler treatment. You may have some minor swelling and bruising, but it’s typically very mild and won’t affect the rest of your day.

This typically depends on factors like the depth of each scar, how many are present, and more. Most patients require 1-2 syringes for treatment.

At Reflections, we offer a few different options and most often recommend a combination approach to treatment for best results. Two of our most recommended options include injectable fillers and RF microneedling paired with PRP or exosomes. Depending on the type of scars, we frequently perform TCA cross and subcision.

Most patients use between one and two syringes of filler to treat acne scars.

For most acne scar treatments, you can return to your regular schedule right away. However, for more invasive options like subcision or microneedling, you may have minimal downtime.

Brow lift fillers will last 9-12 months.

Whether you choose to receive Botox injections or a surgical brow lift depends on your cosmetic goals and the amount of skin laxity you have. Botox may be the better option if you have minor sagging around your brows and forehead. If you have more severe skin laxity and desire a dramatic change, you should consider a brow lift. Our cosmetic physicians will examine your skin and consider your goals to help you make a decision for your treatment.

Botox or dermal fillers will be injected between the eyebrows and along the bottom arch of the eyebrows during your brow lift. You might also receive injections along the hairline to create a tighter, smoother forehead.

A brow lift is a great solution to improve the appearance of hooded eyes. Lifting the brows will open up your eyes while improving the appearance of a heavy brow and skin that sags into the fold of your eyelids.

Avoid sun or UV radiation exposure and do not put pressure on the treated area for at least 48 hours after receiving cheek fillers. You should also avoid waxing, chemical peels, and facials during this time.

You can expect the area to be a little sore and/or bruised for the first couple of days after your treatment but this will resolve itself.

Alcohol can increase your risk of bruising so you should stop drinking two days before treatment. You should also avoid waxing, tweezing, and using hair removal cream so your skin is clean and not irritated.

Cheek fillers should not be injected into the lips, around the eyes, or on the nose.

To keep your dermal filler in place, sleep on your back with your head elevated for 3-4 days after receiving your injections.

This depends on the type of filler used, but it will usually take 2-4 weeks for the filler to settle.

If your face swells immediately after your injections, asymmetry is normal. However, this should settle, and your injections will appear even in about two weeks.

Initial swelling may impact the appearance of your smile, but it will return to normal once the swelling goes down.

Many patients have left satisfied with the results of their cheek fillers. This is a great temporary solution for younger patients who want to hold off on a more invasive, complex surgery.

The best we can do is offer you some information about the price ranges to expect, because each patient’s treatment is unique, and thus the cost does vary. We provide an exact treatment plan and pricing during the free consultation, though, so you will have that information before you decide to undergo a procedure with us. You can do your treatment the same day, or schedule it for another date in the future. Radiesse is $750 per syringe, with most patients needing just 1 or 2 syringes for their chin. Voluma is $1,000 per syringe, with most patients using between 1 and 4 syringes of Voluma for their chin. Refyne and Defyne are each $750 per syringe, with most patients using 1 or 2 syringes of these for their chin. Wondering how many syringes of filler you’ll need? We cover this in detail in this blog post.

No, we can make this procedure very comfortable, and we do that by providing our patients with a variety of numbing options.

Yes! Most people can safely have chin fillers. To find out if a specific procedure is right for you, please contact us to schedule a free consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians.

Getting rid of hyaluronic acid (HA) fillers is fairly easy – we just inject hyaluronidase or hyalenex into the treated area, and they will dissolve the filler. There are 3 popular non-HA options: Radiesse, Belotero, and Sculptra. Generally, Sculptra and Belotero Bellafill aren’t used in the chin. Belotero Bellafill cannot be dissolved or removed, and for that reason, we don’t use it very much at all at our practice because your face changes so much as you age and it generally ends up looking unnatural over time. Sculptra is very rarely used in the chin for augmentation, but both Sculptra and Radiesse can theoretically be at least partially dissolved, though it’s less of a guarantee than an HA filler and generally a slower process.

Dermal fillers for your chin could start at $750 and range upwards of $4,000. The total cost depends on which types of filler you have and how many syringes of each.

Chin filler is very long-lasting but the duration varies based on the individual’s metabolism, the product used, and the depth that product was placed at. Generally, Voluma or Lyft will last around 2 years. Radiesse lasts 1 year or longer. And Refyne or Defyne last around 1 year in the more superficial contours like the pre-jowl sulcus.

No, the fillers we use these days aren’t permanent, and that’s a good thing because it’s unlikely that filler placed today would look natural in 10 years if it stayed exactly the same, because so much changes about our faces as we age.

You can expect redness and point bleeding at the injection sites, numbness in the actual injected area that will last a few hours, and very mild swelling (often described as tightness or firmness) that you feel but others would not likely notice. Bruising can occur but is usually very mild and small (yellow or greenish cast, not deep in color or large in area).

Overall, the longevity of SKINVIVE™ varies from patient to patient. Typically results will last for several months. Scheduling maintenance sessions following your initial treatment will prolong the effects.

SKINVIVE™ is an effective treatment option for adults over the age of 21 who desire an improvement in the quality of their skin. During a consultation, one of our skilled skincare professionals can assess your skin to determine if SKINVIVE™ is the right option for you.

Following an at-home skincare routine before and after your SKINVIVE™ treatment is the best course of action to ensure healthy, youthful-looking skin. If you are seeking professional-grade skincare for optimal results, you can purchase products in person in our NJ offices or at our online store.

There is little to no downtime associated with SKINVIVE™treatments. Patients can feel free to return to their daily activities as soon as they wish. While mild redness or bruising may occur around the treated areas, these effects and temporary and will fade with time.

During your SKINVIVE™ treatment, your provider will cleanse the treatment area and administer the filler through a series of injections. This process can take up to 30 minutes, depending on the number of injections administered.

Restylane Eyelight can fill in troughs, grooves, and hollows under the eyes. To prevent side effects in this extremely sensitive and vascular area, we prefer to use a cannula (a blunt-tipped tube that can reduce swelling and bruising). This process immediately provides smooth, natural-looking volume.

Although in the past we’ve used a few different Restylane formulations for the under eyes, Eyelight is a dedicated filler that can produce incredible results. Because it’s specifically formulated to be long-lasting and attract very little water, it’s the ideal solution for under-eye troughs and hollows.

It’s difficult to say that any filler brand is better than the other – what’s more important is the specific properties of each filler and what makes them appropriate for any given treatment area. For the under eyes, Restylane offers Eyelight whereas Juvéderm doesn’t currently have a comparable product. In this regard, Restylane is likely the better brand when it comes to under-eye fillers.

Kysse is one of the more affordable fillers at $750 per syringe. With a result duration of 9-12 months, and over 86% of treated patients saying they would choose Kysse, Kysse is a great choice for both results and cost-effectiveness.

Most patients use just 1 syringe of Kysse for their lips, but it can vary. Generally speaking, the number of syringes of filler you’ll need is difficult to guess without having seen you for an evaluation and discussion of your goals. However, we did write a whole page dedicated just to the discussion of how many syringes of filler patients typically end up having, by area, and filler type (as well as what that will run you price-wise).

Kysse has been available for a number of years in Europe, but only recently received FDA approval, allowing it to be used in the United States. This is a good thing for patients because it means we have a (relatively) long history of use to prove its safety and efficacy.

Kysse tends to create much less swelling than other fillers, but you can expect some mild swelling, especially within the first 48 hours, and redness at the injection site often lasts for up to an hour. Bruising is possible with any injection, but we rarely have lip filler patients experience that. If you do have bruising, please let us know because we offer complimentary laser treatments to break up the bruise and dramatically speed its clearance. The only serious and long-lasting side effect or risk of Kysse is occlusion, where filler could block flow in a blood vessel, which can be quite serious. We discuss occlusion risks with our patients during treatment, but it’s important to know our physician injectors are not only trained in how to inject to create great results, and how to safely inject, but also how to dissolve filler if things go wrong.

No, because Kysse already has lidocaine, a powerful numbing agent, mixed in. You should feel tiny sticks upon entry, much like what you experience with Botox, and numbness in the treatment area which wears off in about an hour or so. If you are anxious or sensitive, we can use lidocaine to perform a “nerve block,” where we inject the numbing agent directly into your nerve bundles, just as the dentist does when you get a cavity filled – although this will mean you’ll be numb for much longer. Let us know if you’d like to discuss that option during your free consultation or next treatment!

Kysse was shown to last 9-12 months in the lips during a clinical study.

The Ellacor is a device that uses hollow needles to remove micro-cores of skin (without the use of thermal energy). Ellacor is a revolutionary skin treatment system that utilizes Micro-Coring™ technology to remove small micro-cores of skin. This process improves the appearance of moderate to severe wrinkles without causing scarring. The device employs hollow needles to extract tiny plugs of skin, which allows the remaining skin to contract and tighten naturally.

Typically, patients require 1 to 3 treatments spaced about 30 days apart to achieve the best results. The exact number of sessions depends on individual skin conditions and desired outcomes.

The treatment usually lasts between 30 to 60 minutes, including preparation time for anesthesia. Post-treatment, patients may experience mild redness and swelling resembling a sunburn, with an average downtime of about 3 to 7 days as the skin heals.

Common side effects include temporary redness, swelling, discomfort, and tightness in the treated area. These effects typically resolve within a week. Rarely, complications such as infection or color changes in the skin may occur.

Unlike traditional microneedling, which creates micro-injuries without removing tissue, Ellacor actually removes micro-portions of skin to achieve tighter and smoother results. This unique approach allows for more significant improvements in skin laxity and wrinkle appearance without the risk of scarring associated with more invasive procedures

We will be using both topical and injection numbing techniques to ensure patients have minimal discomfort during treatment. Most patients in our clinical trial reported pain during the procedure as less than 2 on a 0-10. (Straight from the Ellacor website, but our patients also agreed about pain 1-2.)

Ellacor is FDA approved to treat moderate and severe wrinkles in the mid-to-lower face in skin types I-IV. Providers may also consider additional off label treatment areas and indications.

Recovery times will vary from person to person. Some patients may be comfortable going out in public 3-4 days post treatment. Some people may prefer to take more social downtime, as mild side effects like redness, bruising, swelling or dryness may still be present during the first week of recovery. Lingering redness beyond the first week is also possible.

Mid/Lower Face – Starting at $3700.00/treatment Mid/Lower Face & Submental – Starting at $3900.00/treatment Mid/Lower Face & Neck – Starting at $4100.00/treatment This treatment cost includes the required aftercare products as well as the Exosomes that will be used during treatment.

Patients should plan on being at the office for 2 hours total – one hour for in office topical numbing and one hour of treatment time. We are not offering at home numbing for this procedure.

The price of Cellulaze varies with the size of the area being treated, but most procedures start in the $5,000 range.

Because the area is numbed with local anesthesia, there is minimal discomfort during the procedure. You may feel a light pressure. Following a Cellulaze treatment, you may experience some soreness, but you will be able to return to your normal activities in a day or two.

We tell patients to set aside one day for the treatment and one to two days of rest after the procedure. Strenuous activity should be avoided for one to two weeks. Once the laser cellulite treatment is complete, the liquefied fat is gently pressed out and you’re ready to go home. You’ll be back to your normal activities after a day or two and can resume more strenuous exercise after one to two weeks.

Cellulaze is a one time treatment performed at our Martinsville Body Contouring Center, and takes about 60 to 90 minutes, depending on the size of the area being treated. You’ll be awake during the procedure, watching TV, listening to music, or chatting with our friendly staff. The treatment area is first made comfortable with a numbing solution that is introduced into the skin through two tiny incisions, about the size of the tip of a pen. Once numb, the novel SideLaze3D laser fiber is inserted through the same tiny holes and several passes are made to level out peaks and valleys of your cellulite. Over the course of the procedure, the laser liquefies bumps of fat, and minimizes dimples by releasing the fibrous bands that pull the skin down to create the depressions. It also stimulates collagen production, which, over time, increases your skin’s depth and elasticity for a smoother look.

You’ll see some changes right away, with optimal results apparent between three to six months. Since new collagen is formed in the areas treated with Cellulaze and the structures under the skin are altered, the results are lasting. Clinical studies have shown results can last for one year or more. However, it is important to maintain a healthy diet and exercise regimen to continue to enjoy the excellent results.

Sure, theres no reason you cant drink a moderate amount of alcohol after CoolSculpting. The only limitation here would that you dont want to overwhelm your liver, which will already be processing the dead fat cells, so as always, drink responsibly.

Yes! Not only have multiple studies shown that CoolSculpting works to kill off up to 25% of fat cells in the treated area, but thousands of happy customers across America have written reviews about their experience. Whats important to note, though, is that you cant out-coolsculpt a bad diet. And if youre overeating, you can gain weight faster than CoolSculpting can help you freeze it off. This is not a magic pill, so you will have to live a healthy lifestyle to see the kind of results youre hoping for.

Yes, CoolSculpting helps to provide skin retraction - meaning it helps the healthy skin to tighten up where the fat is removed. However, if skin quality is already poor - and we know for women over 50, or those with stretch marks on the underside of their arm, the skin quality for the back of the arms is poor - CoolSculpting will not be able to tighten or lift that. Its a limited result with CoolSculpting, but there are other treatments that can help. And we can discuss those in more detail during your free consultation.

Yes - Lumps directly after treatment are areas of swelling, and this is pretty common. Lumps or uneven contours in the final results are possible, but very rare. If this occurs, we can revise the treatment area with liposuction. Lumps and swelling during the weeks following treatment are to be expected and will resolve on their own, given time and gentle treatment.

No, if that hernia is in the area you want to have treated, CoolSculpting is not a good treatment option for you, because it uses suction - and not only would it hurt a lot, it would likely cause more damage. In that case, the option we would recommend is SculpSure, which is a very similar treatment and result (using heat and no suction).

CoolSculpting can be uncomfortable. The worst part of the treatment is the 5 minute massage after the applicator is taken off. Most people find this to be uncomfortable, but not unbearable, and it dramatically impacts the results you get - so its a tradeoff most people are willing to make. How uncomfortable is it? Id say its as bad as sprinting on a treadmill - but just think how long youd have to sprint on that treadmill to lose that same amount of fat - which would you prefer?

CoolSculptings fat removal results are permanent - of course no one and nothing can stop you from gaining more weight in the future (except you). But for those that maintain their weight, CoolSculptings results are permanent.

EmSculpt and CoolSculpting are pretty different – one is all about freezing away excess fat, and the other is focused on creating bigger, more defined muscles and removing that tiny layer of fat over top that often makes it hard to look as lean as you’d like. But a lot of patients ask this question, so we wrote a whole blog about EmSculpt vs CoolSculpting.

Patients are generally recommended 4 treatments spread over 2 weeks, but sometimes this can vary, based on the individual’s needs. Individual treatment plans are created and quoted during the free consultation with a cosmetic physician at our practice.

Results from a Non-surgical butt lift are long-lasting. However, weight fluctuations, aging, and pregnancy can all take a toll on the body and may alter the results of your buttock lift. The best way to maintain long-term results is to maintain a healthy weight and lifestyle. Results from any sort of muscle toning or building treatment can be maintained with regular exercise, but it is, of course, much easier to maintain these drastic changes. Butt lifting and building procedures are being talked about everywhere right now, but many women don’t realize that they don’t actually want a bigger butt; they just want a firmer, lifted and more toned butt. Just 1 EmSculpt treatment is the equivalent of doing 20,000 squats, which as we know is considered to be the best exercise to do for building a perkier sculpted butt. If you’re concerned about how long your butt lift treatment could last, we recommend making an appointment to see one of our cosmetic physicians for a consultation.

Emsculpt has been proven effective through seven independent, multi-center studies. These studies have shown that the average increase of muscle mass is 16%, the average fat reduction is 19% and the average patient satisfaction is 96% when it comes to the Emsculpt treatment. Our before and after pictures speak for themselves, patients at Reflections have seen incredible results such as rounder, perkier butts and slimmer waistlines with this innovative treatment. Emsculpt is incredibly effective and results can be maintained with a proper diet and regular exercise. Patients can also do \u201ctouch-up\u201d treatments if necessary depending on the recommendation of a Reflection’s cosmetic physician. In comparison to other treatments such as CoolSculpting, both methods are effective but different. Coolsculpting uses cryolyposis to reduce fat by freezing and eventually killing fat cells to be eventually flushed from the body naturally. As for Emsculpt, EmSculpt uses electromagnetic energy to stimulate muscle movement as well as burn fat. The main advantage Emsculpt has over CoolSculpting is the ability to tone muscle.

Results from any sort of muscle gain can be maintained with physical activity, but are not permanent. It is, of course, much easier to maintain these changes than it is to create them. So most patients find these results to be very long-lasting.

At Reflections we usually recommend patients to complete four treatments spread out over a two-week period, however, this can vary based on an individual’s needs. A Reflections physician will develop individual treatment plans along with treatment quotes during the free consultation at our practice. Results achieved from EmSculpt treatments can be maintained with regular diet and exercise. If patients don’t maintain a healthy lifestyle results will not be permanent. This is why we recommend that patients establish a diet and exercise routine prior to having this treatment in order to ensure the longevity of the results.

EmSculpt is currently FDA-Approved for use on the abdomen (belly), flanks (love handles), and butt. These are the treatment areas which EmSculpt has been proven to be most effective for currently. However, more treatment protocols are being developed to tone and sculpt other body parts – so stay tuned for updates to this list. Emsculpt can help to build muscle and burn belly fat simultaneously. Using highly-focused electromagnetic energy, Emsculpt causes targeted muscles to contract 20,000 times in just 30 minutes. Not only does this strengthen the muscles, but it also speeds up metabolism for quicker fat loss. For new moms or patients with isolated belly fat, EmSculpt can help target muscles in a way you can’t with exercise alone. Stubborn belly fat post-pregnancy can be especially hard to eliminate with traditional manual exercise. Many new moms have used Emsculpt has a starting point to kick-off their new weight-loss and fitness regimen.

No, there’s no downtime. You should expect to feel sore in the days following your treatments, just like you do after a strenuous workout, but no one will know about your treatment unless you tell them.

Most patients report seeing changes to their body before they’ve even completed their treatment rounds with EmSculpt – that’s within the first 2 weeks. The very best results were proven during the clinical trials to be seen about 4 weeks after the last treatment (which is 6 weeks from the start date, in total). Take a look at our EmSculpt before and after photos.

EmSculpt\u00ae is the first FDA-Approved treatment shown to simultaneously build muscle and burn fat during a treatment session without a patient having to exert themselves. This groundbreaking treatment triggers muscle contractions, to build muscle, and burn fat. EmSculpt Results is a unique technology that actually helps to build bigger and stronger muscles, while also reducing the layer of excess fat covering these muscles, making for a lean, athletic result. If you’ve been struggling to see tone and definition from your workouts but are already in pretty good shape, this is the procedure for you! Another interesting property of this treatment is its ability to actually heal diastasis recti, without surgery. EmSculpt is completely non-invasive, meaning there’s no needles, no surgery, no numbing, and no downtime. This makes it the perfect treatment for busy moms who are suffering from abdominal muscle separation, as well as athletes who don’t want to take time off from training to have a procedure. EmSculpt is presently FDA-approved for treating the stomach, the flanks or sides, and buttocks. EmSculpt has been proven to be most effective for these treatment areas currently; however, more treatment areas are being researched in order to offer a more complete body solution.

Some patients need 2 sessions, and somewhat uncommonly, patients have needed 3 sessions to see full clearance of their SK’s.

We will first mark and take photos of the areas to be treated, and then clean those areas with an alcohol wipe. Next, we’ll activate the treatment pen. Then we’ll carefully use the pen to apply the Eskata treatment serum to your Sk’s, wait a minute, and repeat for a total of 4 times. Then you’ll be done.

Patients have reported feeling a mild stinging or itching sensation during the treatment, but no pain. So we don’t need to use any numbing or anesthesia during this treatment.

There’s no downtime with Eskata. Nothing about this treatment should prevent you from going right back to work or working out.

Some patients in the clinical trial experienced mild to moderate swelling, redness, itching, and stinging. Some patients experienced mild crusting. This generally clears up pretty quickly but can last up to a week for some patients. Patients with reactions are recommended to wear a band-aid after treatment to protect the spot from irritation and speed up the healing process. Please contact our office if you have been treated by our team and are experiencing symptoms after your treatment. Most patients experienced either very mild or no noticeable reaction. You shouldn’t expect to have real \u201cdowntime\u201d with this treatment.

Eskata is clinically proven to be safe and effective for removing SK’s. It should not be applied to other areas. It is not absorbed systematically during treatment and poses very few risks for complication or side effects.

Protecting your skin before and after your treatments from sun exposure is the best way to ensure you not only get the results you desire, but significantly reduce any risks.

Patients commonly see redness at the treatment site immediately following treatment which fades within 1-2 days, and are recommended to protect their treated areas from sun exposure for at least 2 weeks following treatment. This helps allow the skin to heal and recover and reduces the risk of side effects. Some patients have reported skin sensitivity at the treatment site, but this has been fairly mild and not required pain medications. We typically recommend patients wear a cloth bandaid over any sensitive areas because this will protect them from clothing rubbing or accidental bumps, as well as sun exposure.

No, Eskata can only be administered by a healthcare professional in a medical setting. It should not be used in a home setting, or by an untrained professional.

Eskata is the newest way to treat Sk’s. Other treatment options have traditionally included surgical removal (excision), liquid nitrogen (freezing it off), curettage (scraping it off, often with electrical controlled burning), and lasering it off. When patients want to remove SK’s without using Eskata, we typically recommend wither CO2 laser, TCA cross with curettage, or a Q-Switched laser. This depends on the patient – what size, number, and darkness of lesions we’re treating, and the patient’s risk for pigmentation changes with each treatment.

No, Exilis is not the same as Thermage, although they are similar. Exilis Ultra uses both radiofrequency and ultrasound energy to diffusely heat the skin. Thermage uses focuses radiofrequency to heat specific areas within the skin. Generally, Exilis is used on the body, whereas Thermage works better for face. But, in general, they both use heat energy to stimulate the body to build new collagen, tightening and firming the skin in the area treated.

Exilis has both Ultrasound and Radiofrequency energy, deployed as a widespread, diffuse heating, which causes the skin to contract and build new collagen. Ultherapy deploys focused ultrasound energy in little spots of controlled heating - this can be targeted in both depth and specific areas. Ultherapy is less comfortable than Exilis Ultra (which is why we offer pronox for Ultherapy and Exillis feels like a hot stone massage, so no numbing is needed). Both work by triggering the body to build new collagen, and both have no downtime. Exilis tends to be less expensive, but you will need multiple treatments with Exilis in a series, whereas most people do just 1 treatment of Ultherapy.

Most patients start seeing results at around 3 weeks into their treatment plan, but we have had patients who saw results immediately, and sometimes the process can be slower, taking up to 6 weeks to see results. We take a series of \u201cbefore\u201d and \u201cafter\u201d photos to help patients visualize their results because treatments like Exilis that develop over time, it can be hard for you to see this improvement on your own. This works both ways, though, making this treatment one that won’t be a dead giveaway for having had \u201cwork done.\u201d

Exilis provides excellent results that tend to last 6-12months. Most patients will retreat each year.

No, the Exilis Ultra treatment is very comfortable, with most patients comparing it to a hot stone massage. No numbing or anesthesia is used for this treatment.

Once the procedure is completed, any remaining gel or markings are removed, and youre free to go on with your day there is no downtime required with EXILIS. You might experience a little pinkness in the treatment area that lasts 15 to 30 minutes.

Treatments like Exilis that work to stimulate your body’s own processes to build more collagen can have a different impact on each individual. Most patients do see a moderate to very good improvement from Exilis. However, there is no way for us to know to what degree your body will react to the treatment. This is the case with all nonsurgical treatments that use lasers, radiofrequency, and ultrasound.

The treatment area is marked by the operator and a conductive gel or mineral oil is applied. Next, a handpiece is glided over the skin as energy is delivered into the deeper layers of the skin. You’ll feel a warming sensation as the EXILIS hand piece is passed over the treatment area and energy is delivered to the deeper layers of your skin. EXILIS is a well-tolerated treatment thanks to built-in cooling, which keeps the top layers of the skin at a suitable temperature while the deeper layers of the dermis are being heated. An onboard thermometer allows the operator to monitor and adjust the temperature of the treatment to ensure the procedure is comfortable.

While we evaluate each patient on an individual basis, Exilis is recommended for anyone who is looking to re-sculpt their body or reverse the signs of aging without surgery or downtime. The best results are achieved by patients with mild to moderate skin laxity (i.e. some patients with significant and severe skin looseness won’t see great results from Exilis Ultra alone). If Exilis isnt right for you, we offer many other options that can help achieve the result you desire.

Exilis Ultra is recommended for anyone who is a healthy adult with unwanted loose skin, excess fat, or wrinkles. The best results are achieved by patients with mild to moderate skin laxity or looseness. The treatment can be used on many different parts of the body including the face.

Exilis can certainly be worth the money. Many patients find Exilis beneficial. The best way to determine if the procedure is right for you is to schedule a consultation today.

Patient satisfaction with Exilis 360 is excellent. Patients have seen tighter and firmer skin and feel better about their body.

While the two treatments have some similarities, Exilis’s main application is to firm and tighten skin whereas Coolsculpting melts away fat.

It depends on the area you’re looking to treat. A bigger area may need more sessions. If the results you’re looking for are more dramatic, you may also need more sessions. Typically, patients may require up to 4-6 treatment sessions.

Most patients don’t feel any discomfort at all. At most, you’ll feel a warming sensation from the heat of the device.

Exilis is not meant to make you lose weight. It works to tighten skin and can melt some fat. A healthy lifestyle is recommended for those who receive the treatment.

Both! Exilis tightens skin and can melts small amounts of fat at the same time.

Yes! Exilis can be used under the eyes to tighten any loose skin there. And by addressing the loose skin, it can also reduce the appearance of wrinkles in the eye area as well. We prefer to use thermismooth and Ifine for this area though.

After treatment, you’ll want to stay hydrated but there is no downtime. You can go to work, perform your daily activities, and even exercise.

Yes! Exilis stimulates the production of collagen in the treated area. This improves elasticity and tightens the skin leading to firmer and smoother skin.

The skin may be mildly swollen and have a pink color for a few hours after treatment. Makeup can be applied immediately. As with any laser treatment, sun tanning should be avoided before and after the treatment. Side effects are uncommon, but include dark spots and light spots, which usually resolve.

Due to the burst of cooling cryogen spray that precedes the pulse of the laser, the treatment is comfortable. For those who feel any discomfort, topical anesthetic can be utilized. A treatment regimen usually consists of three to four monthly treatments. The exact protocol will be determined after a careful evaluation of your skin. The treatment takes approximately from 20 to 30 minutes to perform.

No downtime is expected after the treatment.

The treatment is quite comfortable and requires no anesthesia. Patients describe the sensation to be similar to the snap of a warm rubber band. Patients can elect to use topical anesthetic cream if they desire. One example is called Ela-Max. This is available in a 4% or 5% formulation. It is most effective when applied 30 to 40 minutes prior to the procedure. Makeup can be worn after the procedure.

Ela-Max is a brand name for a cream that contains an anesthetic called lidocaine. To apply, first, clean the area with soap and warm water and gently pat dry. Then rub a thin layer of the cream into the area to be treated. Following this, apply a heavy layer of cream, as thick as icing on a cake, to the same area. This is the approach to achieve maximal anesthetic properties from the Ela-max. The Ela-Max should be applied in the office approximately 30 to 40 minutes prior to the procedure. We don’t recommend using the cream on a large surface area such as the legs or back – since it can sometimes be confusing to patients how large of an area they can safely use this numbing cream on.

We don’t consider either sun spot removal or laser hair removal a procedure that requires downtime but we also don’t advise having this done if you have a special occasion coming up in the next week or two. We can help you plan for big events to minimize these concerns – just be sure to mention these during your consultation or next appointment. Sun avoidance is advised after treatment with this laser, whether for laser hair removal or sunspot removal.

Treatment cannot be performed on tanned skin and tanning is prohibited directly after treatment. The use of a high-grade sunblock is suggested. Sun avoidance/protection is most important for the 2 weeks directly before and directly after this procedure.

Sun protection before and after your treatment is the most important step you can take to ensure your treatments are safe and effective. For those having laser hair removal, we also suggest reading our post on how to properly prepare for your treatments to maximize your results from laser hair removal. For those undergoing sun damage or brown spot removal, we may also suggest a specialized skin care routine following your treatments. Often we recommend high-quality sunscreen in addition to retinol(such as Retin-A) and/or products containing certain exfoliating acids that help to speed cell turnover within the skin, making for healthier, more youthful skin at a cellular level. Your cosmetic physician will outline a maintenance plan for preserving your results during your free consultation.

GentleLase was cleared by the FDA in 2014 for safety and efficacy in providing permanent hair reduction on all skin types (Fitzpatrick I- VI) including tanned skin. Permanent hair reduction is defined as the long-term, stable reduction in the number of hairs re-growing when measured at 6, 9, and 12 months after the completion of a treatment regime, as well as treatment of benign pigmented lesions (sun spots and brown spots), wrinkles, and vascular lesions (such as port-wine stains, hemangiomas, telangiectasias).

HVP stands for \u201chigh-volume Precision\u201d and is a branded way of performing fat transfer. This system is a closed system, keeping the fat safe from possible exposure to bacteria in the air. The HVP system also offers better filtration and concentration of fat, which has been shown in clinical studies to create better fat survival rates in fat transfer. Finally, the HVP re-injection system is the only system to allow the doctor to measure the pressure in the area he/she is injecting the fat into. This is important, as cramming too many fat cells into the area will cause them to squish each other and die. When you see doctors who have fat squirting out where it has been injected, it is because they have injected too much fat. Death of the fat cells leads to seromas and hematomas, serious complications that can create terrible deformities as they heal.

\u201cAutologous\u201d means coming from your own body. \u201cFat Transfer\u201d is the process of liposuctioning, or removing, fat from the body and then reinjecting it to other parts of the body. This is sometimes called \u201cliposculpture\u201d or \u201cfat grafting.\u201d

Yes, we use an injected numbing medication, very similar to what your dentist uses for filling cavities. In addition, most patients elect to receive medication that relaxes them during the procedure.

You must abstain from sexual activity for at least 24 hours after treatment. This is a precaution against bacteria entering your injection sites and creating an infection.

You don’t have to take time off from work or working out after having the injection. You will have blood drawn for the procedure, but it is a small amount that should not leave you feeling weak, or unable to work out, provided that you eat and hydrate normally. Some patients prefer to take the day off from work. You should expect to be numb for several hours, and some patients report an awareness of sensation when the numbing wears off that is distracting or possibly uncomfortable.

While childbirth and hormonal changes are often blamed for lower libido in women, the truth is most women experience libido changes or sexual dysfunction at least once in their life, and the cause can be physicial or psychological, but its almost always complex in nature.

This procedure works almost immediately - because we know how quickly our blood goes to work repairing cuts and trauma (using the growth factors and healing elements inherent in your blood) - and we know that this procedure is merely a concentrate of your own blood injected into the right places we want to restore. So patients experience results that are evident within the first few days, if not hours!

Patients typically experience results for a year, though some find they want a boost around the 6 month mark, especially for those who had more severe symptoms before treatment.

We are unconvinced that the female sex injection helps with urinary incontinence, but we do offer 2 treatments that have been shown to help with urinary incontinence: ThermiVa and Exilis Ultra Femme.

The female sex injection doesnt work for incontinence, but ThermiVa and Exillis Ultra, 2 different vaginal rejuvenation treatments we offer at our New Jersey practices, do! Your private consultation with the doctor is the best time to talk about all of your concerns, and which treatment(s) will best for you.

No, this procedure is not FDA-Approved for this use. This doesnt mean it isnt safe or effective - this simply means there havent been studies (or the roughly $3 million in fees) submitted to the FDA for their review. However, there is a good body of science around this procedures safety and use in other parts of the body to restore and rebuild tissues. Ask our doctors for specifics during your free consultation!

The results from the female sex injection are not permanent, but are thought to last up to 1 year. A few select patients have reported they felt their results lasted as long as 2 years.

Only trained cosmetic physicians provide the injection at our offices. It’s important to have a physician performing these injections because a deep understanding of the anatomy involved and safety protocols is important. Our physician team was trained and certified by Dr. Charles Runnel, the creator of the female sex injection, as certified providers of this unique technique.

Sexual enjoyment requires a complex combination of varying factors, including sexual function, desire, relationship health, hormones, and overall health of the individual. To think there is 1 treatment that can solve all of that is foolish. Certainly Cialis and Viagra don’t claim they can solve all of those things either. But the female sex injection does work for those who are looking for increased sensitivity, which is often the biggest problem facing women. If the female sex injection doesn’t work for you, you may be referred to other treatments or physicians. The good news is there is very little risk of a bad outcome.

The injection requires drawing your blood, for which we recommend you eat normally and hydrate. Those who are dehydrated may find the blood draw portion more difficult. You may also want to bring a panty liner with you to wear after your treatment, as some women do have spotting (light bleeding) at the injection sites.

The Orgasm Shot works like a natural Viagra for women, using a concentrate of their own blood to heal and restore sexual function and sensitivity, which in turn spurs their sexual desire and makes it easier to achieve orgasm.

Benefits Include: Increased sexual response (more female sensitivity), easier sexual arousal, more frequent orgasms, higher satisfaction with ones sex life, fewer issues with dryness or lack of natural lubrication, less pain during sex, greater arousal from clitoral stimulation, and healthier vaginal tissue.

Yes, you can have ThermiVa or Exilis Ultra Femme on the same day as your female sex injection. Many patients who have both functional issues, such as looseness and urinary incontinence, in addition to a lack of sensitivity, will choose to have both the female sex injection and either ThermiVa or Exilis Ultra Femme.

Yes, you can have your injection treatment right after your consultation, provided you are a candidate. Please let us know if you wish to treat the same day so that we can block out more time with our physician for your appointment.

Of course, everyone has a different pain tolerance, but the female sex injection without numbing would be uncomfortable. We do 2 types of numbing for the female sex injection: numbing cream applied topically and injection numbing using lidocaine (this is very similar to what the dentist gives you before they fill a cavity). This means patients are comfortably numb during the procedure and for a little while afterward.

Ela-Max is a brand name for a cream that contains an anesthetic called lidocaine. To apply, first, clean the area with soap and warm water and gently pat dry. Then rub a thin layer of the cream into the area to be treated. Following this, apply a heavy layer of cream, as thick as icing on a cake, to the same area. This is the approach to achieve maximal anesthetic properties from the Ela-max. The Ela-Max should be applied in the office approximately 30 to 40 minutes prior to the procedure. We don’t recommend using the cream on a large surface area such as the legs or back – since it can sometimes be confusing to patients how large of an area they can safely use this numbing cream on.

We dont consider either sun spot removal or laser hair removal a \u201cdowntime\u201d procedure but we also dont advise having this done if you have a special occasion coming up in the next week or two. We can help you plan for big events to minimize these concerns – just be sure to mention these during your consultation or next appointment. Sun avoidance is advised after treatment with this laser, whether for laser hair removal or sunspot removal.

Treatment cannot be performed on tanned skin and tanning is prohibited directly after treatment. The use of a high-grade sunblock is suggested. Sun avoidance/protection is most important for the 2 weeks directly before and directly after this procedure.

Sun protection before and after your treatment is the most important step you can take to ensure your treatments are safe and effective. For those having laser hair removal, we also suggest reading our post on how to properly prepare for your treatments to maximize your results from laser hair removal. For those undergoing sun damage or brown spot removal, we may also suggest a specialized skin care routine following your treatments. Often we recommend high-quality sunscreen in addition to retinol(such as Retin-A) and/or products containing certain exfoliating acids that help to speed cell turnover within the skin, making for healthier, more youthful skin at a cellular level. Your cosmetic physician will outline a maintenance plan for preserving your results during your free consultation.

GentleLase was cleared by the FDA in 2014 for safety and efficacy in providing \u201cPermanent hair reduction on all skin types (Fitzpatrick I- VI) including tanned skin. Permanent hair reduction is defined as the long-term, stable reduction in the number of hairs re-growing when measured at 6, 9, and 12 months after the completion of a treatment regime,\u201d as well as treatment of benign pigmented lesions (sun spots and brown spots), wrinkles, and vascular lesions (such as port-wine stains, hemangiomas, telangiectasias).

The treatment is quite comfortable and requires no anesthesia. Patients describe the sensation to be similar to the snap of a warm rubber band. Patients can elect to use topical anesthetic cream if they desire. One example is called Ela-Max. This is available in a 4% or 5% formulation. It is most effective when applied 30 to 40 minutes prior to the procedure. Makeup can be worn after the procedure.

GentleMax Pro is a great laser with many functions, but it is especially good at laser hair removal.

GentleMax Pro uses two types of lasers, 755 nm Alexandrite laser and 1064 nm Nd: YAG laser, each with different energy wavelengths.

GentleMax Pro is an effective laser that works better than other laser hair removal treatments or laser skin rejuvenation because of the use of dual lasers.

GentleMax Pro is a safe treatment for almost all skin types. The most common side effects are redness and swelling after treatment for rosacea or cherry angiomas.

GentleMax Pro tightens the skin by stimulating collagen production in the underlayers of the skin. The increase of collagen creates better skin texture and tone and more volume.

Candela is another ND: Yag laser used for laser hair removal. Different people react to laser treatment differently, but this may be one of the best options for some people.

The Diode laser uses a longer wavelength that is more effective for coarse, dark hair, especially on the back or bikini area. The Alexandrite laser is better for light skin tones and large treatment areas since it uses a shorter laser and a larger spot size.

Lightsheer Duet is a Diode laser with an 800 wavelength thats used for laser hair removal.

The Lightsheer duet is a diode laser thats used for laser hair removal.

Yes - lightsheer duet is one of the most effective lasers for laser hair removal, and has risen to the top of the industry as a must-have for medspas.

Fat wont come back after SculpSure unless you gain weight. No one and nothing - other than your diet and health - can keep you from regaining weight long term. However, for those that maintain a stable weight, SculpSures fat reduction is permanent.

Yes, SculpSure can be used on the double chin, but our practice finds most double chins are round (and not flat) - and for rounded mounds of fat, CoolSculpting works better than SculpSure, because the handpiece is curved (whereas SculpSures is flat).

First, the area to be treated is marked by the doctor while the patient is standing to ensure that trouble spots are clearly defined. This is important as the contour of the body shifts when the patient reclines for the procedure, masking the problem areas the patient sees in the mirror every morning. During the treatment, we make tiny openings and inject a numbing fluid that makes the procedure comfortable, reduces bruising and aids in the removal of the fat deposits. A laser fiber is inserted under the skin to liquefy the fat cells and heat the innermost structures of the skin, providing a noticeable lifting and tightening. Finally, thin suction wands called cannulas are used to remove the liquefied fat cells. Patients are back on their feet quickly, with most returning to work a day or two after the procedure and enjoying the results of the treatment.

Laser liposuction isn’t a weightloss procedure, and those looking to lose a signficant amount of fat should be aware of the limitations of laser liposuction, namely that results are best when isolated to just a few areas, that results are always about improvement over perfection, and that we are limited by the state to a total fat volume per procedure maximum of 5 liters. All that having been said, we do believe that starting to feel good about yourself can be a positive catalyst to a lifestyle change – and we believe it because we’ve seen it in our patients. Liposuction is not a substitute for a healthy lifestyle, but it can help motivate you to make some changes and stick with them. The patient shown below took her procedure as a turning point in her life and continued on with a healthy lifestyle for a full year before returning to have another sculpting procedure. As you can imagine, this has been a life-changing transformation for her.

Laser liposuction is a well-tolerated and comfortable procedure. The patient is given a mild sedative and relaxes while the area to be treated is gently filled with a tumescent solution, which numbs it from the inside. Once the area is fully desensitized, the laser and suctioning commence. The patient usually relaxes and listens to music or watches videos as the treatment is being performed and experiences little to no discomfort.

Patients are not candidates for laser liposuction if they are pregnant or breastfeeding, have insulin-dependent diabetes, have active or chronic liver disease or hepatitis, have coronary artery disease, unstable hypertension, bleeding disorders, or are on Coumadin/Heparin. Those patients with immune-related disorders such as HIV or are allergic to lidocaine are also not candidates. If its determined you’re not a candidate for laser liposuction, we can offer many noninvasive FDA-approved alternatives such as Liposonix, SculpSure, and CoolSculpting.

Depending on the degree of looseness, options include noninvasive skin tightening technologies such as Exilis, Thermage, VelaShape, or Ultherapy. If noninvasive options aren’t adequate to address the issue, there are surgical options as well. Whatever the case, our physicians will help guide you to the best solution for your particular needs.

The laser liposuction process starts with a complimentary consultation, where you will discuss your body contouring goals with a physician. If it is decided that laser liposuction is right for you, we will schedule your treatment date. You’ll also be fitted for a compression garment that you will wear once the procedure is completed. In the weeks before the procedure, lab work will be performed to confirm that you have no underlying health issues and that you are a good candidate for the procedure. We always recommend getting a good night’s sleep the evening before the procedure.

One of the great benefits of laser lipo is how well it fits into today’s busy lifestyle. When the procedure is completed, you will be ready to be driven home. We recommend that you take it easy for the remainder of the day and get a good night’s sleep. A friend or relative must be with you for the first night overnight. Initial post-treatment discomfort is generally mild, similar to the feeling after a hard work out, and is easily controlled with oral medication, usually Tylenol, but a narcotic can be used if needed. Be aware that there will be a moderate amount of pink or red drainage in the first 24 hours post-procedure. This is normal. You will wear a compression garment for a few weeks to aid in the recovery and body contouring process. We also like to schedule a follow-up visit shortly after the procedure to monitor your progress. Any bruising and swelling usually subside in a few weeks. The final result takes shape over several months as the skin continues to tighten long after the procedure has been completed.

Almost anyone can be a good candidate for laser liposuction. In general, the ideal candidate: - Is healthy and gets regular exercise - Is within 30 pounds of their ideal body weight - Has fat deposits that don’t seem to respond to diet and exercise - Has good skin tone with reasonable elasticity - Is willing to work at maintaining the great results by keeping fit

Laser liposuction can be used to remove fat and improve the contour of the skin all over the body, including the abdomen, love handles, flanks, hips, bra fat, back fat, arm, inner and outer thighs, and under the chin.

Our talented physicians have hands-on experience with every device on the market and have shared techniques with doctors from California, Chicago, New Jersey, Toronto, Pennsylvania, New York, Atlanta, and Virginia. They have incorporated only the best technologies and the latest techniques for our Body Sculpting Center. Our clinical staff is headed up by a registered nurse who specializes in cosmetic medicine, ensuring that the highest clinical standards are maintained in every step of the process. Of course, results matter most of all, and our gallery of laser liposuction before and after photos above shows that we are New Jersey’s laser lipo experts.

Before you enter the treatment room, the doctor will mark the area to be treated with sterile colored markers to use as a roadmap during the procedure and will take a series of photographs. You will be given a mild sedative. You will then lie comfortably on a soft, warm treatment bed and we will use a small needle to inject local anesthesia into the incision sites to be used during the procedure. You may feel a slight pinching sensation, but these injections are generally painless and are often the only discomfort felt during the procedure. Next, the doctor will make a few tiny openings and the treatment area will be filled with a tumescent solution to make it numb. The doctor will then insert the laser fiber and make several passes to liquefy the fat and to lift, smooth and tighten the skin. The fat and tumescent solution will then be suctioned out with small cannulas. Once the procedure is completed, absorbent pads are placed on the incision points and a compression garment is fitted.

Laser liposuction shouldn’t be viewed as a replacement for diet and exercise; rather all three should be seen as partners in success. At Reflections, we believe integrating regular exercise and smart nutritional choices is vital for getting the most out of the procedure and sustaining your results.

Laser liposuction has the significant advantage of being performed while the patient is awake using a special fluid to numb the treatment area and make the procedure comfortable there’s no need for general anesthesia and the risks that come along with it. Being awake allows the patient to be moved into the ideal position during treatment, which increases safety and the quality of the result sometimes we will even stand a patient up during a procedure to see how the treatment area looks. Another big advantage is the fat melting and skin tightening provided by the laser, which allows for smoother, tighter, and more pleasing results than traditional liposuction methods. There’s also far less bruising, swelling, and downtime with laser liposuction. Traditional liposuction offers no real advantages for the patient.

The Body Contouring Center of Reflections is dedicated to one thing: body contouring. The team of experienced physicians and staff will anticipate and understand your every need, from day of consult, to day of treatment. They will be there to guide you through the process of laser liposuction and share in the excitement of your results. Our laser lipo suite was created specifically for laser liposuction, rather than retrofitting the procedure into an existing office, which has become the norm in the region. Patient comfort and safety are the priorities. The main treatment room is spacious and connected to a bathroom and recovery suite for convenience and privacy. We provide our patients with a choice of watching TV or listening to music during the treatment. There is a comfortable waiting area for our guests with television and Internet access as well as a large retail mall nearby. The center in the Martinsville section of Bridgewater is located at the borders between Bridgewater, Basking Ridge and Warren NJ, with easy access from Rt. 78, Rt. 287, and Rt. 22.

Liposuction is as permanent and total of a solution for excess fat as you can get. What that means is, you should only need 1 treatment to achieve your goals, and the results will last for as long as you don’t gain a significant amount of weight. Of course, your goals should be realistic and based on what you and the doctor discuss as being possible, given your anatomy. Not everyone can achieve the 18″ waist of an Instagram starlet, but the vast majority of people we meet with are able to enjoy truly amazing results from liposuction. Remember that Liposuction is not an alternative to a healthy lifestyle.

Vaser lipo is a procedure aimed to safely reduce fat with less invasive techniques than traditional liposuction. It is a breakthrough liposuction technique which removes the excessive fat effectively, giving you permanent results. Vaser ultrasonic liposuction uses ultrasonic sound waves to break up the fat cells, which are then gently removed using a minimally-invasive microcannula. The surrounding tissue remains unharmed during this procedure. There are different kinds of fat that can be removed with vaser lipo, but they require different techniques. Fibrous fat requires a more comprehensive removal, which is why vaser lipo is the most effective way of getting rid of it. However, if you do not have good skin elasticity, this is not the best procedure for you. Vaser lipo can help contour your body by removing about 3 liters of liquefied fat with one treatment session. It’s important that you maintain a healthy lifestyle after the procedure if you wish to retain the beautiful results you get from vaser lipo. You can get the procedure done on most parts of the body, and the costs depend upon the number of areas treated, among other factors.

We perform Vaser Liposuction under local anesthesia with oral sedation (relaxing medication given by mouth). This means you are completely relaxed, but awake, throughout the procedure. We use numbing solutions to ensure you are comfortable and feel nothing more than touch or pressure throughout the procedure. We also offer several different options for relaxing medication, which the patient can help choose between, for a comfortable and easy procedure experience. Avoiding general anesthesia will not only help make your procedure safer, but it will also make your experience more comfortable. That’s because general anesthesia often induces nausea and other unpleasant symptoms following surgery. In addition, the local anesthesia we use helps to reduce blood loss during surgery, leaving you not only feeling stronger and better after surgery, but also reducing the bruising and trauma, which is a main source of pain and discomfort as well as prolonged healing times after liposuction, as well as complications.

Our practice has chosen to invest very heavily in the best liposuction platforms. We offer Vaser Lipo in addition to Smartlipo, SlimLipo, SAFE Lipo, and MicroAire Power-Assisted Lipo (PAL). We know there’s no one best tool for every job. Here’s one reason: all fat isn’t created equal. Read about this in our blog post about the different kinds of fat – fibrous, fluffy, firm (visceral), and cellulite. Lipo works on fluffy fat and fibrous fat, but as you can guess, one of these is pretty easy to remove and the other, not so much. Fibrous fat usually requires some extra considerations, including pre-treating the fat for easier and more comprehensive removal. Vaser is the treatment of choice for this type of fat. At Reflections, we usually use MicroAire Power-Assisted Liposuction after the ultrasound treatment by Vaser, for the perfect 1-2 punch to improve your shape. This device uses a proprietary vibratory motion to assist with removal of unwanted fat and is a favorite among many surgeons. If we’re harvesting fat for a fat transfer liposculpting procedure, like Brazilian Butt Lift (BBL), we often prefer Vaser lipo. It does offer some of the gentlest fat harvesting, which helps more of the fat survive the transfer process. Each liposuction doctor on our team has their favorite tools and unique techniques, but in the end, it’s all about the results.

A lot of our patients tell us the time off for recovery after liposuction was the number one reason they put off having their procedure for so long. Today we’re able to achieve amazing things with liposuction, without a lengthy or difficult recovery. The stuff you see on reality TV about weeks of pain is not typical for our patients. Instead, you can expect to be up and walking around the same day of your surgery. Though you may feel sleepy, you shouldn’t feel ill (nauseous and groggy) the way you would with general anesthesia. Usually, patients take 2-3 days after their procedure off from work, depending upon how physically active their jobs are. Since our patients most frequently schedule their procedures for a Thursday or Friday, that means they’re back to work on Monday or Tuesday. High-intensity workouts need to wait until at least a week after your procedure, but light cardio such as walks can be resumed almost immediately. Moms ask us about picking up infants and children quite frequently, and unlike a tummy tuck, you’ll be able to pick up your children with no concern quickly after the procedure. This can vary a little bit by the area treated and how tender you personally are, but we typically say 2 days is long enough recovery to be able to pick up small children and infants again.

Vaser Liposuction received FDA-Approved for its safety and efficacy in 20021. This means clinical studies have shown the procedure works, and is safe. It’s been shown to be safe for all body types and skin tones. There are some medical diseases and conditions, however, which may make you unsuitable for treatment with Vaser. However, in those situations, we can often offer an alternative, such as Coolsculpting or Sculpsure, to meet your fat reduction goals.

Vaser lipo is a less invasive and safer procedure than the traditional liposuction. It is performed using local anesthesia and is efficient at removing fat. The procedure helps to remove up to 4 liters of the subdermal fat and it works on various body areas including your neck, jowls, chin, buttocks, arms, abdomen, thighs, knees, flanks, chest, back and ankles. Your body can recover faster from the vaser lipo procedure since there is less trauma on the skin. You must expect some level of swelling, numbing and bruising since it is a surgery after all. The technology behind vaser lipo uses sound waves to loosen up the fat. A saline solution and tumescent liquid is injected into the body and instead of using a cannula, it uses vibration from ultrasound to break down the fat cells. The ultrasonic probe vibration gently disengages and loosens up the fat cells and helps to emulsify the fat along with the tumescent fluid. After this, a small cannula will be used to remove the liquid with the fat cells. Vaser lipo is a gentler procedure and this allows the surgeon greater control. The way the procedure is designed, it loosens up the fat but protects and preserves the surrounding tissue with the saline solution leading to lesser bleeding and bruising. You must consult an experienced cosmetic physician before choosing to undergo vaser lipo since it is not to be used as a weight loss procedure. A good candidate for vaser lipo has a BMI under 30 and is only struggling with certain stubborn areas.

Vaser liposuction uses pulsated ultrasound technology and is efficient when it comes to removing the liquefied fat. The procedure is not too invasive and less expansive. Not only are vaser lipo results stunning, but the recovery is also shorter as well. Since the procedure is performed under local anesthesia with oral sedation and not general anesthesia, you remain completely relaxed and awake throughout the procedure. When you undergo a surgical procedure, the pain and discomfort usually are symptoms of the general anesthesia given for the procedure. Since local anesthesia is given for your vaser lipo surgery, it reduces the associated risks like nausea and discomfort. With local anesthesia, you will only feel a slight pressure or touch during the procedure. It also reduces blood loss, bruising and trauma, making you feel better and stronger. In addition to these, your healing time gets longer. When the recovery period is easy and devoid of complications, your vaser lipo results will also be stunning and long-lasting.

Vaser liposuction uses pulsated ultrasound technology to effectively remove liquefied fat from your body. It is a minimally-invasive procedure that offers shorter recovery with stunning and long-term results. It is performed under local anesthesia and oral sedation, which means you are relaxed and awake throughout your vaser liposuction procedure. Vaser liposuction is used to effectively break apart fat cells, which can then be removed with a micro cannula. The most commonly treated areas include the abdomen, love handles, bra rolls, arms, thighs, legs, chest, flanks, neck, and chin area. It can be used to remove up to 4 liters of subdermal fat. It’s important to note that vaser liposuction is not a weight loss program and cannot substitute a healthy lifestyle. You should discuss your goals with your surgeon and have realistic expectations so that your surgeon can determine what is achievable with the procedure depending on your anatomy. A majority of patients are fully satisfied with their vaser liposuction results and enjoy their slimmer and more toned appearance. Your session takes about an hour for each treatment area and could require longer depending on the area. Even though you will see your results within a week from your treatment, your body will continue to improve over the next 2 to 6 months. Since your results are permanent, you only need one vaser liposuction treatment to achieve your desired goals. Obviously, if you gain a significant amount of weight in the future, your results will be altered.

The Vaser liposuction system is a revolutionary piece of technology that is making fat removal and body contouring simpler, safer, and easier. Though with every procedure there are some side effects associated. Your doctor at Reflections center will go over all of the possible side effects of Vaser Liposuction with you during your consultation appointment. Some of the most common side effects are bruising, swelling, redness, and inflammation. These side effects are temporary, typically resolving within a few days of the treatment. Our patients can be assured that Vaser Liposuction is safe because our team is full of highly-skilled individuals with immense experience and this technology is the only FDA-approved ultrasonic liposuction treatment. The Vaser Liposuction system can be used on many different areas of the body. The recovery period is quicker than traditional liposuction, most side effects are diminished within two-to-three days. Though side effects are possible they are typically better than traditional liposuction side effects.

Vaser lipo is a precision contouring treatment that uses state-of-the-art ultrasound energy. The procedure is designed for reshaping your body by reducing fat. The ultrasound energy delivered during the procedure works to dissolve fat, but also bounces off other structures like nerves, blood vessels, and connective tissue. This means that the surrounding tissue remain safe. The dissolved fat is then naturally eliminated from the body over time. It is a safe and predictable procedure which gives smooth results. Vaser lipo results are stunning with minimal downtime and discomfort. Your provider may use a local or topical anesthetic to reduce any discomfort you may feel during the procedure. The cost of your vaser lipo procedure varies depending on the area of treatment. You can choose vaser lipo for treating various areas like the abdomen, flanks, and inner thighs. However, since a single area could mean the removal of varying amounts of fat, the amount of time required will be different too. In addition to the cost of the procedure itself, vaser lipo pricing also includes the cost of the operating facilities, anesthetists, nurses, and providers. Some vaser lipo centers also use a matrix with guidelines based on your skin type, fat volume, and precision rather than the number of treatment areas. You’ll receive a full estimate of your costs during a consultation with our cosmetic physicians. The quality of your vaser lipo results also depend on the quality of the post-operative care you receive, which includes follow up visits with your vaser lipo center. When you go for your liposuction consultation, you should take into consideration all of these factors.

Patients see a big improvement immediately following their procedure. But, over the 24-48 hours following surgery, the area will swell and these results may look distorted. By the end of the first week, these great results usually return, unless overexertion has caused additional swelling. Generally, any bruising is gone by one and a half to two weeks. By around one month, patients see the biggest changes and are generally ready to show off their results in more body-conscious clothing. However, results won’t be finalized until six months post-procedure when all of the swellings has truly resolved.

SculpSure’s thermal technology targets fat cells and damages them, prompting your body to remove these cells through natural metabolism cycles. You will start to notice fat is diminishing around 4-6 weeks, with a full result between 8-12 weeks.

After treatment with SculpSure, you may experience side-effects like redness, swelling, soreness, bruising, and uncharacteristic firmness at the treatment areas. In general, these side-effects subside quickly.

SculpSure works well for a wider range of patients than previous technologies. The ideal candidate: - Doesn’t have significant loose skin in the treatment areas - Has a BMI of 30 or lower – this particular technology works best for those with only pockets of stubborn fat. There are other options, like Laser Liposuction, for those with more significant fat reduction needs. - Doesn’t have significant loose skin in the treatment areas

Current pricing is $375 per panel, with a 2 panel minimum (so $750-$1500, depending on how many panels. Each panel is the approximately the size of an iphone5, and up to 4 panels can be used per 25-minute treatment). Exact quotes based on your goals and treatment options will be given during your complimentary consultation.

SculpSure is the right treatment for those who are struggling with stubborn fatty areas on their body, but they are not willing to undergo an invasive procedure such as liposuction. SculpSure can help reduce up to 25 percent of the fatty tissue with just one single treatment session. The SculpSure laser liposuction treatment is highly customizable and it uses a laser to get you safer results. There aren’t many known side effects of the procedure other than tenderness and redness in the treatment area. You are not exposed to any complications, there are no risks of an infection, no incisions and hence, no scars from the SculpSure treatment. SculpSure laser liposuction is an in-office treatment that will only take about 25 minutes to complete and give you permanent results. Usually, there is no requirement of a follow-up treatment and you can get the procedure done during your lunch hour from work. You can get treatment in four different body areas in one appointment. Since the SculpSure treatment destroys the fat cells, your results will last for many years. Within 6 to 8 weeks, as your body naturally eliminates the dead fat cells, you will see stunning results with a well-contoured body. It also helps to rebuild the collagen an elastin in your skin which results in tightening and elimination of any sagging.

SculpSure has become popular as a safe and proven contouring treatment that can give you the toned body you always desired. Usually, it’s recommended that you undergo 1 to 3 sessions every 6 weeks to see optimal Sculpsure results. Your results can usually be seen after 6 weeks with continued improvements over the weeks and months after treatment. It is important that you maintain your weight in order to maintain your SculpSure results. Currently, you can undergo SculpSure treatments for the lower abdomen and flanks, but it can be used anywhere on the body, including the chin. Your SculpSure provider can use up to 4 laser applicators at one time, and the technique will last for around 25 minutes. This means that more than one area can be treated in your one-hour session and the procedure boasts a 90 percent success rate. After SculpSure, the dead fat cells are absorbed into your immune system, and most patients see about 24 percent reduction in fat. However, it’s important to understand that undergoing two SculpSure treatment sessions does not mean twice the amount of reduction in fat, but simply that you will see the 24 percent reduction in fat spread over these two sessions. Some people may see more fat reduction than the 24 percent. Depending on your cosmetic goals, you may require more than one session to see significant improvement.

SculpSure is the first ever laser treatment that has been approved by the FDA for non-invasive lipolysis of your flanks and abdomen. This is a controlled, light-based technology that has been benefitting patients who wish to get rid of stubborn fat. Up to 4 areas can be treated in a single session which lasts for about 25 minutes. During your procedure, you can lose up to 24 percent of fat from these areas. You can undergo a treatment with our SculpSure experts during your lunch hour and return right back to your normal routine afterwards. There are no needles, surgery, or downtime involved with SculpSure treatment. In fact, the controlled light is transmitted as a warming energy to the area. You can watch TV or take a nap during your treatment, since most patients find it very relaxing and comfortable. Additionally, there is no bruising from SculpSure, meaning you don’t need to worry about covering up after treatment. The damaged fat cells are removed naturally by your body over the next 12 weeks as you see your beautiful results gradually emerge. You can opt for further fat reduction with additional treatment sessions. SculpSure is a gentle procedure and most patients only report slight discomfort. However, it is said to be less painful than even CoolSculpting, which is easily tolerated by most patients. Everybody tolerates pain differently though, which is why SculpSure includes a feature which cools your skin as the treatment continues. The laser continues to alternate between warming and cooling to maintain your comfort level, ensuring that SculpSure is painless for you.

Sculpsure works by transmitting warming energy through pads which are attached to the treatment areas. During the treatment, you’ll be able to relax and watch TV, take a nap, or even get some work done out of the office. The treatment will take approximately 25 minutes.

There is no downtime with SculpSure. SculpSure is so gentle, there isn’t even any numbing. After the treatment, you can feel free to get right back to your normal schedule, including work and exercise. Unlike with previous technologies, SculpSure has no risk of bruising, meaning no one will ever know you’ve had a treatment.

SculpSure is the first ever laser treatment approved by the FDA for non-invasive lipolysis of the abdomen and flanks. Patients who are looking to eliminate stubborn fat in these areas can benefit from this controlled, light-based technology. The procedure only takes about 25 minutes for completion, meaning you can fit it into your lunch hour. There is no surgery, needles, or downtime involved in the SculpSure procedure. Up to 4 areas can be treated per session with a loss of up to 24 percent of fat from these areas. The fat in these areas will melt away and be eliminated by the natural process of your body in the next 12 weeks, giving you natural SculpSure results. During your treatment, panels are attached to the treatment areas and no suction is required. These panels deliver alternative hot and cold treatment cycles for the next 25 minutes of your session. There’s no discomfort or bruising from the treatment which means you can return to your schedule immediately afterwards. Since the damaged fat cells are removed naturally through your body’s metabolism, you will see the first signs of fat reduction in about 4 to 6 weeks. Your full SculpSure results can be realized in 8 to 12 weeks. SculpSure’s cost is about $375 per panel; usually 2 panels are used for treating at least 2 different areas of your body. This means that your SculpSure cost is about $750 to $1500, depending on the number of panels being used. Within your 25-minute treatment session, a total of 4 panels can be used to help reduce fat from 4 different areas. However, since it is dependent on your requirements, we can give you a full estimate of your costs during a consultation with our cosmetic physicians.

Sculpsure is a body contouring procedure meant to help those who are struggling with stubborn fatty areas on their body but who do not wish to undergo a procedure as invasive as liposuction. Just a single session of SculpSure can reduce up to 25 percent of fatty tissue in the targeted area. Another reason why the procedure has become so popular is that it is highly customizable. There are no incisions, scars, risks of infections, or complications from the SculpSure treatment. It is an in-office procedure that takes only about 25 minutes to complete. You can have it done during your lunch hour and return to your routine immediately afterwards. Your SculpSure results are permanent and most people do not require a follow-up treatment. The targeted fat cells are destroyed permanently, and you will see your SculpSure results in about 6 to 8 weeks as the body naturally gets rid of them. Once our cosmetic physicians have evaluated your body, they can treat 4 areas during a single appointment to offer you a well-contoured body. In addition to fat loss, this is one procedure that will also give you skin tightening. This happens because the laser heat promotes the natural growth of collagen and elastin in your skin. As you see your results emerge, you will also see a natural tightening of the skin, giving you beautifully-defined contours in the areas where you were struggling with fatty deposits. Depending on the area that is targeted during your treatment, 1 to 4 applicators may be used; your SculpSure cost varies and you can expect your cost to be about $1400 for the 4-applicator session. It is proven to be the most effective non-invasive fat reduction procedure.

One of the newest non-invasive body contouring procedures is that of SculpSure. The Sculpsure procedure is quick, taking less than half an hour. During the treatments, the body starts to eliminate the fat cells naturally to give amazing, natural results. Many patients start to see results within six weeks of the treatment plan. The design is great for precise treatment in areas like the chin and neck. The SculpSure treatment is very versatile and can be used on multiple areas of the body. Neck Chin Back Stomach Hips Thighs Arms Knees Belo the Buttocks (banana roll) Most anywhere on the body where there is excess fat can be treated with SculpSure. Even fat that bulges from a bra can be treated with SculpSure. Many studies have shown that, on average, almost a quarter of fat cells can be destroyed in the treatment area. The team at Reflections Center have been specially trained in SculpSure and body contouring procedures to help give patients the best results and improved confidence in themselves.

Patients will see a reduction in fat after the first session; full results are seen around 12 weeks after treatment. Patients will have the option to do more treatments, for further fat reduction. Each treatment will offer up to 25% reduction in fat for the area treated. SculpSure is not intended as a replacement for healthy diet and exercise, but it does help you reach your goals faster and easier than ever before.

On the day of your PrecisionTX treatment, you’ll start with a pre-operative check-in with your treating physician. We’ll check your vital signs, walk you through the procedure and answer any lingering questions, making sure you’re completely comfortable before we begin. You’ll be given the option to have some relaxing medication by mouth (this is generally decided upon before the day of surgery, since you’ll need to arrange a ride home if you do decide to, like most of our patients do, to have this medication). Next, the doctor will mark out your treatment area, make a few small numbing injections, create the small entry points, and begin the actual procedure. During PrecisionTX a thin wand is passed underneath the skin to heat the collagen to a very precise temperature. The wand is about the thickness of spaghetti and emits a laser light. The laser heats the skin with a sensor to ensure just the right temperature is reached. You’ll hear the machine beeping to alert the doctor as to how much energy has been emitted and what temperature has been reached.

PrecisionTX does not require general anesthesia, and many patients find this to be a great benefit. We do use local anesthesia or numbing injections, and we also offer relaxing medication by mouth, sometimes called sedation. The numbing injections are just that – injections – so there will be a few pinpricks. But beyond that, you really shouldn’t feel anything at all. Patients may feel somewhat sore due to swelling the next day or two, but this should be easily managed by Tylenol or other over-the-counter pain medication.

PrecisionTX has very few risks, and they are the risk of numbness or loss of feeling, swelling, bruising, and redness. None of these risks have ever been reported to be permanent, and they are generally experienced as very mild and short-term with this procedure.

Your results are the direct effect of new cell growth. These cells will behave like all your other cells did when they were new – that is, they will act and age just like the rest of you, over time. Patients typically find they are happy and do not consider retreating within at least 2-3 years.

Most people have heard that lasers aren’t safe for dark or tanned skin tones, and while there is some truth to this taboo – some lasers, especially on certain settings, are not safe for all skin tones – PrecisionTX is a different kind of laser that is safe for all skin types and tones, even if you’re tanned. Because PrecisionTX delivers its laser from beneath the skin, treating only the deeper layers of the skin, there is no risk of pigmentation change due to your skin type or tone.

PrecisionTX is performed through a few very small openings, which are strategically created along natural skin folds on the body. Typically, these openings leave no visible scarring after they heal. Healing to the point of disappearing can take one or several months, depending on the individual. Some individuals will have visible scars, as they are simply more predisposed to scars in general. Those are the same individuals who might scar from a biopsy or small acne blemish, or those who have a history of keloid scarring. Generally, people know if they are prone to scarring in this way.

PrecisionTX works to first create a \u201cshrinkwrap-like\u201d effect by heating the collagen, and then over a longer period encourage the growth of new collagen. Most patients see a small improvement within a few weeks, with much more pronounced results see at 3-6 months later, when compared to \u201cbefore\u201d photos. Because these results develop slowly over time, the treatment is very discreet. Meaning the procedure is easily concealed and kept private.

PrecisionTX offers more definition, firmness, tone, and tightness for loose skin. It cannot provide any improvement in muscle laxity. It can be combined with liposuction for removing excess fat. One treatment will provide the very best results available without invasive surgery, for tightening loose skin. Because the procedure relies on the individual body’s response to the stimulation to grow new collagen, the amount of change you will see varies by the individual. Some bodies respond better and faster than others.

The actual treatment usually lasts from 20-60 minutes per session, depending upon how many areas are being treated, and their size.

VelaShape doesn’t require any numbing or anesthesia because the treatment was designed with patient comfort in mind. Read the item below for more details on what you can expect during your treatment.

Most healthy patients are good candidates for VelaShape treatment, but the following types of people are not suitable for treatment with VelaShape: - Patients with type I or II diabetes - Patients with anticoagulative conditions - Patients prone to blood clots - Photosensitive or sunburnt patients (tanned skin is okay) - Pregnant women (patients should wait until after giving birth to have this treatment) - People with pacemakers, heart valves, metal hip joints or dental plates

VelaShape has received FDA Approval for its safety and efficacy. There are no restrictions or risks based upon skin tone or type with VelaShape, as it is not a laser.

VelaShape will leave the skin of the treated area red and warm for up to 4 hours following treatment. This shouldn’t keep you from resuming any normal activities, but this is something to be aware of when planning your treatments. Bruising is possible, but very rare in our experience, and usually limited to patients who are on blood-thinning agents or who are particularly proned to bruising.

You can improve upon your VelaShape results by living a healthy lifestyle and maintaining your results with regular \u201ctouch-up\u201d treatments. You can also combine VelaShape with the following treatments to boost collagen growth even more, creating smoother, firmer, and tighter skin at a cellular level: Sculptra RF Microneedling

CoolSculpting is a very safe and effective procedure when done by a trained specialist. The team at Reflections Center offers CoolSculpting as a noninvasive body contouring procedure. This procedure is ideal because of its convenience, it’s quick and offers little-to-no downtime. As with any treatment, there are some side effects associated with CoolSculpting. During the procedure some people may feel some discomfort with sensations of pulling, pinching, tugging, tingling, and cold. Many find the procedure painless and relaxing even. Afterward, there are some mild side effects including redness, swelling, bruising (pretty rare), firmness, tenderness, itching, and/or skin sensitivity. Many of these side effects will resolve within a couple of days and can be diminished with over-the-counter pain meds. Wearing loose, soft clothing can also make most of these side effects very mild. Most patients return to their normal daily routine with no issue immediately following the CoolSculpting treatment. The doctors at Reflections Center will provide after-care instructions for any side effects and to make sure that our patients get the best possible results. Soon after the treatment, you will start to see your results as the fat cells die.

We have 2 office locations, in Livingston, NJ, and in the Martinsville section of Bridgewater, NJ. While we perform free consultations for CoolSculpting at both of these offices. We currently perform CoolSculpting at our Livingston, NJ office.

The fat cells CoolSculpting eliminates are gone for good. However, if you gain weight in the future, your body will build itself new fat cells to store more fat. So it’s important that you maintain your results with a healthy lifestyle.

No, CoolSculpting often doesn’t change the number on the scale very much at all. That’s because CoolSculpting removes fat cells, which are actually very light-weight. So you should expect to lose inches and look better, but the scale might not move at all.

CoolSculpting is extremely safe. It’s been performed safely on millions of patients worldwide for over 5 years now. There are no risks related to skin tone or tan with CoolSculpting, making it safe for patients of all skin types during all times of the year.

CoolSculpting is not right for everyone. It won’t undo a bad diet or lack of activity, in the long term or in terms of overall health. But beyond those who don’t live a healthy lifestyle (or who are not committed to making changes to live more healthfully afterward), there are some surprising reasons CoolSculpting may not be right for you. People without pinchable rolls will not only find CoolSculpting to be extremely painful, but are unlikely to have good results. These patients are typically better candidates for SculpSure or laser liposuction.

CoolSculpting is based on the science of cryolipolysis and is an effective treatment for freezing fat cells. It does not harm any surrounding tissue, delivering controlled cooling safely into the fat cells. These cells are crystallized and naturally eliminated by your body with time. By the time you are in your teenage years, your body has a fixed number of fat cells and any weight fluctuations only change their size but not the number. This means that you can reduce the number of fat cells in your body with CoolSculpting, even by about 25 percent. Even though it is a great procedure for anybody with stubborn fat in certain body parts like the abdomen, love handles, or arms, it is not the right procedure for everybody. If you are not committed to a healthy lifestyle, it is not the right procedure for you. Additionally, it only works if you have pinchable fat in the treatment areas; in such cases where you don’t, you might benefit more from laser liposuction and similar procedures. CoolSculpting is an effective body contouring treatment that can help to eliminate inches from your profile for the long-term. You should be committed to maintaining your results by following a healthy diet and an active lifestyle going forward. Any future weight gain may lead to your body developing new fat cells to store the fat, and the existing fat cells can also get larger. This can cause disproportional weight gain and lead to the need for additional procedures.

CoolSculpting is a procedure that helps remove stubborn body fat by freezing the fat cells, which are then eliminated naturally by your body. The procedure can eliminate 20 to 25 percent fat cells in the treatment area. It does not help you lose weight and should not be mistaken for a weight loss procedure. CoolSculpting is a body sculpting procedure meant to improve the shape of your body, giving you better contours. This can make it appear as though you have shed a few pounds. When you consult with a CoolSculpting technician, they will be able to check your areas of concern and recommend the right treatment package for you. Your results are permanent since the fat cells do not come back once they have been eliminated. This is contrary to weight loss where the fat cells only shrink in size and, when you consume extra calories, they can become bigger again. However, with the CoolSculpting procedure, the fat cells die and are permanently removed; when you consume extra calories, the fat will distribute evenly over other areas in your body. This is why CoolSculpting is an effective procedure. If you did not find the desired results with one session of CoolSculpting, you can get additional treatments for the same area. However, you should wait for at least 30 days before the next session. The idea is to give your body enough time to flush out the dead fat cells so that you can see your final results and decide if you need another session. As long as you follow a healthy lifestyle, you can retain your stunning results for years to come.

Each treatment cycle takes 35-60 minutes, and patients usually choose to have multiple cycles performed during a single visit, usually between two and four. The doctor will discuss how long your procedure will take during your complimentary consultation.

In the weeks following your procedure, you will notice a gradual reduction in the thickness of the fat layer in the targeted area, with noticeable results and measurable fat reduction in about two months. The treated area will be red for about 20 minutes immediately after the procedure, and it might feel stiff, but this normally disappears within 10 minutes. Occasionally, patients may experience some localized bruising and tenderness as well. You may also feel a temporary numbness in the treated area for a period of time after the procedure. If this does occur, the time this sensation lasts varies by patient, with some people feeling numb for a few hours and others feeling numb for several weeks. Don’t be concerned, as over time all patients regain normal feeling in the treated area. Within the first two weeks, some patients may also experience tingling sensations or soreness in the area as well. A follow-up visit should be scheduled with your doctor two to four months after your procedure to assess your cosmetic improvement.

No, you won’t need to change your diet or exercise routine or take any pills or vitamins to see results. CoolSculpting works well on its own to eliminate the stored fat you already have on your body. Living a healthy lifestyle is great for your health and will definitely help you maintain a healthier physique, but CoolSculpting doesn’t require changes to your lifestyle to achieve a result.

CoolSculpting was approved by FDA about 5 years ago and it is based on the science of cryolipolysis. It is a safe and effective fat freezing technology. Even as it destroys the fat cells, the CoolSculpting treatment does not harm any surrounding cells. The procedure delivers controlled cooling effectively into the fat cells and within your skin. The treated fat cells get crystallized and die. With time, your body will naturally process this fat and eliminates them. Before you understand whether a CoolSculpting treatment works for you, it is important to know the difference between losing fat cells and losing weight. When you lose weight, the fat cells become smaller and when you gain weight, they become bigger. By the time you reach teenage, the number of fat cells in your body are fixed. When you experience weight fluctuation, it will change the size of these fat cells and not their number. The CoolSculpting treatment reduces the number of fat cells in the treated area by about 25 percent. This means that you are decreasing the number of fat cells and it gives you the sculpted appearance as they get eliminated from your body.

With the effective cooling technology of CoolSculpting, the way fat was eliminated saw a new non-invasive entrant. Initially, it was only helpful with treating the abdomen and love handles but, with the new redesigned applicators, CoolSculpting can now treat almost any body part using a specialized applicator. If you have been struggling with stubborn fat in other areas like the inner and outer thighs, arms, neck, bra area, or neck, you can now utilize CoolSculpting for effective reduction. CoolSculpting is a relaxing procedure where you can read a book or watch TV while your procedure is completed. The vacuum applicator is attached to the treatment area over a gel pad, and it uses suction to gently gather your excess fat between two cooling panels. During your consultation with our CoolSculpting experts, you’ll be given an estimate of how many treatment sessions you will need to give you the desired results. It is also dependent on the number of areas you want to be treated. Generally, most patients require 1 to 3 treatment sessions on each area to see best results. The best part about CoolSculpting is that you can choose to have multiple areas treated during a single visit. You should know that one treatment area for CoolSculpting is the size of your hand. This means that you need one treatment for one love handle while the lower abdomen generally requires 2 treatments. Each treatment session will remove about 25 percent of fat from that area; multiple sessions in the same area will help remove about 50 percent of the targeted fat. This is why the number of CoolSculpting treatments required is very specific and depends on your body’s anatomy, the targeted areas, and the results you desire. You will not lose weight with this procedure but rather inches, meaning you can enjoy a slimmer appearance and the fact that you fit better in your clothes.

When the procedure begins you will feel a cooling sensation and then the treatment area quickly goes numb. You sit or lie down as the fat treated by the applicator is cooled. The surrounding tissue remains unharmed while the fat is being treated. Afterward, a quick massage will help to warm you up, and then you’ll be on your way.

There is no recovery time required after CoolSculpting, and you are free to resume your normal activities right away, including work and exercise.

CoolSculpting is a quick procedure aimed at freezing away your fat cells from stubborn areas on your body. There is no downtime with this groundbreaking procedure and most patients go back to their routines right afterwards, making it one of the most popular non-invasive methods to lose stubborn fat. Anybody who is struggling with areas of fat that do not go away with just diet and exercise can opt for it as long as you have pinchable fat. During a consultation with our cosmetic physicians, we can answer any questions you may have. One of the most commonly-asked question is whether the procedure hurts. Most patients report that they feel numbness after the initial cold in the treatment area. Once the procedure is over, a quick massage warms up the area. However, there are several stages in the procedure which begins with the protective gel pad being applied to the treatment area. This is completely painless even though the pad is wet and cold like the jelly used during an ultrasound. When the applicator is positioned over the treatment area, it pulls your skin into the handpiece. This is not painful either, but may come as a surprise. The next steps can feel extremely cold and some patients may feel a bit of a sting. After a few minutes, though, the procedure becomes comfortable since the area will become numb. Most CoolSculpting providers make it more comfortable for their patients with entertainment or other accommodations. Once the applicator is removed, the area is massaged either by hand or an acoustic therapy device which is effective in expediting the process of elimination of the dead fat cells. This is one part of the procedure which may be uncomfortable for most patients, since the feeling slowly returns to the area.The treatment area may remain a bit tender for a few weeks and you will slowly see your result emerge.

Once you have decided to undergo the CoolSculpting procedure, it is also important to understand CoolSculpting costs. There are some factors in which the costs of the procedure may vary including the size of the area and the required amount of treatments.
• CoolMax is the largest applicator and is used for volume reduction, known as the debulking treatment. A smaller applicator may be used to refine your results in a combination session.
• Smaller applicators come in 3 different varieties:
• CoolCore is the applicator is used in case there is excessive abdominal fat and that is why the applicator features a curved shape.
• CoolCurve Plus is contoured for fitting into your love handles and flanks; and the procedure requires at least 2 hours of application on each side.
• CoolFit is a straight applicator used on the arms, back and inner thighs. Any unwanted bulges on the abdomen can also be eliminated with this. When using CoolSculpting for body contouring, you should expect cycles to range from $750-$1500.

Clinical studies on the effectiveness of CoolSculpting been shown to reduce about 20-25% of fat cells in the treatment area. However, this doesn’t mean that you will shed pounds, but rather inches. CoolSculpting should not be relied on as a weightloss treatment.

The treatment is ideal for active, healthy individuals who have at least one inch of fat to lose in their abdomen or flanks. It is noninvasive, so it is a great solution if you have stubborn fat but don’t want to have surgery.

During treatment, you may experience discomfort, pain, cold, prickling, tingling, or warmth. After treatment, you may experience temporary redness, bruising, discomfort, and swelling. Liposonix produces smooth results due to its unique, advanced delivery technology. Typically a Liposonix treatment of the abdomen and flanks is completed in about one hour. This may vary depending on the treatment area and your specific needs. You should consult your doctor to discuss treatment areas and time.

The cost depends on the area you’re having treated, but treatments typically run between $2,000 and $3,000. We encourage you to come in for a consultation at which point we can give you a more precise idea of the cost.

While results vary, clinical studies on the abdomen and flanks have shown average waistline reduction was about one dress or pant size (about one inch), with some patients losing up to two and one-half inches. Most people see maximum results in eight to 12 weeks, the time it takes for the body to naturally metabolize the destroyed fat tissue.

The main difference between these two treatments is that liposuction is a minimally-invasive surgery while Liposonix is not. Liposuction uses small incisions and a surgical cannula to break up fat deposits and remove then with a surgical vacuum. On the other hand, Liposonix uses ultrasound energy to damage fat cells so that the body can metabolize the cells and expel them. Liposonix comes with no downtime or incisions, but can be less cost effective and produce lesser results than liposuction since more than one treatment session is usually required.

Since the treatment is noninvasive, there is little to no downtime, so you can resume your regular activities right away.

You can be - or you can be asleep - that totally depends upon how your surgeon performs this procedure. At our practice, we usually use local anesthesia, where youre awake but relaxed and numb. However, there is no reason you cannot do it under general anesthesia if you and your surgeon decide thats the best option for you.

You can - though you shouldnt need to if things go well with the first procedure.

Whether youve had it under local anesthesia or general, you wont be able to drive yourself home after Smart Lipo. The reason is, you will be under the influence of medications that impair you - so it would be like driving under the influencer (DUI or DWI). So youll need a friend or partner to drive you home. We also ask that someone stay with you for the first 24 hours, just to help you sober up and take it easy for the first day. Most patients really enjoy having someone there to bring them food and help them relax.

You will not need any anesthesia for this treatment. Most ProFractional patients find the treatment doesn’t warrant numbing, though it can be used. Tattoo removal patients have 2 numbing options available to them: Numbing injections and topical numbing cream. Numbing injections make the process extremely comfortable, but the numbing lasts for a few hours, and can only be used on a limited area safely. For that reason, it’s not possible to use numbing injections for large treatment areas, such as a full sleeve or full back piece. But it is a good option for medium to small-sized tattoos, and especially those in very sensitive areas, like the face and hands. We also offer topical numbing cream, for those who want to avoid needles or for those with large treatment areas (there is a limit to how large of an area we can use this cream on, too, but we typically don’t see it become a limiting problem with tattoo removal).

Labiplasty and vaginoplasty are surgical procedures. They can be targeted around rejuvenating or repairing the vagina, but they aren’t the only ways to achieve a tighter more youthful-looking and functional vagina. There are many new laser and heat-based treatments that provide excellent results without the risks of surgery. The American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists warns women against what they refer to as \u201cdesigner vaginoplasty,\u201d treatments aimed at surgically altering the vagina for purely cosmetic purposes, due to the risks of complication.

The price of vaginal rejuvenation can vary widely, depending on which procedures are performed and by whom. According to RealSelf, the average price is around $5,525.3 Typically, for the non-surgical, non-invasive treatments we offer, patients can expect to spend around $3,000 for a series of 3 treatments, to see the best results.

Vaginal rejuvenation can refer to both surgical and non-surgical procedures. Surgical options, such as labiaplasty, involve altering the structure of the vaginal area to enhance appearance and function. Non-surgical options use energy-based devices to tighten and rejuvenate the vaginal tissues without incisions.

Yes, there are non-surgical vaginal rejuvenation options available. These typically involve the use of laser or radiofrequency technology to stimulate collagen production and tighten the vaginal tissues.

Non-surgical vaginal rejuvenation typically involves minimal downtime, with most patients resuming normal activities within a day or two. Surgical procedures may require a longer recovery period, often a few weeks, with specific aftercare instructions to ensure proper healing.

Hair restoration treatments work in these 4 ways: Helps wake up hair follicles that haven’t been producing hair, and get them to start growing hair again Thickens individual hair follicles that have grown thin and smaller (more like peach fuzz) over time Provides the building blocks for hair growth (the right nutrients for hair to grow) Block bad hormones or other chemical imbalances that are inhibiting hair growth Hair is transplanted from areas of thicker growth into areas of sparser growth, to create more coverage where it’s needed Some treatments do only 1 of these things, or just a few, but none do all. Since most patients have more than 1 of these problems, hair regrowth plans typically combine more than treatment. Depending upon your needs, your cosmetic physician at Reflections will give you a set of recommendations to ensure you’re getting the very best results.

Because we recommend a combination of the treatments listed above for each patient, and the way we combine these does vary quite a bit, it’s impossible to give an accurate cost estimate for any individual without having the doctor review your medical history and examine you. What we can tell you is that on average, patients can expect to spend around $2600 – 4000 for the initial treatment series, and then reduced costs long-term to maintain results. This can be financed.

That’s a complex question and one that’s honestly best left up to a physician who can properly diagnose the underlying cause(s) of your hair loss and then pick the right treatment options for you. We do offer free consultations with our physicians for this treatment because we believe every patient deserves the information they need to make an informed decision about their care.

There are some good over-the-counter products but the majority of products being marketed for this are not proven to be effective and they’re pretty expensive. So let’s cover the ones we believe are worthwhile: Nutrafol and Viviscal vitamins Formula 82M Minoxidil or 5% Minoxidil It’s important to note that these products need to be used along with hair growth injections to have the kind of noticeable effect most patients are looking for (vs. simply preserving what hair remains).

Biotin provides the proper building blocks for hair, as do other vitamins, but unless you stimulate the growth of the hair follicles and reduce the hormones that are preventing them from growing, these nutritional building blocks won’t be put to good use by the body.

Unfortunately, there is no cure for hair loss but the treatments to slow hair loss and regrow hair do work! Perhaps in the future new treatments will come about that solve the issue permanently, but the current treatment options do require at least some maintenance over time to ensure your results continue. The sooner you fight hair loss with injectable solutions, the more effective the treatment, the better the ultimate prognosis, and the happier you will be.

Baldness is a term mostly used for excessive hair loss from the scalp. Hair loss could affect just the scalp or your entire body and can result from several factors including genetics, hormonal changes, medication, or a medical condition. Since hair loss is caused by different reasons, the remedies are also varied. Hair loss could be gradual or sudden and some of it is merely temporary while some kinds of hair loss can be permanent. The most common kind of hair loss begins with gradual thinning at the top and it could affect both men and women of any age. In the case of men, this begins at the forehead and follows the pattern of the letter “M”; hair restoration for men helps with hair growth in these areas as well as at the crown. Hair restoration for women employs a different technique since women have different symptoms. They retain their hairline and instead suffer from broadening or gaps within the hair.

“What actually works?” is the most common question we get about hair growth treatments, and the problem is that question is not unwarranted – there are lots of scams out there when it comes to hair loss treatments. The procedures we list on this page are backed by peer-reviewed clinical studies. We’ve even listed those studies at the bottom of this page because we believe everyone has a right to the knowledge they need in order to make informed decisions about their treatments and care.

Hair growth injections cost about $975 to $3,000 (or more) for each treatment at our New Jersey offices. Your individual treatment plan and exact price quote will be drawn up as part of the free consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians. Our doctors require an in-person examination prior to finalizing your treatment plan, and thus your price quote, but this is a free appointment because we believe you deserve the information you need in order to make an informed decision about your cosmetic treatments.

Hair loss occurs on a continuum. For some people, hair only thins (this is very common for females), and for others, areas of complete baldness will occur if left untreated. If you are already experiencing baldness, hair transplant surgery may be your only option, at least for those areas with no active follicles remaining. For those with thinning, there are several things that you can do to stop the loss of more hair follicles and to even help you regrow the ones you’ve lost. Those are the treatments discussed above, which are nonsurgical, and are mostly focused on lasers, microneedling, injections, medications, and supplements. Those who have only seen mild hair thinning might want to start with just medications, supplements, Lasercap, and/or microneedling. These are the least expensive and least invasive treatments, and really can go a long way towards preventing continued hair loss.

Each individual patient will have a different treatment plan created by their doctor at Reflections Center. The treatment will vary depending on the needs of the patient and how much thinning of the hair has taken place. For most people, there are only three treatments done during a four-to-six-week period. We find this number decreases to just 1 or 2 sessions when certain additions are made to the injections. All patients will need to commit to maintenance treatments. For some, that will mean an injection session every year or two but for others, it will mean more frequency and consistency. Typically, those who are willing to do more daily at-home maintenance (Lasercap, medications, supplements) can avoid having injections as frequently.

Hair growth injections have undergone numerous clinical studies over the past decades. One study found a significant reduction in hair loss over the span of four injection treatments, increasing the hair count from an average of 71 hair follicular units to 93. This was performed over the course of almost three months with regular treatments every two weeks.

One of the biggest perks of the non-surgical BBL is that there’s no downtime required. You can typically go right back to your normal schedule, unlike a surgical BBL which can require extensive recovery.

We recommend avoiding alcohol and blood-thinning medications if you undergo an injectable treatment since these things can exacerbate bruising.

The safest way of enhancing the butt is through technologies like Emsculpt which don’t require any injections at all. However, by choosing an experienced cosmetic physician, you can drastically lower the risk that comes with buttock injections (because the area is very dense with blood vessels). We use technologies designed to see these blood vessels and thus avoid them during the injection process.

The most important part of BBL is allowing the transferred fat to establish a new blood supply. If this does not happen in sufficient amounts, it can impact your results.

Sculptra is widely known as the best filler for buttock enhancement because it stimulates natural collagen rather than simply providing volume. This treatment is sometimes called the Sculptra butt lift.

The most effective non-surgical treatment for enhancing the buttocks is Sculptra injections. These injections use a biocompatible, biodegradable synthetic material called poly-L-lactic acid to stimulate collagen production and increase volume.

A non-surgical butt lift, such as those using injectable fillers or radiofrequency treatments, typically lasts between 12 to 24 months, depending on the treatment type and individual factors.

Most non-surgical butt lifts involve minimal discomfort. Treatments like Sculptra injections may include localized pain, swelling, or bruising, but these are generally mild and temporary.

The number of sessions required for a non-surgical Brazilian Butt Lift (BBL) can vary, but typically, 2 to 3 sessions are needed, spaced several weeks apart, to achieve the desired volume and contour.

The effects of a non-surgical BBL, using treatments like Sculptra, can last up to two years. Results vary depending on the type of treatment used and the body’s response to the injectables.

Laser hair removal selectively concentrates light energy in the hair follicle, leaving the surrounding skin unchanged. With each session, the number of hairs growing in the treatment area declines and they can become finer and lighter. Laser hair removal can be performed on any area of the face or body in as little as 15 to 30 minutes and is faster and easier than other methods of hair removal.

Laser hair removal is great for both women and men and can target all areas of the body including the bikini line, face, neck, underarms, legs, back, and ears. Our cosmetic laser and light therapies have been designed to work safely and effectively for all skin types. At Reflections, patients of African American, Indian, Asian, Hispanic American, Mediterranean, Middle Eastern and mixed race descent can feel confident that our experienced providers are utilizing specialized long wavelength lasers such as GentleYAG, the gold standard for the treatment of dark skin, to provide safe and effective laser hair removal treatments. These long wavelength lasers are absorbed less by melanin, minimizing the risk to your skin’s pigment during laser hair removal treatment.

Patients describe the sensation of laser hair removal as similar to the snap of a rubber band. Two of our most popular lasers, the GentleLase and the GentleYAG, use a cryogen spray that precedes the laser pulse, pre-cooling the skin and making the treatment extremely comfortable. The LightSheer uses a cold plate to numb the treatment area, and in Duet mode is our fastest and most comfortable laser hair removal technology. It’s perfect for treating large areas (like a man’s back or a woman’s legs) as it takes much less time to cover the same area just as effectively as other lasers.

The FDA has cleared lasers for permanent reduction of unwanted hair, and the results are excellent. Though no one can guarantee complete and permanent removal of 100% of unwanted hair, we can assure you that laser hair removal is the most advanced and effective procedure today and patients are extremely satisfied with the results. The ideal candidate is a patient with light skin and coarse, dark hair but due to recent developments and the latest technology we can achieve great results in patients with darker skin as well. For these patients, specialized lasers must be utilized, the most advanced of which is the GentleYAG Nd:YAG laser.

Laser hair removal is tolerated quite well. Patients describe the sensation to be similar to the snap of a warm rubber band. The two most popular hair removal devices at Reflections are the Gentlelase and GentleYAG lasers. Both of these lasers use a cool, cryogen spray, which precedes the laser pulse, pre-cooling the skin and making the treatment comfortable. The Lightsheer and Starlux IPL use cold plates to numb the skin for a comfortable treatment. Patients can elect to use topical anesthetic cream if they desire, although this is normally not required. One example is called Elamax. This is available in a four to five percent formulation. It is most effective when applied 30-40 minutes prior to the procedure.

Permanent complications are quite rare from laser hair removal. Temporary skin darkening (hyperpigmentation) can occur, especially in those with darker skin tones and those with tanned skin, but this side effect is uncommon if specialized lasers for darker skin are utilized. Make sure the provider is using one of these lasers if you meet these criteria. Permanent complications are quite rare from laser hair removal. Temporary skin darkening (hyperpigmentation) can occur, especially in those with darker skin tones and those with tanned skin, but this side effect is uncommon if specialized lasers for darker skin are utilized. Make sure the provider is using one of these lasers if you meet these criteria. Hypopigmentation (lightening of skin color) is a rare complication of laser hair removal and would be more common if tanned skin was treated with a non-specialized laser. The risk of laser hair removal scars with laser or light source hair removal is quite rare. The more experienced the provider who is performing the procedure, the safer it is. Beware of physicians who just dabble in or provide laser hair removal in a gynecology or family practice offices, or just perform treatments on a sporadic basis. All of Reflections’ providers are specialized and highly experienced in laser hair removal.

All areas of the body, including face, neck, underarms, bikini line, chest, areola, legs, back, and ears can be treated. Eyebrows should not be shaped with the laser but the area in between the eyebrows can be treated.

Immediately after the procedure, the treated area may appear minimally red in color. This reaction generally subsides within minutes to hours. Ice compresses can hasten the resolution of the redness if necessary. It is not necessary to put antibacterial cream on after the procedure. Sun avoidance is strongly advised after laser hair removal.

Laser hair removal is not effective for individuals with light blond, grey or silver hair, but it can safely be performed on people of all skin types and tones, with very rare exceptions for this who have specific rare diseases.

Laser hair removal is very effective for problematic ingrown hairs.

It is preferable for hair to be short, no more than one to two millimeters (one to two day’s growth) at the time of the procedure. Hair should be clipped or shaved the day prior to the treatment, but waxing or plucking is avoided for one to two weeks prior to the treatment to enhance effectiveness. It is essential that back hair be shaved one to two days prior to treatment. In general, the shorter the hair length during the procedure, the less painful and more effective your treatments will be. Longer hair can increase the risk of certain complications, such as burns. For that reason, our providers require that you shave or clip hair very closely the day prior to your treatment.

There are several types of systems used for hair removal, and each varies in terms of cooling methods, treatment spot sizes and also comfort and treatment times. Be sure to ask about specifics of the laser or light system that will be utilized for your treatment. A facility should own several systems so they can tailor a treatment plan specific to your needs. Beware of practices that rent lasers, as this could indicate a lack of commitment to the field and lack of expertise.

Many men come to Reflections for laser hair removal. The back and shoulders are the most common area of treatment, though they also treat the chest, abdomen, ears and neck. Facial hair removal for men is also a popular option. It is important for men to have their back shaved either the day prior to, or the morning of the treatment. The goal of therapy for some guys is to thin the hair out, rather than to remove all the hair, and that can be effectively achieved with fewer treatments of laser hair removal.

Results can vary. However, laser hair treatments do not guarantee permanent hair removal.6 However, because this treatment delays future hair growth, hair will be finer and lighter in color. To learn more about projected results, please schedule a consultation today.

Skin tightening treatments typically use radiofrequency (RF) energy, ultrasound, or intense pulsed light (IPL) to deliver heat to the deeper layers of skin. This stimulates collagen and elastin production, which helps to firm and tighten loose or sagging skin.

Skin tightening can be applied to various areas of the body, including the stomach, upper arms, thighs, buttocks, love handles, back, shoulders, knees, and waist.

A series of 2 to 6 treatments may be recommended for optimal results, depending on the specific treatment and individual needs.

Most non-invasive skin tightening treatments involve little to no discomfort and can be performed in-office with no downtime.

Results appear gradually and can continue to improve in the months following treatment due to increased collagen production. However, the longevity of results can vary depending on factors such as age, lifestyle, and the specific treatment used.

We can treat your abdomen, love handles, hips, chest, and anywhere else stretch marks occur.

The degree of success with laser treatment will be impacted by your age, your skin tone, and the age of the stretch marks.

The sooner the better, as the earlier you’re treated, the more effective the treatment will be 4. Nursing mothers should complete breastfeeding before starting treatment.

You should avoid sun exposure and tanning before treatment, as having newly tanned skin can limit your options.

The number of treatments needed depends on the severity of your stretch marks5, their color (white stretch marks require more sessions to improve the skin’s texture), how long you’ve had them, your age, and the overall condition of your skin. Treatments are typically spread out over three to four weeks. Our physicians will determine the best course of treatment during your free consultation.

Stretch marks are caused by rapid skin stretching due to pregnancy, puberty, quick weight gain or loss, and certain medical conditions. They occur when collagen and elastin fibers in the skin break down during rapid growth or change.

While not all stretch marks can be prevented, you can reduce your risk by maintaining a healthy weight, staying hydrated, eating a nutrient-rich diet, and moisturizing your skin regularly. However, genetic factors also play a role in their development.

Stretch marks usually fade over time, changing from reddish or purplish to silvery white. However, they may not disappear completely without treatment.

Treatments that may help improve the appearance of stretch marks include retinoid creams, laser therapy, microdermabrasion, and platelet-rich plasma with ultrasound. However, results can vary, and no single treatment works for everyone.

Some natural remedies that may help with stretch marks include aloe vera, sugar scrubs, and hyaluronic acid. While these may help moisturize and exfoliate the skin, their effectiveness in treating stretch marks is not clinically proven for all cases.

The cost of your Thermage treatment will depend on the location and size of the treatment area but is most commonly be between $1500 and $3500. The price may also be affected if you choose to combine this treatment with additional procedures. To obtain your custom Thermage quote, you can start by contacting Reflections Center and scheduling your complimentary consultation.

The ideal candidate for this skin tightening with Thermage is a person with mild laxity of skin who is not yet a facelift candidate. These patients can consider using Thermage every three to five years to try to put off a more invasive procedure. Thermage should not be done in place of a facelift. Sometimes it is done to supplement the effects of a facelift.

Thermage is a non-invasive therapy that delivers tighter skin, renewed facial contours, and healthier collagen, sometimes referred to as the non-surgical facelift. Thermage uses patented radiofrequency technology that has been clinically proven to tighten and gently lift the skin to smooth out wrinkles and renew facial and neck contours. The incision-free procedure is fast and easy and requires no downtime from normal activities. The Thermage procedure can take anywhere from 30 minutes to an hour, depending on the size of the treatment area. Pre-treatment with topical anesthesia may be required as well. Initially, your face will be cleansed to remove any residual oils. A topical anesthetic may be applied depending on the specific treatment. We then take preoperative photos and then draw various markings on your skin to indicate which areas might need additional tightening. Much like making alterations to an article of clothing, the Thermage treatment is customized to provide the most benefit for each individual patient. A special pad will be placed on your back and you will lie on a comfortable table where a paper transfer will be used to place a grid on the areas of your face to be treated. This grid ensures complete and uniform treatment and assists in the customizing of the treatment. Some areas will require more Thermage treatments than others to achieve the desired results. With each touch of the tip, you will briefly experience a deep heating sensation as the RF energy is delivered to your skin and underlying tissue. This deep heating sensation is your indication that your collagen is reaching effective temperatures for tightening. Your doctor controls the amount of energy delivered to balance procedural comfort with maximum results. The tip is cooled before, during, and after heating to protect your skin and make the treatment more comfortable. During the treatment, you will be asked to provide feedback on the level of heating you feel from the RF pulses. This feedback allows the best selection of RF energy levels to be used and makes certain you remain comfortable throughout the procedure. Once the treatment is completed, the grid is removed.

Cellulite treatment with Thermage takes from one to two hours and is quite comfortable. No anesthesia or preparation is required for the treatment. The procedure briefly causes a deep heating sensation while the radio-frequency energy is delivered to the skin and tissue. Patient feedback helps the doctor minimize the level of discomfort while optimizing results.

The patient satisfaction rate after the Thermage cellulite procedure is high. There is a predictable improvement in the appearance of cellulite after one treatment, as well as a desirable change in the contour of the body region being treated. Patients need to know that the cellulite will improve, but usually not disappear. Patients with severe cellulite and laxity of the skin are not good candidates for this procedure.

Immediately following a Thermage procedure, your skin should feel tighter, smoother, and more youthful. Over time, you will notice additional tightening. Recently published studies conducted by Thermage show that measurable tightening improvements appear gradually over a two to six-month period after a single treatment session. The Thermage procedure causes immediate tightening of the collagen structure, with additional tightening over time. It is expected that results last for years.

The Thermage procedure has an excellent safety record. With over 190,000 estimated worldwide patient treatments to date, the reported incidence of side effects is less than 0.4 percent, and these were minor. The most frequently reported incidents are classified as swelling, redness, bumps, and blisters on or around the treated area. These side effects have usually disappeared in a few days or weeks.

Most people return to their regular activities immediately following the Thermage procedure. Some people experience mild redness (similar to a sunburn), but it usually disappears quickly. No special care is needed after Thermage treatment unless otherwise instructed by your physician.

Thermage is often used in combination with other procedures, such as Fraxel, or intense pulsed light (IPL) if other signs of skin aging are present, such as sun spots.

We price all laser hair removal treatments by the area treated, and not the laser used.This allows us to switch between and combine our lasers to best suit the patient throughout their treatments. We also offer discounted package pricing for laser hair removal. Laser hair removal starts at $150 and ranges upward. Contact us to schedule your free consultation, which will include a price quote for all of the areas you wish to treat. We price sunspot removal, vasular lesion teatment, and wrinkle reduction by the area treated, but typically treatments with this laser cost around $450 per session, making it very affordable.

The GentleLase Alexandrite is a wonderful laser, but it isn’t right for everyone in all cases. That’s why our office has over 50 different lasers, ensuring we do have a laser that will work for you and your unique situation. To learn more about alternative treatment options based on your concern (hair removal, sun spots, red or dark spots, or wrinkles), please use the links above in the section titled “What is the GentleLase used to treat?“. Contact us today to schedule your free consultation with a cosmetic physician who specializes in laser treatments!

The treatment is quite comfortable and requires no anesthesia. Patients describe the sensation to be similar to the snap of a warm rubber band. Patients can elect to use topical anesthetic cream if they desire. One example is called Ela-Max. This is available in a 4% or 5% formulation. It is most effective when applied 30 to 40 minutes prior to the procedure. Makeup can be worn after the procedure.

Ela-Max is a brand name for a cream that contains an anesthetic called lidocaine. To apply, first, clean the area with soap and warm water and gently pat dry. Then rub a thin layer of the cream into the area to be treated. Following this, apply a heavy layer of cream, as thick as icing on a cake, to the same area. This is the approach to achieve maximal anesthetic properties from the Ela-max. The Ela-Max should be applied in the office approximately 30 to 40 minutes prior to the procedure. We dont recommend using the cream on a large surface area such as the legs or back – since it can sometimes be confusing to patients how large of an area they can safely use this numbing cream on.

We don’t consider either sun spot removal or laser hair removal a downtime procedure but we also don’t advise having this done if you have a special occasion coming up in the next week or two. We can help you plan for big events to minimize these concerns – just be sure to mention these during your consultation or next appointment. Sun avoidance is advised after treatment with this laser, whether for laser hair removal or sunspot removal.

Treatment cannot be performed on tanned skin and tanning is prohibited directly after treatment. The use of a high-grade sunblock is suggested. Sun avoidance/protection is most important for the 2 weeks directly before and directly after this procedure.

Sun protection before and after your treatment is the most important step you can take to ensure your treatments are safe and effective. For those having laser hair removal, we also suggest reading our post on how to properly prepare for your treatments to maximize your results from laser hair removal. For those undergoing sun damage or brown spot removal, we may also suggest a specialized skin care routine following your treatments. Often we recommend high-quality sunscreen in addition to retinol(such as Retin-A) and/or products containing certain exfoliating acids that help to speed cell turnover within the skin, making for healthier, more youthful skin at a cellular level. Your cosmetic physician will outline a maintenance plan for preserving your results during your free consultation.

GentleLase was cleared by the FDA in 2014 for safety and efficacy in providing Permanent hair reduction on all skin types (Fitzpatrick I- VI) including tanned skin. Permanent hair reduction is defined as the long-term, stable reduction in the number of hairs re-growing when measured at 6, 9, and 12 months after the completion of a treatment regime, as well as treatment of benign pigmented lesions (sun spots and brown spots), wrinkles, and vascular lesions (such as port-wine stains, hemangiomas, telangiectasias).

Your skin will be a little pink right after treatment, but you can resume all normal activities immediately. It is recommended you avoid going in the sun without sunscreen, which you should wear at all times anyway! The majority pinkness or redness should resolve within 24 hours, though you may experience rough patches as the skin exfoliates over the next 7 to 10 days. You should take the night off from wearing makeup, to ensure makeup doesn’t enter the deeper layers of the skin through the columns of treated skin. The same goes for any skin care products, which may have unintended effects if allowed to deeply penetrate the skin. Retinoids (retinol) and corticosteroids should be avoided for 1-2 weeks before and after treatment, to avoid over-stimulation of the skin as it prepares and recovers from the laser treatment. During your consultation, the physician will cover all the details you’ll need to know to ensure your treatment is easy, quick, and produces wonderful results.

This varies for everyone, but most people see the best result after 4 to 6 treatments, spaced 2-4 weeks apart. After that, we recommend follow up treatments a few times a year to maintain your good results. These are general guidelines — we always tailor each patient’s skincare regimen to their unique needs. We do offer discounted package rates to help make the treatment regimen more affordable, and this can be financed.

No, we do not offer (nor suggest) laser treatments of any kind during pregnancy, and heres why: There has never been (and will never be, due to the immense liabilities) any study into the safety of such treatments, and so we think its best to play it safe.

Yes, Clear + Brilliant can help resurface away acne scars, when the appropriate settings are used, and multiple treatments are done.

Be gentle with your skin following clear + brilliant laser treatment. Avoid exfoliation (chemical, including retinols or exfoliating washes, and physical, such as a face brush like Clarisonic), protect your skin from sun exposure for at least 2 weeks, avoid irritating skincare products for at least 3-4 days (such as Vitamin C, Retinoids/Retinols, & Hydroquinone, etc.), and consider using a skincare regimen meant for moisturizing and replenishing post-laser skin.

There are two wavelengths that Clear and Brilliant laser uses. The 1927 nm wavelength is the most popular and improves fine lines, texture and pigmentation. The other wavelength, 1550 is used more for deep wrinkles and scars.

A typical treatment for the entire face takes about 30 minutes and is very comfortable. The Clear + Brilliant handpiece is gently guided over the treatment area, while the patented Intelligent Optical Tracking System ensures proper contact with the skin and an even application of the laser’s energy. We offer a topical numbing cream for this procedure.

Clear+Brilliant works best as a series of treatments, so that’s the first key to maximizing results. After your treatments, you’ll want to be fastidious about wearing sunscreen to protect your new skin. You’ll also want to periodically have maintenance treatments. Most patients have these once or twice a year to maintain their results.

There are many different laser options on the market, and we own well over 50 in our practice. Each does different things best. Clear + Brilliant is the best option for laser resurfacing with the least downtime for recovery. However, there are other non-laser options for skin resurfacing that also offer very little or no downtime. MicroRejuve℠ is a microneedling treatment with Hyaluronic Acid Filler and Botox which offers no-downtime smoothing of fine lines and skin texture improvement. Results from this procedure are instant and improve over time as the body grows new collagen. However, this procedure cannot target dark discoloration or skin pigment concerns the way a laser can. This treatment is very slightly more expensive than Clear+Brilliant due to the high cost of the Botox and fillers included in this treatment. Q-Switched Nd:Yag laser treatments can target pigmentation and offer skin tightening and toning results that are superior to Clear+Brilliant in a single session, with a similar downtime required. This treatment is slightly more expensive than Clear+Brilliant.

Clear and Brilliant is a gentle resurfacing laser, which can be performed every 2-4 weeks. If youre using this for rejuvenation (as opposed to preventative maintenance), it is recommended to do at monthly intervals for a total of 3-4 treatments, then biannually from there. An individual treatment plan and regimen is created during the free consultation with our laser physicians.

If you are going to exfoliate after having Clear and Brilliant laser, it should be no sooner than a few days after your treatment, and it should be gentle. Your skin will feel rough for a few days after this treatment, and thats a good sign that it is working to cause cell turnover. What you dont want to do is irritate the skin, which is already a little inflamed, because too much inflamation can lead to scarring or other bad outcomes. Please remember that scrubbing brushes, like Clarisonic, are exfoliating, and that is too much to do for at least 3-4 days after this laser, if not a week. Retinols can be restarted around day 4 or later, depending upon how sensitive your skin still feels.

Yes, but its important you do not have a recent tan or sunburn within 2 weeks before or after this treatment, or any other laser or heat-based treatment, because skin can react poorly when this occurs.

Clear and Brilliant is a gentle resurfacing laser, which can be performed every 2-4 weeks. If using this for rejuvenation, it is recommended to do at monthly intervals for a total of 3-4 treatments, then biannually from there.

Clear + Brilliant works well on all skin types, including dark and olive skin tones. This is because the laser is attracted to water within the skin, not melanin cells (cells which give skin its color).

Fraxel permanently improves skin tone and texture, as well as permanently removing sun damage, acne scars, and discoloration. However, nothing we do at our practice can prevent you from re-damaging your skin with sun damage or experiencing a relapse in skin conditions like acne, melasma, etc. (obviously no treatment can prevent future damage from occurring, but we will discuss with you how you can protect your investment with proper skincare and sun protection).

You should not exfoliate for at least 2 weeks post-fraxel laser, and until all rough skin has finished sloughing off. When you do return to exfoliation, we always recommend chemical over physical (so something like an AHA, BHA, glycolic acid, lactic acid, salicylic acid, or retinol not a scrub or scrubbing device) and go gentler than usual the first time, as your skin may be more sensitive than usual.

Yes, for fair to medium skin tones, Fraxel is the best choice for removing hyperpigmentation (dark spots), brown spots, and sun damage. It may not be the right choice for those who have melasma - which tends to have a greyish-brown tint to it. Our doctors will examine you and determine the underlying cause of your dark spots and discoloration during the free consultation, and then help you select the right treatment based on the cause, your skin type, and your preferences around budget, downtime, goals, etc.

Yes. The Fraxel Dual Restore is 1 device and the Fraxel Repair is a different CO2 laser device. Each of these devices has a few different settings that allow it to use the laser at various strengths. The Fraxel Dual Restore has 2 (dual) wavelengths of laser that can be used separately or together, for a total of 3 different treatments this particular Fraxel device can create.

Yes, if you have a history of cold sores, Fraxel can trigger an outbreak. We suggest preventative used of Valtrex prior to your appointment to reduce this risk. We discuss this risk and prevention techniques during the free consultation with our doctors.

It does - and the CO2 Repair by Fraxel provides a much more profound skin tightening result than the Fraxel Dual Restore Laser - and neither of these works nearly as well for skin tightening as the treatments that are specifically built for skin tightening, like Ulthera, Sofwave, Thermage, Exillis Ultra, etc.

No, lasers do not cause skin cancer, and in fact, lasers that help remove sun damaged skin cells can help reduce your risk of those abnormal cells developing into cancer in the future. However, what can increase your skin cancer risk is not protecting the fresh baby skin cells you grow after treatment with Fraxel from the sun. We will discuss sun protection with you at your appointment. Preventing sun damage is one of the best ways to reduce skin cancer risk, but it cannot prevent all skin cancer.

Yes! We prefer to use a different type of microneedling device to deposit the Hyaluronic Acid (filler) in the skin for permanent moisturization (we call this MicroRejuve and HA Rejuve, depending upon the style), but if you use a topical moisturizer skincare product as part of your routine at home, you can start using that again after 12 hours after your treatment.

Yes - It is not recommended to microneedle the skin more often than once a month. Your skin needs time to heal itself and when you injure skin (which microneedling does) while it is already inflamed, there is risk of scarring and pigmentation changes. One month is enough time to ensure the inflammation of the previous treatment has resolved.

You can, but we recommend you wait until your skin has healed from the microneedling first. Too much inflammation without time to heal in-between can create scarring. Always ask your doctor for clearance before resuming your at-home results-oriented treatments.

Yes, you are creating cellular level change - and youll grow new tissues that will then age (like all living tissue does). So youll always look better than if you had done nothing, but of course we cant freeze time.

You should avoid wearing makeup or applying skincare or other potential sources of bacteria to your face for the first 24 hours after microneedling.

The area treated during microneedling may have pin-point bleeding during the procedure. This depends on how much of a bleeder you are, whether youve stopped all blood thinners (including supplements like fish oil and vitamin E, advil, alcohol, etc.), and how deep your treatment is. However, that picture of Kim K that everyone seems to think of, shows her having her own blood rubbed in over top of her microneedling, and thats not a normal reaction to microneedling alone. Weve never heard of a patient experiencing bleeding after treatment, unless they have been very rough with their skin, which you should avoid at all costs.

No, microneedling is different than laser, but in general the skinpen or dermapen type of automated microneedling is going to create less of an effect in each session than a single session of any of our lasers. However, microneedling doesnt have the downtime of a laser, is safe for all skin types, and when we do a series of microneedling, you can create a similar impact at a similar price point. We offer over 70 different lasers and technologies and will be happy to compare and contrast the options that would work for your needs, so that you can choose the most convenient option for yourself - this is included during your free consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians!

In the right hands, microneedling is a very safe and effective treatment. Good results depend on the experience of the provider and the technology there are utilizing. Improper use of the devices or inexpensive, non-FDA-cleared technologies may result in bad outcomes, such as pigmentation issues or scarring. Only Skin Pen is currently FDA-Approved for Microneedling (which is different from RF Microneedling).

Collagen synthesis that is induced from microneedling is long-lasting (please note: that superficial microneedling does not reach deep enough into the skin to stimulate collagen. Deep enough microneedling to stimulate collagen is limited to physicians, ARNPs, and PAs in New Jersey - whereas nurses and aestheticians are allowed to microneedle at more superficial levels of the skin only). Patients looking to increase the amount of improvement and longevity of results combine this treatment with components from their own blood to safely and effectively rejuvenate the skin.

Yes, Microneedling works well on the neck to address both crepey texture and fine lines. It wont completely erase deeply set-in wrinkles or provide tightening that lifts on the neck - we recommend other treatments for those concerns.

Yes, but not within the first 24 hours, while microneedled channels may still be open.

Yes! We love microneedling, especially when boosted by Vampire Therapy, to improve thin, crepey skin under the eyes. If youve got a lot of fine lines under your eyes, microneedling is a great choice!

No, only lasers that treat blood vessels with help with broken capillaries. Thats either the Vbeam or a Q-Switched Laser, depending on your skin tone and blood vessel color.

No, microneedling is not a good option for sagging skin. RF Microneedling can improve skins elasticity and tighten loose skin, but microneedling alone is not going to make a visible difference for sagging neck skin.

Yes, but like all fractional therapies (which treat some fraction or percentage of the skin) in a given treatment, the improvements are incremental and dependent upon the response your body has. Generally, younger patients see a bigger response from any treatment, and microneedling is no different. The way we counter that is by doing a series of microneedling, instead of just 1 treatment, and/or augmenting it with other treatment modalities, including a few options that can boost the results from each single treatment.

It is a 20 percent solution of Aminolevulinic acid(ALA), a natural substance found throughout the human body. It is a precursor for hemoglobin synthesis. In the body, ALA is quickly synthesized into protoporphyrin IX, a photo-sensitizer that increases the skin’s reaction to the light therapy.

Skin should be free of all makeup, sunscreen, and moisturizers. Antiviral prophylaxis is initiated in patients with a history of recurrent cold sores. An acetone scrub or microdermabrasion is done. The Levulan, which is a clear painless solution, is applied to the skin and left on for 30 to 60 minutes. It is absorbed by active cells, like sebaceous glands. It is washed off with soap and water. Next, skin is exposed to a specific wavelength of light with either the Blu-U, iClearXL, Vbeam laser, IPL, or GentleWaves. This takes about eight to 15 minutes. At times, multiple lasers or light sources are sequentially used to activate the Levulan, which has been absorbed under the skin by the sebaceous glands. This combined interaction of the Levulan solution and the laser or light is what gives rise to the term \u201cphotodynamic therapy.\u201d Sunblock is applied and a hat is worn out of the office. Sun exposure needs to be avoided for 48 hours after treatment. If possible, patients should remain indoors for the first 24 hours after treatment. A minimum of SPF 40 sunblock should be worn for one week. Skin may become red with mild swelling and peeling for three to seven days. Three to five treatments are recommended at two to four-week intervals.

Following PDT, the face can appear red, followed by some flaking and peeling for several days. Rarely, some patients have a noticeable response to PDT, such as redness of their skin, or even temporary swelling of the lips and around your eyes for a few days after the treatment. Darker, pigmented patches or sunspots can temporarily darken, and then peel off over a week or so, leaving normal skin.

PDT is generally only covered by medical insurances when it is used to remove actinic keratosis, a type of pre-cancer of skin. We have not seen health insurance cover treatment for acne or acne scars, and cosmetic sun damage doesn’t meet their requirements for medical necessity. That having been said, we do not accept insurance of any kind at our practice. This allows us to significantly lower our costs to do business, since we don’t need a whole team of medical billers, and that allows us to offer PDT at a lower price than most practices. The pricing of your treatment will depend upon the type of light used and whether you purchase your treatments as a package or a la carte. Individual pricing is quoted during the free consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians. On average, PDT with Vbeam is $875 for the full face.

Most sunspots can be removed within two treatments, spaced four to eight weeks apart. Some deeper lesions will require more treatments.

The sensation during the treatment has been compared to a snap of a thin rubber band. Most patients don’t require any topical anesthesia, though it can be used if requested. After the treatment, the area will feel similar to light sunburn and the pigmented lesions will get darker and sometimes red. If one specific wavelength (532 nm) is required to remove a lesion, temporary bruising in the treatment area may be noted. The lesions may bleed slightly, crust, and flake off as well. After this clears, the skin returns to its natural color and texture. Sun exposure needs to be avoided after the treatment.

Minimal downtime is required.

Q-Switched laser treatment costs from $250 to $450 per treatment.

Q- Switched lasers can treat pigmented lesions on the face, neck, chest, and hands.

Avid sun exposure and tanning before treatment. In addition, the use of aspirin, ibuprofen, vitamin E, and St. John’s Wort should be avoided for a week before treatment.

You should wait at least 4 weeks between RF Microneedling treatments.

Treatments with Infini and Intensif are tolerated quite well. To ensure your treatment is comfortable, we utilize a topical numbing cream (lidocaine), and can offer additional numbing with injection, if desired.

Fractional RadioFrequency works to minimize your downtime and maximize the speed at which you achieve results in two ways: Fractionated Energy: \u201cfractional\u201d energy treatments deliver energy to a portion of the skin. The percentage of skin treated during Fractional Radio Frequency MicroNeedling can be adjusted during each treatment. Treating the entire skin at once would lead to a very long recovery with high risk for infection and complication (think intense chemical peels and fully ablative laser therapy). Treating a portion of the skin means the skin is able to recover quicker and keep risks and complications at a minimum. Using a series of treatments, Fractional Radio Frequency treats each cell at least once during the series. This way you can achieve the same effectiveness as an invasive treatment, with fewer risks and a shorter downtime. Minimized Damage to the skin surface: Unlike laser skin resurfacing, Fractional Radio Frequency is able to deliver the energy where its needed most, in the lower dermis, while minimizing the damage to the skin’s surface. This means you will experience the absolute minimum in visible downtime, without sacrificing results. Fractional RadioFrequency does have the potential to create bleeding, due to the microneedles. We have seen this vary from patient-to-patient. Typically bleeding is minimal and resolves immediately without any additional side effects or required action. Most patients elect to take the evening off from social activities. You should feel comfortable to return to normal social activities no later than 48 hours post-treatment, without the risk of anyone knowing you’ve had a procedure.

Fractional RadioFrequency works by causing your skin to rebuild old and damaged cells, thus the results are not immediate and depend upon the speed at which your body responds. typically, improvements are noticed 6-8 weeks after a session. Each patient typically wants to have 3 or more sessions to see significant results. However, the number of sessions recommended for your acne scars will be included in your customized treatment plan, provided during your consultation.

RF MicroNeedling is very safe. Because the energy spares the most superficial layer of the skin, most of the risks of side effects seen with aggressive lasers or deep chemical peels can be minimized or completely avoided. The two devices we use most often are the Intensif made by Endymed 3Deep and the INFINI made by Lutronic. Both have been FDA cleared for their safety and effectiveness. Infini is unique in that it insulates the tiny microneedles. This is an added safety measure to protect the very top layer of the skin, which is the area most prone to damage with laser treatments, especially in patients with darker skin. (epidemis not treated)

Generally, patients require 3-4 treatment sessions that are spaced one month apart in order to give the skin time to fully rejuvenate and rebuild its foundational matrix, restoring the skin’s texture and strength. Your initial recovery period should last no longer than 48 hours, but it’s important to allow your skin to naturally and sufficiently rebuild itself before your next treatment session. This treatment plan allows us time to measure your skin’s progress and determine whether further treatments are needed (or whether you might benefit from other treatment options in the meantime). We recommend you undergo at least 3 treatment sessions in order to see significant changes and improvements in the skin’s smoothness and texture, but this can vary based on your aesthetic goals and prior treatments. RF MicroNeedling can be a final step in an acne scar treatment process, however, which might also require other treatments prior to this procedure in order to elevate deep scars and achieve the best results for your skin. We offer a wide array of laser- and technology-based treatments for your unique skin concerns, so our experts can help you create the best treatment plan for you and your schedule during your skincare consultation.

RF Microneedling delivers radiofrequency (RF) energy through the needles. This can be only at the tips of the needles or throughout the entire length of the needle, depending on the brand of device used (we have 3 different types at our offices, so that weve always got exactly the right tool for the job). Microneedling can be performed by aestheticians and nurses, but they are limited in depth (in the state of New Jersey), meaning they may not be able to treat you deep enough for your concerns - skin tightening and scar remodeling happen in the deeper layers of the skin, whereas skin rejuvenation is more superficial. RF Microneedling devices must be performed under medical supervision of a physician because it is an involved procedure. Finally, RF Microneedling has more significant discomfort (which is why we fully numb for this), has a longer downtime, but produces much more noticeable results with each treatment than traditional microneedling.

The range of treatment settings in these two devices allow our physicians to create treatments which are safe for all skin types, including darker skin tones and skin which is prone to hyperpigmentation. This makes RF MicroNeedling a better alternative than laser skin resurfacing for the majority of patients with dark skin or skin which is prone to scarring or pigmentation. This also means those with lighter skin tones no longer have to post-pone laser therapies during the summer – Fractional RadioFrequency doesn’t have to wait for your tan to fade.

No, general anesthesia is overkill for this procedure. Typically, patients are either given a strong topical numbing cream or they are injected with lidocaine to numb the area that will be treated. Most patients do report some discomfort, but say the treatment is tolerable. In the case that you find you are experiencing discomfort, we do offer nitrous oxide (commonly referred to as laughing gas), for a pain and anxiety-free experience. None of these options in any way inhibit your ability to drive yourself home from the procedure. In general, we try to steer clear of general anesthesia because of its negative side effects and potential risks. While it does serve a great purpose in emergency medicine and general surgery, the risks are too high for something such as RF Microneedling.

RF Microneedling improves textural abnormalities, lines, acne scars, and wrinkles, whereas Laser resurfacing improves both textural issues as well as pigment abnormalities. RF Microneedling is suitable for all skin types, though some lasers really arent suitable for certain skin types. We tend to use Lasers more frequently for sun damage or general skin aging, and RF microneedling more frequently for skin tightening and acne scars.

No, RF Microneedling doesnt remove brown spots or pigmentation issues.

Yes, RF Microneedling can be safely used in those with melasma, rosacea, and acne. There is some new clinical evidence that the heat from RF Microneedling can help with active acne, too.

Yes, laser treatment can leave scars when its performed incorrectly, or when you dont follow the prescribed pre or post-treatment protocols. Our physicians who perform our laser treatments take this risk very seriously, and have a proven track-record of safe and effective treatments. However, we do regularly see patients who have scars from previous treatments done elsewhere for scar removal treatments at our office.

Yes, you can moisturize directly after a SmoothBeam Laser treatment - this is not the case with all laser treatments by any means.

You may shower, but try to avoid wetting, touching, washing, or applying makeup to your face for 12 hours after treatment with SmoothBeam.

We recommend you wait the following amount of time after a SmoothBeam treatment: 12 hours before washing your face with a gentle non-abrasive facial cleanser. You may apply moisturizer right away. You may apply makeup the day after.

Generally, you can expect redness to last for just a few hours after SmoothBeam. This is not like a laser resurfacing treatment where the skin is red and flaky for many days or weeks - instead, this laser targets your acne specifically, and so there isnt a long or difficult downtime.

SmoothBeam is a Diode laser with a 1450 wavelength. SmoothBeam was the first laser to be approved by the FDA to treat acne.

Blue light devices target surface bacteria, while SmoothBeam treats the root cause of acne, which is the sebaceous gland overproducing oil (sebum), as well as killing off some of the bacteria that causes acne breakouts.

No acne treatment is permanent - just like no fat loss is every permanent if you overeat and no facelift can stop aging forever - circumstances can cause your acne to reappear months after a successful acne treatment - or even decades later.

Thermage is a noninvasive therapy that delivers tighter skin, renewed facial contours, and healthier collagen, sometimes referred to as the non-surgical facelift. Thermage uses a patented radiofrequency technology. Thermage has been clinically proven to tighten and gently lift skin to smooth out wrinkles and renew facial and neck contours. The incision-free procedure is fast and easy, and requires no downtime from normal activities. The Thermage procedure can take from 30 minutes to an hour, depending on the size of the treatment area. Pre-treatment with topical anesthesia may be required as well. Initially, your face will be cleansed to remove any residual oils. A topical anesthetic may be applied depending on the specific treatment. We then take preoperative photos and then draw various markings on your skin to indicate which areas might need additional tightening. Much like making alterations to an article of clothing, the Thermage treatment is customized to provide the most benefit for each individual patient. A special pad will be placed on your back. This pad completes the \u201ccircuit\u201d for the RF energy. You will lie on a comfortable table and a paper transfer will be used to place a \u201cgrid\u201d on the areas of your face to be treated. This grid ensures complete and uniform treatment and assists in the customizing of the treatment. Some areas will require more \u201cpasses\u201d of the ThermaTip\u2122 than others to achieve the desired results. With each touch of the tip, you will briefly experience a deep heating sensation as the RF energy is delivered to your skin and underlying tissue. This deep heating sensation is your indication that your collagen is reaching effective temperatures for tightening. Your doctor controls the amount of energy delivered to balance procedural comfort with maximum results. The tip is cooled before, during, and after heating to protect your skin and make the treatment more comfortable. During the treatment, you will be asked to provide feedback on the level of heating you feel from the RF pulses. This feedback allows the best selection of RF energy levels to be used and makes certain you remain comfortable throughout the procedure. Once the treatment is completed, the grid is removed.

The ideal candidate for this skin tightening with Thermage is a person with mild laxity of skin who is not yet a facelift candidate. These patients can consider using Thermage every three to five years to try to put off a more invasive procedure. Thermage should not be done in place of a facelift. Sometimes it is done to supplement the effects of a facelift.

The patient satisfaction rate after the Thermage cellulite procedure is high. There is a predictable improvement in the appearance of cellulite after one treatment, as well as a desirable change in the contour of the body region being treated. Patients need to know that the cellulite will improve, but usually not disappear. Patients with severe cellulite and laxity of the skin are not good candidates for this procedure.

The Thermage procedure has an excellent safety record. With over 190,000 estimated worldwide patient treatments to date, the reported incidence of side effects is less than 0.4 percent, and these were minor. The most frequently reported incidents are classified as swelling, redness, bumps, and blisters on or around the treated area. These side effects have usually disappeared in a few days or weeks.

Thermage is often used in combination with other procedures, such as Fraxel, or intense pulsed light (IPL) if other signs of skin aging are present, such as sun spots.

Cellulite treatment with Thermage takes from one to two hours and is quite comfortable. No anesthesia or preparation is required for the treatment. The procedure briefly causes a deep heating sensation while the radio-frequency energy is delivered to the skin and tissue. Patient feedback helps the doctor minimize the level of discomfort while optimizing results.

Immediately following a Thermage procedure, your skin should feel tighter, smoother, and more youthful. Over time, you will notice additional tightening. Recently published studies conducted by Thermage show that measurable tightening improvements appear gradually over a two to six month period after a single treatment session. The Thermage procedure causes immediate tightening of the collagen structure, with additional tightening over time. It is expected that results last for years.

Most people return to their regular activities immediately following the Thermage procedure. Some people experience mild redness (similar to a sunburn), but it usually disappears quickly. No special care is needed after Thermage treatment unless otherwise instructed by your physician.

No, ThermiSmooth feels a bit like a hot stone massage, but patients rarely say they find it painful. Were you to find it painful, we do offer pronox in our offices for comfort management in procedures like Ultherapy, and this would be an option available to you.

No, we find its really only great for the eyelids. We prefer Exilis Ultra, Cellulaze, and Qwo for Cellulite.

Our specialized cosmetic physicians perform our ThermiSmooth procedures at Reflections. In New Jersey, the medical board has stated that only physicians should perform radiofrequency treatments, and we have to agree. ThermiSmooth is a very comfortable and safe procedure, in the hands of a skilled physician, but others may lack the knowledge of facial anatomy to perform the procedure safely and effectively. Our cosmetic physicians receive special hands-on training on ThermiSmooth and have the experience to ensure maximum results are achieved in each patient.

ThermiSmooth is FDA-cleared for safety and efficacy in creating targeted injury and hemeostasis at precise points in the deep skin layers, a technique known to encourage the body’s immune response through the building of new collagen. The ThermiSmooth treatment has been performed for several years, with no significant complications (beyond swelling and redness). Reflections has been performing ThermiSmooth for over 2 years, and was one of the first offices in the country to receive this device.

We are big fans of numbing cream and injections to make treatments more comfortable. But we’re happy to say, with ThermiSmooth, you won’t need, and you won’t want it. ThermiSmooth feels like a warm massage. It’s gentle and warm and relaxing. This is the perfect \u201cnewbie\u201d aesthetic treatment because of that.

ThermiSmooth does not require you to take time off from work or social engagements. It’s fairly rare, but some patients do see light swelling the day of their procedure. This swelling should resolve within 24 hours or sooner. Patients should expect to be a little red after the procedure, but this usually resolves in about an hour or so.

Most patients are good candidates for ThermiSmooth. The few who are not, are those who have pacemakers (AICDs), and those who have had dermal fillers in the treatment area (under the eye) within the past 2 weeks. (due to concerns that the ThermiSmooth could theoretically cause the dermal filler to dissolve faster).

Thanks to the use of numbing fluid in the treatment area, ThermiTight is a well-tolerated procedure.

Many people resume their normal activates a day or two after their ThermiTight skin tightening treatment, and some experience some bruising and swelling for about a week after the procedure. Like many things, this varies from patient to patient and where on your body the treatment was performed, and we’ll discuss what you can expect in particular when you come in for your complimentary ThermiTight consultation.

The best candidates for ThermiTight are people who want to delay having a major surgical procedure to correct their loose skin, but still want to see a meaningful improvement in a single treatment session. They may have tried non-invasive skin tightening treatments in the past, and are looking for a procedure that’s more powerful but doesn’t have the downtime and risks associated with surgery. We will assess your skin during your complimentary consultation to see if you’re a good candidate for ThermiTight. Many people are, but some have laxity that is beyond the reach of ThermiTight and really need a surgical solution. We’ll be upfront about this and work to pair you with the best solution for your particular needs.

The radiofrequency energy used in the ThermiTight treatment has been used in cosmetic rejuvenation devices for years and years, and has proven to be safe and reliable. Also, the energy delivered by the ThermiTight treatment wand is closely regulated by a thermistor, which ensures the optimal therapeutic temperature is being maintained during treatment. ThermiTight also features an infrared camera that allows the physician to visually monitor the temperature of the skin to make sure the treatment is even and no single area receives too much energy. Overall, the ThermiTight treatment is precise, safe, and delivers meaningful cosmetic results.

As with women, it’s important to many men to achieve great results without anyone knowing they had work done. That being said, many non-surgical skin tightening options are not as effective for men because they have thicker skin. ThermiTight can be a good option because it introduces tightening energy from inside the skin using a small incision for this reason. Conservative use of dermal fillers can also be an excellent option for sagging.

Many patients say they see an immediate benefit, but the full results of a ThermiTight treatment unfold over the weeks and months following the procedure, as the collagen-stimulating effects take hold. Most patients feel these results are worth the wait, as ThermiTight enjoys a 94 percent approval rating on Real Self.

Treatment starts when numbing fluid is gently infiltrated under the skin in the treatment area. This makes the procedure comfortable and also constricts the blood vessels to reduce the chances of bruising. Next, the physician will make a few tiny openings so that the treatment wand can be placed under the skin. These openings are very small and normally heal up and become invisible after the treatment. The wand will then be passed under the skin, heating its inner layers and stimulating your body to produce collagen, the building block of tighter, more youthful skin. Most ThermiTight treatments last about an hour. You’ll be fitted with a gentle wrap after the procedure, and, if you’ve had a body treatment, you may be advised to wear a compression garment for a week or so after the procedure to help reduce any temporary swelling.

Yes, VBeam results are permanent - but we cannot prevent your body from producing new redness (broken capillaries from sun damage, rosacea, or red scarring), unless we use some other kind of medicine to control the underlying causes. Our doctors treat the whole patient, and will recommend treatments to help you maintain your results and prevent future redness using the latest medicine.

We price our Vbeam treatments by the size of the area treated and complexity of the treatment. Typically, the price of an individual session for the face, chest, or legs is around $450-550. We do offer package discounted pricing when multiple sessions are purchased at the same time. Your complimentary consultation will include a detailed price quote for your specific treatment plans.

The Vbeam laser treatment is quite comfortable, and though no topical anesthetic is required, it may be used. The skin is protected during the treatment with a cold cryogen spray, which precedes each pulse of the laser. Most patients will experience a small amount of redness and swelling in the skin for about 24 hours after the treatment, but this should not interfere with any planned activities at home or work. No downtime is required.

No, unless theres red in the spot, VBeam wont do a good job of targeting it. Now many caucasian people do have a red tone in their sunspots (along with brown), and you will see that redness diminish, but not the brown. Fraxel Dual Restore is our favorite laser for brown spots - and there are many that do treat browns, but VBeam focuses on red (because of its wavelengths of laser light).

We generally provide a series of treatments, spaced three to four weeks apart. Depending on the nature of the condition being treated, it may require one or two treatments, or possibly more. Certain conditions, such as Rosacea, will require maintenance in the future.

One popular technique is providing a series of treatments that alternate between IPL therapy (Photofacial) and the Vbeam. Each technology has its own attributes, and when used in combination, may further enhance the results. Vbeam laser may be used in combination with the Fraxel, Portrait, Smoothbeam, BOTOX\u00ae COSMETIC and dermal fillers.

Avoid exposure to the sun and tanning of the areas that are to be treated throughout the course of treatment. Immediately following the treatment, the area may be slightly swollen, sensitive and warm, and cool compresses are helpful.

There are several things you can do to help maximize the results of your Ultherapy Uplift, but they can be broken down into these categories: Restore volume loss and prevent wrinkles in addition to lifting Most patients who are ready for a lifting procedure also have some volume loss, or natural loss of fat due to aging, and prevention of wrinkles. The most common treatment we offer for these two concerns is called a liquid facelift, and involves dermal fillers and Botox/Dysport/Xeomin injections. Fat transfer and injectable mesh can also be used, for longer-lasting results, with a slightly higher cost and recovery period.

You are able to return to your normal activities right away, and there are no special measures you need to take. Your skin may appear a bit flushed immediately after the treatment, but any redness should disappear within a few hours, and can be covered with makeup in the intermediary. It is not uncommon to experience slight swelling for a few days following the procedure or tingling/tenderness to the touch for a few weeks following the procedure, but these are mild and temporary in nature. Bruising is very unlikely to occur, but if you are on blood thinning agents or are predisposed to easy bruising, please let our office know and we will take additional precautions. Should you experience a bruise, we do offer complimentary laser treatments that will break up the bruise for a very quick recovery. Temporary numbness may occur, but is very uncommon in our experience. Your physician will review this and other less common side effects during your consultation.

The best way to ensure your Ultherapy treatment is not a painful experience, is to choose an experienced provider who speaks frankly with you about treatment comfort. Experienced and skilled providers of Ultherapy know that the treatment can be done incorrectly and painfully, and how to correctly provide a safe and effective Ultherapy treatment. They will discuss how they make sure patients are comfortable, and create a specific treatment plan for you. Our providers have a range of anesthesia, numbing, and relaxation medications available, which will allow us to create a pain management plan that can be adjusted mid-treatment if things are less comfortable than expected. Typically we find a relaxing medication and nitrous oxide are more than sufficient.

With just one treatment, the regenerative process is initiated, but the full effect will build gradually over the course of between two to three months. Some patients may benefit from more than one treatment. Visible effects include a lifting and toning of sagging skin. In the FDA clinical studies, for instance, nine out of 10 patients had a noticeable, significant lift of the brow line. This resulted in reduced skin laxity on the eyelid, and a more open, youthful look to the eyes overall. Patients reported firmer, better-fitting skin in other areas of the face and neck, as well. There is also an invisible result from the procedure with the creation of new collagen, which can help to slow down the rate of skin aging. The new collagen created by Ultherapy will endure, but as with all of the natural features of your face, will be subject to the aging process in the long term.

Ultherapy does have a reputation for being painful. There are 2 main reasons an Ultherapy treatment can become uncomfortable: 1. Your technician, or provider, may not be trained in how to properly use the device. We believe this is a main reason for the reports of painful treatments. More on this later, but for now, know that our Ultherapy treatments are provided by trained Physicians who understand how to create a comfortable (and effective) treatment. 2. Your provider may not know how to properly manage the discomfort. We have several ways to make this treatment comfortable, including relaxing medications and nitrous oxide (laughing gas). So let’s talk about how the experience and knowledge of your provider plays into your comfort. Ultherapy is concentrated ultrasound. This is a comfortable procedure when that ultrasound is concentrated in the soft tissues, where it should be, and when you are given medication to relax and manage the discomfort. What can happen, is that an inexperienced provider can concentrate the soundwaves in the wrong places, like on the bone, where it will become very painful, even with medication. Treatment pulses should not be layered in the same exact place, because there is an ideal amount of heat, and there is a level at which it becomes too much heat. This is another common user error we’ve seen from other offices and spas, and unfortunately this can cause some really bad complications.

Lasers used in Cosmetic procedures can be fractional or non-fractional (sometimes called \u201cTraditional\u201d, since this was the first style of laser to come out for resurfacing) and ablative or non-ablative. Fractional lasers treat a percentage, or fraction, of the skin in the treatment area. This fraction can range from 10% to 85%, depending on the style and brand, as well as how many passes are made over the treated area. Ablative lasers remove the top layer of the skin and usually create an open column of damage, which the body will then fill in with new cells. Non-ablative lasers create damaged columns of cells but don’t remove the surface of the skin. Rather, with non-ablative lasers, the skin repairs and replaces those damaged cells over time. Ablative lasers can allow serums and skin boosters to deeply penetrate, but also increase the risk of infection following treatment. When a laser is not fractional and is ablative, it is called \u201cfully ablative\u201d, meaning it treats the entire skin, removing its top layers. Fully ablative laser treatments should not be performed on patients with dark, tan, or olive skin tones (Fitzpatrick Skin Types III, IV, V, and Vi) because there is an increased risk of pigmentation changes and scarring.

Older laser technologies \u201cstamped\u201d the skin, using a grid of lasers that were manually aligned to fractionally treat the skin. Both the eCO2 and Fraxel Re:Pair use special technology that scans the skin as it fires the laser, to prevent any discernable grids that might cause imperfections or inconsistencies in the skin as it heals.

The Microneedles used for MicroBotox are so thin that most patients don’t feel anything during the treatment. There is also numbing fluid included in the liquid injected during the treatment. However, we can use a numbing cream if you’re concerned about the treatment being uncomfortable or are particularly sensitive.

The MicroBotox treatment uses very fine needles that are thinner than a strand of hair. It’s very rare that you would even experience pinprick bleeding from the procedure. Because of this, there’s very little downtime or recovery after the procedure. You should expect minor redness during the procedure, which should completely fade within a few minutes to 1 hour after. There should not be any swelling or bruising or other visible signs of the procedure after the redness subsides.

There’s no definitive study on the duration of results from this application of Botox, yet. However, what we’ve seen in patients points toward a similar duration to injected Botox, around 3-4 months.

Most patients that are candidates for Botox would be candidates for MicroBotox. A good candidate has no history of neuromuscular disease, no previous allergic reactions to Botox or lidocaine (please mention these to us, as we have different options available for patients with allergies), and is not pregnant or breastfeeding.

The most common area we’re treating with MicroBotox is the Cheeks, which is $500. This includes the cost of Botox. Typically when we treat the entire face, there are other components mixed into the treatment, to create a multi-purpose serum. We call this MicroRejuve, as it includes not only Botox but also dermal fillers and/or anti-aging vitamins.

Most patients see great results from just 1 treatment, that will last up to 6 months. Occasionally, when skin is very dry and wrinkled, we will recommend 2 treatments.

MicroRejuve is different from traditional microneedling in that: 1. It not only improves the texture of the skin through the direct effect on the tiny needle punctures, but it also delivers specialized products through special channels in the tiny, hollowed up microneedles directly into the skin. The additional effect of the dermal fillers and Botox under the skin is what makes MicroRejuve unique and exciting. 2. It’s able to target the exact depth of the skin we desire. This allows the products to be placed within the precise layers of the skin, where pores and fine lines are, for precise treatment of these concerns. MicroBotox uses the same applicator as MicroRejuve, but does not contain Hyaluronic Acid. It works to reduce pore size, and we often use it to calm the redness of Rosacea.

MicroRejuve is a very comfortable procedure which is performed without the need for any type of anesthesia or numbing. We expect patients to be able to return to normal activities right after the treatment.

MicroRejuve is a cost effective option because it combines several different treatment modalities in one session. We currently charge $750 for each session of MicroRejuve, which includes the cost of the Hyaluronic Acid (dermal filler), Botox, and Microneedling.

While MicroRejuve uses the same high-quality FDA-Approved Hyaluronic Acid Dermal Fillers that we inject to plump lips, lift cheeks, and fill in deep lines, you shouldn’t expect to see the same kind of changes as you would with those applications. When these fillers are injected deeper into the tissues below the skin, they can restore volume. However, with MicroRejuve, we’re placing the hyaluonic acid in very small microdroplets throughout the skin of the entire face to smooth the actual skin layer. It’s the same product used in different ways to treat different concerns. If you want to restore or add volume in your face in addition to improving skin quality, then dermal filler injections can be performed at the same time as MicroRejuve.

Botox can be safely used to treat a variety of concerns including frown lines, horizontal forehead lines and crows feet.. With MicroRejuve, we’re injecting Botox in very small quantities throughout the face to improve fine lines, contract pores and decrease redness. It will not relax muscles to prevent wrinkles the way that Botox injected into the forehead and crow’s feet does. MicroRejuve is more of a rejuvenation technique than are traditional fillers or Botox. If you’re looking to relax wrinkles in addition to improving skin quality, Botox injections can be performed at the same time as MicroRejuve.

Good candidates have mild to moderate sagging. They could probably have a facelift, necklift, or other surgical procedure, but may not be ready to undergo surgery for whatever reason. This procedure produces the best results for patients with skin of moderate thickness. Candidates are in good health and have realistic expectations for soft, natural-looking improvements.

Thread lifts gained popularity in the 1990’s and early 2000’s, but fell out of popularity due to complications with non-dissolving sutures. The problem is, your face will continue aging, and what may have been the perfect lift this year may not look natural in 10 years. That’s why all of the threads being used today are dissolving.

Silhouette Soft threads are made of Poly-L-Lactic Acid (PLLA). This is the same molecule that forms the basis of Sculptra, and just like Sculptra, as these threads dissolve, they trigger the growth of new collagen in the skin.

An InstaLift is a type of thread lift. There are many brands of threads, and most of the other types of threads are very similar in composition (PDO) and the types of results they can achieve (smoothing, firming, defining), but so far Silhouette’s InstaLift threads stand alone as the best lifting threads and the only PLLA threads FDA-approved.

There are several different named techniques for liquid facelift floating around the internet these days. The 8 Point Liquid Facelift is a formulaic approach to the liquid facelift. It outlines exactly where to inject, in what order. While it may be a good framework for teaching newbie injectors how to view the face, we don’t subscribe to a one-size-fits-all approach like this technique advocates. A One-Needle Liquid Facelift is a technique that uses a single opening to inject the dermal fillers into the lower half of the face. We try to limit the number of injection points we use, and we use cannulas like this technique does (because it helps limit swelling and bruising), but we don’t limit ourselves to a single injection point for everyone. Why? Because we care most about your results. Whether you have 1, 2, 3, or more injection points doesn’t affect your comfort during the procedure, overall risk, or the timing of the procedure. But it can affect your results. Our physician injectors are trained in all of the top injection techniques and focus on creating the most natural results. We promise you’ll be pleasantly surprised with what we’re able to achieve during your liquid facelift procedure.

You should expect some swelling and redness after your treatment. For most patients any redness resolves in a couple of hours and can be easily covered with makeup, allowing them to return to normal activities immediately after treatment. Swelling should be mild to moderate, although certain areas, like the lips, are more prone to swelling, and may stay swollen for a few days. Most patients find this swelling is mild enough that others wouldn’t notice it, and so it shouldn’t prevent you from returning to work or attending social events. Bruising is rare but possible. Activities that raise your blood pressure, such as intense workouts, can increase your risk of bruising, so we suggest you avoid this for 12 hours following treatment. Should you develop a bruise, we will happily provide you with complimentary laser treatments to help speed up the healing process. Vigorous rubbing of the treated area may negatively affect your results. Washing your face gently shouldn’t create a problem, but laying face-down in a massage chair for an hour could be problematic, so plan to avoid anything like that for at least 24 hours.

A Liquid Facelift is an injectable procedure, which is generally considered to be very comfortable by our patients. Botox injections are superficial and patients find these small pricks to be quick and easy. Filler injections are often placed deeper, but most filler products come with lidocaine numbing mixed into their formulation, which causes numbs the area as it’s being treated. On the rare occasion that we use a filler without lidocaine, or for patients who are sensitive, we can use both topical numbing creams and/or numbing injections to ensure the experience is comfortable and easy.

A vampire facelift uses platelet-rich plasma, a component of blood responsible for wound-healing and regeneration. Paired with a technique like microneedling, lasers, or fillers (which generate tiny wounds) this is an effective way to jumpstart your skin. A liquid facelift, on the other hand, simply uses dermal fillers to improve the profile of the face.

yes - if you are under 50 and your skin quality is good to moderately good, its very likely you can avoid - or at least put off - surgery using nonsurgical treatments. The worse your skin is in terms of sun damage, looseness, and/or fat weighing down on it, the more types of treatments youll likely have to combine in order to get the results youre after. For example, if youre in your 30s and just noticing some crepey skin texture, Sofwave alone might work well for you, but someone in their late 40s with a heavy, bulging neck likely needs fat dissolving (with CoolSculpting, SculpSure, or Kybella) plus skin tightening (with Ulthera, Sofwave, or ThermiTight). Once youve hit 50, you can still see results from nonsurgical treatments, but youre unlikely to be able to achieve a surgical result without surgery. Our free consultations are the perfect time to get an experienced cosmetic physicians opinion about realistic expectations from nonsurgical vs. surgical procedures.

It depends upon which treatment you choose. Liposuction removes fat cells for an instant result (now you will have swelling that comes on for a week or two afterwards, but the fat cells are gone instantly). CoolSculpting and SculpSure take about 6-12 weeks for the body to eliminate those fat cells we either froze or melted away. Kybella typically takes 4-12 weeks to dissolve away your fat, after a series of injections.

Most double chins are caused by mostly fat with mild or no skin sagging - and when thats the case, Laser Liposuction under local anesthesia with the Smartlipo PrecisionTX system gives the fastest results - with a transformation thats ready to show off around 2-4 weeks after treatment (and finalized at 6 months after treatment).

This is so common! Almost every woman starts to experience thinning in the skin in the center of junction between chin and neck in their late 30s or 40s. Typically it starts with a textural difference you can only feel. Later it will start to become visible looseness - and eventually this can become what some refer to as their turkey wattle. The degree to which this skin will change and sag depends on the individual. In some, it becomes more pronounced because surrounding skin is not as dramatically impacted.

Tightening skin can be done in 3 ways for this treatment area: 1. You can remove fat thats weighing on the skin and create a small amount of retraction using either CoolSculpting or Kybella (both of these treatments target the fat but have been shown clinically to cause a small amount of skin tightening or retraction, as well). 2. You can remove loose skin with a surgery (a neck lift or lower face lift). 3. You can stimulate the body to grow new collagen, which creates a moderate amount of tightening. Its better at tightening than lifting, so any fat must first be removed, and there are people with a level of sagging that this style of treatment simply wont be able to do much for: those with heavy skin and severe sagging. You can find more information on these types of treatments and the why of how this works and for whom below in the section about skin tightening treatments to consider.

Double chins, or fat under the chin, seem to be more due to genetic predisposition than to overall body fat percentage or weight of an individual. You may be very skinny and still have a double chin that you dont like, because it only takes a very small amount of fat in this area to change the face shape or distort the profile.

Sofwave is the newest skin tightening and firming procedure. It became available in late 2020, and weve seen it replace Thermage and most Ultherapy treatments at our practice - and at nearly half the cost, its amazing that the results are just as good or better than these older technologies!

The most effective skin tightening treatments are those that target the skin’s deep supporting collagen fiber network to cause tightening up of the existing fibers and growth of new fibers. Sofwave does this really well, as do Ulthera, Thermage, ThermiTight, and PrecisionTX. Sofwave is significantly less expensive and less painful than these other treatments, so many patients choose that route. To a lesser extent, lasers, RF Microneedling, and Exillis Ultra create tightening of the skin, but we wouldn’t class them as being the most effective. Effectiveness is of course dependent upon your skin quality. Bigger results are possible in skin that still has an intact fiber network that can tighten up, as opposed to just being able to grow new collagen in skin that’s severely lax. Severe laxity is indicated by hanging loose skin and very thin skin , especially when there are multiples of small wrinkles or folds in a row (that tends to indicate severe damage to the collagen support below that skin).

You can expect your results to last at least 1-2 years, before your aging process begins to take noticeable effect. Remember, we cant freeze time (yet!), but with Sofwave youll always look better than if you had not done anything at all.

Yes, when comparing Sofwave and Ultherapy treatments at the same depths, they are equally effective. However, Ultherapy does offer 1 deeper treatment function that targets the SMAS at 4mm, which no other treatment currently offers (these deep treatment is also why Ultherapy can be very painful).

No, both Sofwave and Ulthera are very safe. What is not so safe - and sometimes masquerades as Ulthera - is HiFu, which is a technology thats popular in Korea and makes use of ultrasound (just like Sofwave and Ulthera), but these devices are often manufactured in China, and are not FDA-Approved for safety - and we believe many of the issues people claim have been caused by Ulthera have actually been caused by these off-brand devices that are being marketed as Ulthera. Feel free to ask us questions about this - unfortunately we have treated several patients with complications after HiFU and fake Ulthera treatments.

The best candidate for Sofwave is someone with mild to moderate skin quality issues, such as fine lines, wrinkles, rough or uneven texture, and sagging.

Sofwave may leave you a little red after treatment, but this redness is simply due to the heat that was placed in your skin (and the inflammatory response weve set off that will lead to your body restoring the collagen in your skin). Some patients report a firm feeling to skin, but no visible swelling. You can easily cover both with makeup right away. You do not need to take time off work, social activities, workouts, or even red carpet appearances. Its truly a no-downtime procedure.

Yes, not only have clinical studies shown Sofwave to be effective at firming and tightening the skin, our before & after gallery shows how weve already helped many patients attain their ideal results for face lifting without surgery!

This has to do with the fees manufacturers of these treatments charge to the doctors who perform them. Each time we use our Ulthera device (or Thermage or ThermiTight), our practice has to purchase a consumable from the manufacturer. Sometimes thats a handpiece, but sometimes its simply loading a code into the machine proving we paid to perform that procedure. And Sofwaves fee-per-use is simply a lot less expensive than their competitors. So we can pass that savings on to our patients.

Sofwave and other treatments that stimulate collagen to remodel and rebuild from beneath the skin will tighten and firm the skin naturally by stimulating the skin to repair itself and act like more youthful skin.

Sofwave directs 7 high-frequency ultrasound beams through the skin to converge in a 3D grid at a depth of 1.5mm below the surface of the skin, creating a series of hot spots of targeted treatment. By not heating the surface of the skin, and not treating the entire tissue plane at 1.5mm depth, Sofwave is able to produce great results without downtime.

With Sofwave, you’re building new collagen and elastin and that process starts to peak around 4-6 weeks and continues to develop for about 3-6 months, whether you’re talking about a laser, radiofrequency, or ultrasound like Sofwave. Most patients will start to see some results around one month after treatment, though these will be small changes compared to the end result (around 12-24 weeks out).

This has to do with fees manufacturers charge to the doctors who perform them. Each time we use our Ulthera device (or Thermage or ThermiTight), our practice purchases a consumable from the manufacturer. Sometimes that’s a handpiece, or a tip but sometimes it’s simply loading a code into the machine for that one procedure. Sofwave’s fee-per-use is simply less expensive than their competitors and we can pass those savings on to our patients. Sofwave also targets multiple points with each pulse (8 to be exact), whereas Ulthera only targets 1 spot with each pulse – and that’s what makes Sofwave so much faster. There’s also a price to consider – Ulthera is more expensive (usually about 30-50% more expensive) so if you don’t need Ulthera, you’ll have a faster, more comfortable treatment at a lower price with Sofwave. If you’d like more details, check out our blog post comparing and contrasting Ulthera and Sofwave in detail.

The cost of Sofwave therapy depends on a variety of factors including your treatment needs and the number of sessions needed to achieve your intended results. During your free cosmetic consultation, our providers will give you a full cost estimate.

Sofwave is unique in that it can produce results with a single treatment. However, FDA studies have proven that many patients benefit from a second “booster” treatment 4-8 weeks after the first to further enhance results. Sofwave tends to last for 1-2 years, and our cosmetic physicians can give you a full schedule of when to return to maintain your results.

Sofwave is well tolerated. The treatment is provided after the application of topical anesthesia and no injectipons are required. You can relax and unwind in our comfortable suite during treatment and immediately return to your planned activities.

Sofwave has been cleared by the FDA and has since become one of our preferred skin tightening treatments. It has been thoroughly vetted by our knowledgeable cosmetic physicians who have decades of combined experience in practicing cosmetic medicine.

Sofwave and Morpheus8 are two completely different technologies. Morpheus8 is an RF microneedling device that can stimulate collagen by generating wounds in the skin and administering radiofrequency energy. Because of this, Morpheus8 tends to come with a slight recovery period while the skin heals. Sofwave does not require any recovery because it does not use any needles or incisions. In our experience, Sofwave is much less painful than Morpheus8 and is more specifically used for skin tightening. At our practice, the Endymed Intensif device, which also uses radiofrequency and microneedles is much better tolerated than Morpheus8.

There is virtually no aftercare needed for Sofwave. You may notice some minimal pinkness in the skin, but it can be covered with makeup immediately after treatment. We recommend wearing broad-spectrum sunscreen with at least SPF30 daily post treatment.

No. Sofwave is very safe and side effects are incredibly rare.

Because Sofwave is color blind, it can be used on any skin type, and even if the skin has some residual tan.

Sofwave can reduce wrinkles by rebuilding the supportive matrix of collagen under the skin. Sofwave tends to work for wrinkles that are caused by repetitive movements (or the same ones often treated with Botox) as well as static wrinkles, those present at rest. Sofwave can produce subtle, natural-looking wrinkle reduction versus the transformative results of a surgical facelift.

There’s no healing required after Sofwave. After treatment, the skin begins to remodel and rebuild collagen at a deep level over the course of the next several weeks. The surface of the skin remains untouched throughout Sofwave treatments.

Yes. It is common to improve a patient’s facial contours with dermal fillers before tightening the skin over these new youthful curves. It also can be performed in combination with laser resurfacing or IPL to target sun related brown spots. We call this approach, “Tighten and brighten”

Though these are both effective technologies, because Sofwave concentrates its energy more superficially than Ulthera, it is more comfortable. Its ability to limit its energy delivery to the dermis of the skin is the key to its predicatable great outcomes as that is target for laxity of the skin.

Sofwave may feel like a comfortable massage. There’s no anesthetic needed, meaning you can enjoy a relaxing and low-hassle session at our comfortable treatment suite.

Sofwave can be an effective option for jowls depending on factors like severity of your laxity. Jowls that have begun to sag too much may be better suited to another option. This may include dermal fillers, dissolving the fat of the jowls with Kybella or a face lift. Our cosmetic physicians will discuss the best option for your needs during a free consultation.

No. For patients with very loose skin and significant jowls, a facelift or necklift is often the treatment of choice. Though sofwave will still improve the skin’s elasticity, it may not be enough to meet a patient’s expectation and a surgical treatment is preferred.

Yes - there are currently 2 brands of FDA-Approved PDO Threads: Nova Threads and MINT Threads.

MINT PDO Threads are, generally speaking, a specific type of thread lift procedure. Each brand of thread lift is composed of different ingredients, is best suited to certain scenarios, and has its own list of pros and cons. At Reflections, our expert team matches each patient to the specific type of thread lift that will work best for them. We offer options including Silhouette Soft Instalift and Nova PDO Threads in addition to MINT PDO Threads.

Results from MINT PDO Threads can last up to 1 year, but most patients find they last around 6-9 months. Just like with fillers, threads are broken down by the body over time, so the duration of the result is dependent upon the type of thread used (not just the brand, but the thread style and type), where its placed (and how much stress/weight/movement its exposed to), and your metabolism.

MINT Threads are PDO threads. There are a couple different styles of threads made by this company - with each creating a different effect. MINT Threads can be used to lift the face, change features, smooth out fine lines, wrinkles, and deep folds, and tighten and firm the skin. They can be used on the face and body.

Good candidates for MINT Threads have relatively even skin texture and should not have excessively thin or thick skin. Those with thin skin may experience visible threads, especially if the threads are injected intradermally to try to spur the creation of new collagen. Now you may be thinking wait, but the lack of collagen is why my skin is thin! and thats true - thats one of the reasons we dont love threads for collagen-building, and we generally steer patients towards other procedures. Those with overly thick or heavy skin may find these threads simply arent strong enough to lift the weight of their loose skin and therefore wont be happy with the results. Finally, thread lifts in general work best for those with mild to moderate looseness. Now you can be in your late 30s or your late 60s and experience mild laxity in your skin - this is really just about how you age individually (and its something we will definitely discuss and evaluate during your free consultation), but a thread lift simply is never going to achieve what a facelift can, and its not going to be able to get a great result for everyone. But for those who really want a lift and arent going to have surgery (whether thats right now, or ever), this is the best lifting option.

Tranexamic Acid (TXA) is a particular version of the amino acid Lysine, which works within the skin to prevent melanocytes from fully forming new melanin. This is a harmless effect, but by inhibiting the skin from forming new melanin, we can stop the forming of new dark spots in patients with melasma. And now youre probably wondering how we know about this effect, given that this drug has been FDA-Approved for patients with blood and clotting disorders. Well as we have been using tranexamic acid to treat these patients since the 1980s, several of them also suffered from melasma, and reported this happy side effect of a clearer complexion. Since then, several clinical studies have shown its safe and effective use - but the pharmacuetical companies have decided not to (yet) pursue FDA-Approval (likely because each new FDA-Approval costs several million dollars to go through the process, and because there are a good deal of drugs used off-label in the way tranexamic acid is for melasma, especially when the drug has a long history of safety and efficacy, as is in this case).

It is common to prescribe Tranexamic acid for 3-6 months in melasma patients.

TA significantly reduces the recurrence rate of melasma upon discontinuation of the medicine. A good skin care regimen with carefully prescribed topical agents and laser technologies should be continued to be performed for maintenance. In addition, strict avoidance of sun exposure is suggested as well as year round full spectrum sunblock.

Most patients respond to the combination of oral tranexamic acid, topical hydroquinone and either Q switched Nd:Yag or clear and brilliant laser treatments within 3-4 weeks. Normally a total of 3-4 laser treatments are provided approximately 2-4 weeks apart (Q switched Yag interval is 2-3 weeks apart and Clear and Brilliant interval is 3-4 weeks) apart.

Theres no guarantee that tranexamic acid will work for you - and generally it has been thought of as a last resort of sorts for treating the melasma cases that are resistant to laser therapy and other medications, because it does have potential side effects, whereas laser therapy does not. Patients should not take Tranexamic acid if they have a history of venous or arterial clots, actively smoke or are taking oral contraceptive pills.

Yes, clinical study after clinical study since 2008 has shown TCA is not only one of the most effective treatments for Ice pick acne scars, but when combined with other treatments can be beneficial for rolling and atrophic acne scarring as well. Its important to see a physician who understands and provides a wide variety of acne scar treatments because TCA, like all treatments for acne scarring, is not the best choice for everyone - and can be the wrong choice for certain types of people and scars.

TCA may itch a little, but it isnt painful at all.

Yes, TCA Cross are permanent - and we know patients love to make smart investments in procedures that provide permanent results, especially when theyre relatively inexpensive, as TCA Cross is.

TCA Cross is a treatment where a very strong chemical acid peel, Trichloroacetic acid (TCA), to Chemically Reconstruct of Scarred Skin (CROSS). During this treatment, we apply TCA into ice pick scars or enlarged pores, causing the body to grow new skin in that area, closing in those deep indentations. The procedure is relatively painless, fast, cost-effective, and results are permanent.

The strength for TCA used in TCA Cross technique varies - but we generally use between 50-100% is what has been used and studied clinically. Please note that TCA is most effective for Ice Pick Scars, but studies have shown that other types of acne scars respond better to different therapies.

TCA Cross creates frosting and redness for 3-8 days, followed by flaking and peeling for an additional 3-21 days. The stronger the TCA used in your treatment, the longer the downtime - your doctor will advise you specifically what you can expect after your treatment.

We charge $300 - 500 per treatment on average, with the pricing reflecting the number of scars being treated. Most patients will need a minimum of 3 treatments to achieve their desired goals, but can sometimes need up to 6 or more. It all depends upon the depth and severity of your scarring and the reaction of your body to the TCA.

Most patients notice visible, long-term results after their first treatment session with the eCo2 Laser by Lutronic, but this can depend on how aggressive your treatment is and what aesthetic goals you’re aiming for. This laser system provides many different options for many different skin conditions, meaning it can be customized to your unique skin needs, whether that be a gentle, surface-level treatment or a severe one. Our professional providers can determine the best treatment package for you and your aesthetic goals, which might include other, professionally-recommended treatment options to provide a multi-faceted approach to your skin concerns. This can be especially effective because this treatment offers superior recovery periods versus similar techniques, meaning you can get back to your schedule and your treatment regimen sooner. You can pursue this procedure as a standalone treatment that can produce excellent results that can continue to emerge up to 12 months after your session— however, you can also repeat this treatment if you and your aesthetician decide you would benefit from a schedule of multiple sessions. We recommend that you schedule your treatments according to your aesthetician’s recommended treatment plan in order to allow your skin sufficient time to rest and recover.

Treating under eye wrinkles in a way that creates natural results requires first understanding the cause of the wrinkles - Is it a loss of volume? Is it too much volume (caused by herniated fat pads)? Is it caused by poor skin quality (crepey skin with lots of tiny wrinkles)? - Once you understand the cause, then you can get rid of under eye wrinkles by treating the source of the problem - whether thats removing excess skin, tightening and restoring the quality of the skin, restoring loss volume - or, more typically, some combination of those 3.

Your under eyes are just not set up to age well, compared to other parts of the body. 1. Skin is thin there and it is less resilient to damage from swelling (allergies, puffiness) 2. Fat under the eyes typically starts to disappear earlier here than from other spots on the face, so hollowness here often stands out on a young face, or is much worse here than other places on the aging face 3. This area tends to swell and hold onto water, with illnesses, allergies, or even just lack of sleep - and all that changing in volume stretches out and damages the skin in a way that becomes irrepairable over time.

When done properly, filler under the eyes should restore volume thats been lost over time. Our physician injectors use specific types of filler under the eyes that swell much less than other options, and this allows us to be very precise in the amount placed, to ensure we do not over-fill the area. When following this type of technique, it should not stretch the skin. Very rarely, we have seen patients who have been injected elsewhere, where skin may have been stretched as a result of overfilling. In this case, we can dissolve the excess filler and perform a nonsurgical skin tightening treatment to try to restore skin tightness and quality.

We recommend collagen-induction techniques to firm and improve under eye skin. Which treatments induce you to build new collagen and repair old, damaged collagen? Lasers that reach deep into the skin, like Fraxel and CO2 lasers RF Microneedling (regular microneedling generally doesnt reach low enough, and you really want that deposit of thermal energy with the Radiofrequency) - we like to augment this with plasma therapy to speed up healing and improve results Microfat and plasma therapy are very helpful to improve skin quality and rebuild skin from the inside out, using your own bodys power, so its completely natural and as long-lasting as possible Non-Invasive Skin Tightening procedures, which work by inducing the skin to repair and rebuild collagen, including ThermiSmooth, iFine, Sofwave, Thermage, and Ulthera.

Yes, thread lifts create profound immediate changes to the face - thats why its important to see a skilled physician for this treatment!

Yes, threads can be removed, even immediately after being placed. They will also dissolve (at least the PDO (Nova, MINT) and PLA (silhouette Instalift) ones do) on their own in about a period of 1-2 years.

PDO Threads create instant results, which is one reason our patients love them!

Laser hair removal should not be a painful experience. However, it may cause mild discomfort for those with sensitive skin. Many described it as feeling similar to a rubber band snap. We will offer topical numbing cream before the treatment to ensure you are comfortable during your laser hair removal treatment.

The laser hair removal treatment process on the face is the same as on any other area of the body. The laser light is targeted at the treatment area, damaging hair follicles. After treatment, swelling and redness may occur for a few hours.

A series of treatments is generally needed to achieve the desired results. Our team will discuss the number of treatment sessions required once a personalized treatment plan is created.

Laser hair removal can significantly reduce hair growth, but maintenance treatments are necessary for some. Periodic touch-up sessions yearly can help to manage regrowth.

Treatment time may vary, though glacial treatments can be relatively quick compared to larger treatment areas. Generally, smaller areas like the upper lip or chin may only take 5-15 minutes to complete.

No, a liquid facelift does not require surgery. This procedure uses injectable treatments, such as dermal fillers and neuromodulators, to restore volume, reduce wrinkles, and lift facial features without invasive techniques.

Most patients experience minimal discomfort during a liquid facelift. The treatment typically causes a mild stinging sensation, and any post-treatment tenderness or swelling usually subsides within a few days.

Typically, one liquid facelift treatment can provide noticeable results, although touch-up sessions may be recommended depending on your aesthetic goals.

A liquid facelift addresses various signs of aging, including volume loss, fine lines, and sagging. It helps lift and contour areas like the cheeks, jawline, and under-eye regions, resulting in a youthful appearance.

Results from a liquid facelift typically last between 6 and 18 months, depending on the types of fillers or neuromodulators used and individual factors like metabolism and lifestyle.

At Reflections, we price our dermal fillers and Botox, the FDA-approved products used to achieve youthful facial contours, by the amount used. For Botox, that’s $17 per unit, with most patients using between 15-45 units. For dermal fillers, we price by the syringe, starting at $650 a syringe. Most liquid facelifts range between $2,500 – 3,500 at our New Jersey office locations. You’ll receive a quote on your exact pricing based on your individual needs and wants during your free consultation with the doctor. We also offer financing options for all our procedures, as well as an exclusive Reflections Rewards Plus program, which will allow you to enjoy loyalty savings on your treatments at either of our offices.

You should expect some swelling and redness after your treatment. For most patients any redness resolves in a couple of hours and can be easily covered with makeup, allowing people to return to normal activities immediately after treatment. Swelling should be mild to moderate, although certain areas, like the lips, are more prone to swelling, and may stay swollen for a few days. Most patients find this swelling is mild enough that others wouldn’t notice it, and so it shouldn’t prevent you from returning to work or attending social events. Bruising is rare but possible. Activities that raise your blood pressure, such as intense workouts, can increase your risk of bruising, so we suggest you avoid this for 12 hours following treatment. Should you develop a bruise, we will happily provide you with complimentary laser treatments to help speed up the healing process. Vigorous rubbing of the treated area may negatively affect your results. Washing your face gently shouldn’t create a problem, but laying face-down in a massage chair for an hour could be problematic, so plan to avoid anything like that for at least 24 hours.

A liquid facelift is a minimally invasive injectable procedure that is generally considered to be very comfortable by our patients. Botox injections are superficial and patients find these small pricks to be quick and easy. Filler injections are often placed deeper, but most filler products come with lidocaine, a local anesthetic, mixed into their formulation, which numbs the area as it’s being treated. On the rare occasion that we use a filler without lidocaine, or for patients who are sensitive to treatment, we can use both topical numbing creams and lidocaine injections to ensure the experience is comfortable.

There are several different named techniques for liquid facelift floating around the internet these days. The 8 Point Facelift is a formulaic approach to the liquid facelift. It outlines exactly where to inject, in what order. While it may be a good framework for teaching newbie injectors how to view the face, we don’t subscribe to a one-size-fits-all approach like this technique advocates. A One-Needle Liquid Facelift is a technique that uses a single opening to inject the dermal fillers beneath the skin throughout the lower half of the face. We try to limit the number of injection points we use, and we use cannulas like this technique does (because it helps limit swelling and bruising), but we don’t limit ourselves to a single injection point for everyone. Why? Because we care most about your results. Whether you have one, two, or more injection points doesn’t affect your comfort during the procedure, overall risk, or the timing of the procedure. Our physician injectors are trained in all of the top injection techniques and focus on creating the most natural results. We promise you’ll be pleasantly surprised with what we’re able to achieve during your liquid facelift procedure.

A vampire facelift uses platelet-rich plasma, a component of blood responsible for wound-healing and regeneration, to help patients look younger with regenerated skin. Paired with a technique like microneedling, lasers, or fillers, a vampire facelift is an effective way to jumpstart your skin’s natural healing and re-growth process. A liquid facelift, on the other hand, simply uses dermal fillers to improve the profile of the face.

Acne scars from icepick to boxcar to rolling types form when an acne breakout triggers the body’s inflammatory response to the point where collagen, one of the building blocks of the skin, thickens and becomes deformed. This damage can also be brought on or made worse by the picking, squeezing, and popping that often accompanies active acne. Laser treatments stimulate the production of new collagen, smoothing out your skin, and restoring its appearance and texture. The effectiveness of your treatment lies in choosing the laser that is right for your skin type and the nature of your scars. The experienced physicians at Reflections have assembled the most advanced lasers in the world for treating acne scars. With more choices than any other facility in the state, our doctors can tailor a treatment to your individual needs, your budget, and your ability for downtime.

Laser or light therapy treatments are typically used in conjunction with topical and oral medications. Most of these treatments require only topical anesthesia, and typically you can go right back to work or school shortly after the treatment. Our highly skilled physicians limit their practice exclusively to cosmetic medicine and conduct treatments in our comfortable state of the art office. We will customize your treatment plan for your type of acne scars and skin and will most likely include a series of laser or light treatments conducted over three to six months.

Dermal fillers such as Restylane, Juvederm, and Radiesse, which are the tools of choice to enhance facial volume and fill in deep lines, can also be injected under the skin to stretch and fill out certain types of superficial and deep soft acne scars. Cosmetic benefits from filler injection are long-lasting. When indicated, dermal fillers can be performed in conjunction with laser treatments for optimal results. At Reflections, we blend lidocaine into all of our dermal fillers for the most comfortable treatment experience possible.

Ultimately, the best treatment for acne scars depends on the type and severity of the scars. Common treatments may include subcision, radiofrequency energy, laser therapy, microneedling, dermal fillers, fat transfer, and surgical excision.

Boxcar and ice pick acne scars are often considered the most difficult to treat. Boxcar scars are wide depressions with sharply defined edges, while ice pick scars are deep, narrow scars. They can be challenging to address due to their depth and need for specialized treatment techniques. Thankfully, our team has the skills and technology to effectively treat both of these types of scars.

Popping or picking at your pimples can increase your risk of developing acne scars. This is because, when you pick or squeeze a pimple, you can cause damage to the surrounding skin, resulting in inflammation and scarring.

The number of acne scar removal treatments will ultimately depend on factors such as the severity of the scars, the treatment method, and your skin’s individual response. Our team will create a personalized treatment plan based on your skincare needs.

Following acne scar removal treatment, it is important to follow a skincare routine to maintain results and prevent new scars from forming. This may include using gentle cleansers, applying sunscreen daily, avoiding picking at any new pimples, and following up with a dermatologist for regular skin evaluations.

Acne lesions range in severity from blackheads and whiteheads to nodules and cysts: Mild Acne: generally hormone-related, causing rare, mild breakouts that don’t leave scarring and don’t interfere with life in any way. Moderate Acne: may include papules, inflamed lesions that appear as small, reddish, or pinkish bumps that can be sensitive to touch, or pustules, inflamed, white-centered bumps that can be red at the base. Severe Acne: characterized by nodules, large, painful, solid lesions that appear as lumps under the skin, and cysts, deep, inflamed, pus-filled lesions that can be very painful; both are inflammatory and may cause scarring.

Yes, many of our adult patients suffer from acne, but at Reflections we know that to our teenage patients, living with acne can be particularly devastating. Teens with acne can be so self-conscious and embarrassed about their condition that they may withdraw socially. Acne can leave a deep and lasting emotional impact on a teenager. Parents who help their children gain control of acne will set them up for long-term success in managing it. At Reflections, we love finding treatment for our younger patients that transforms the way they look and positively impacts their lives.

As with any form of aesthetic treatment, there are some risks associated with acne treatment including dryness and irritation of the skin, increased sensitivity to sunlight, and changes in skin pigmentation. Our team of board-certified physicians will discuss these risks with you prior to treatment and take all precautions to mitigate these risks.

There are several factors that can make acne worse, including hormonal fluctuations, certain medications, stress, diet, and certain skin care products. To reduce exacerbating your acne, take note of these factors and which ones affect you, and make a treatment plan with your skin health specialist.

Yes, there is always the risk of acne returning. This is especially true if underlying causes include hormonal imbalances or genetic factors. Improper skincare habits or discontinuation of maintenance treatments may also cause acne to return.

Yes, long-term maintenance is often required following acne treatment to maintain results. This may include following a personalized skincare routine, using sunscreen daily, avoiding triggers that you know worsen your acne, and regularly visiting your dermatologist for adjustments to your treatment plan as needed.

No, not all acne is the same. There are various forms of acne, including whiteheads, blackheads, papules, pustules, nodules, cysts, and acne conglobata. Our team will work with you to create a personalized treatment plan to address your acne.

Our most popular treatment, by far, is our customized medical facial offering. This offers great results for anyone with acne, sensitive skin, or skin that tends to get congested or is difficult to exfoliate at home on your own. A customized facial allows our aesthetician to do some of the heavy lifting of regular skin maintenance, and it’s a relaxing, enjoyable experience, too!

We charge between $50 and $130 for our facials typically, and the pricing depends upon the size of the area being treated and the techniques and tools being used.

Ask our aestheticians for recommendations on skincare and daily care of your skin, as well as recommendations for which doctor to see for a free consultation for any bigger concerns that might require treatments. Robin has been a core member of our team for over 20 years now – so she has the inside scoop on nearly everything at our practice!

Our aesthetician provides basic skincare as well as light treatments at a lower cost than our doctors could. This helps keep the cost of anti-aging maintenance under control for our patients.

Aesthetic services involve a range of treatments and procedures meant to enhance a person’s physical appearance. These services are provided by licensed professionals such as estheticians, plastic surgeons, or dermatologists.

The terms “esthetician” and “aesthetician” are often used interchangeably and refer to professionals trained in skincare and beauty treatments. However, the difference can vary based on regional preferences or industry standards. In general, both estheticians and aestheticians perform similar services. The choice of terminology may depend on factors such as licensing requirements or professional associations in a specific area.

Aestheticians typically undergo formal training and education in skincare, beauty treatments, and related procedures. The qualifications and requirements for becoming an aesthetician can vary by region or country.

There are several reasons why you may consider seeing an aesthetician, including to receive personalized skincare recommendations, professional skincare treatments, expert advice and guidance regarding your skin, and for self-care.

The level of discomfort or pain experienced during aesthetic services can vary depending on the specific treatment or procedure. Aestheticians take measures to ensure your comfort during treatments, such as using numbing creams, adjusting treatment settings, or providing post-procedure care instructions to minimize any discomfort.

Depending on how your skin naturally reacts, you may have some redness and irritation, spanning from a few hours to the rest of the day. The day after your treatment, your skin should be back to its normal appearance (although hydrated, glowing, and healthy).

This can depend on your concerns and treatment goals. You can see improvement in your skin’s overall luminosity and hydration with a single treatment, but for deeper concerns such as pigmentation or aging, you’ll need multiple treatment sessions.

Wear sunscreen daily and avoid harsh skin products for the first week after treatment. Additionally, make sure to return for regular treatments according to your schedule.

The HydraFacial is one of our most requested technologies here at Reflections Center. We implement it as part of our own skincare routines and recommend it to anyone looking to maintain good skin health and look a little more radiant.

The HydraFacial can cause purging, especially if your skin is sensitive to exfoliation or breakouts. Our cosmetic physicians can help you prepare to combat purging after your treatment or recommend alternatives.

Laser hair removal selectively concentrates light energy in the hair follicle, leaving the surrounding skin unchanged. With each session, the number of hairs growing in the treatment area declines and they can become finer and lighter. Laser hair removal can be performed on any area of the face or body in as little as 15 to 30 minutes and is faster and easier than other methods of hair removal.

Laser hair removal is great for both women and men and can target all areas of the body including the bikini line, face, neck, underarms, legs, back, and ears. Our cosmetic laser and light therapies have been designed to work safely and effectively for all skin types. At Reflections, patients of African American, Indian, Asian, Hispanic American, Mediterranean, Middle Eastern and mixed race descent can feel confident that our experienced providers are utilizing specialized long wavelength lasers such as GentleYAG, the gold standard for the treatment of dark skin, to provide safe and effective laser hair removal treatments. These long wavelength lasers are absorbed less by melanin, minimizing the risk to your skin’s pigment during laser hair removal treatment.

Patients describe the sensation of laser hair removal as similar to the snap of a rubber band. Two of our most popular lasers, the GentleLase and the GentleYAG, use a cryogen spray that precedes the laser pulse, pre-cooling the skin and making the treatment extremely comfortable. The LightSheer uses a cold plate to numb the treatment area, and in Duet mode is our fastest and most comfortable laser hair removal technology. It’s perfect for treating large areas (like a man’s back or a woman’s legs) as it takes much less time to cover the same area just as effectively as other lasers.

Laser hair removal should not be a painful experience. However, it may cause mild discomfort for those with sensitive skin. Many described it as feeling similar to a rubber band snap. We will offer topical numbing cream before the treatment to ensure you are comfortable during your laser hair removal treatment.

The laser hair removal treatment process on the face is the same as on any other area of the body. The laser light is targeted at the treatment area, damaging hair follicles. After treatment, swelling and redness may occur for a few hours.

A series of treatments is generally needed to achieve the desired results. Our team will discuss the number of treatment sessions required once a personalized treatment plan is created.

Laser hair removal can significantly reduce hair growth, but maintenance treatments are necessary for some. Periodic touch-up sessions yearly can help to manage regrowth.

Treatment time may vary, though glacial treatments can be relatively quick compared to larger treatment areas. Generally, smaller areas like the upper lip or chin may only take 5-15 minutes to complete.

The removal process typically requires multiple sessions over several months to a year, depending on the type and depth of the pigment.

The primary methods for permanent makeup removal are laser removal and saline removal. Both techniques can be used to gradually fade and lighten saturated permanent makeup.

While the process can be uncomfortable, both laser and saline removal methods are designed to minimize pain. However, individual experiences may vary.

Potential risks include infection, allergic reactions, scarring, and color changes. It’s crucial to choose a qualified professional to minimize these risks.

Yes, both laser and saline removal techniques can be used to remove various types of permanent makeup, including eyebrow tattoos, eyeliner tattoos, lip blush, and scalp micropigmentation.

The best way to remove permanent makeup is with laser removal that targets the pigmented ink of your permanent makeup. This is called laser tattoo removal. It can be safe and effective, provided it is performed by a physician who specializes in this niche of tattoo removal.

You will need to remove it with a laser. Only lasers can selectively target specific colors to break up the ink without damaging your skin. Permanent makeup uses different inks than traditional tattoos, and permanent makeup artists use various techniques. This lack of standardization, along with a few ingredients commonly used to create a brown pigment that can react poorly to lasers (causing them to scar in place or become black in color) makes permanent makeup removal one of the most complex laser procedures on the market today.

Like permanent makeup, semi-permanent makeup requires a series of laser removal treatments to be removed.

Microneedling will not remove permanent makeup. It might push pigment deeper or cause pigment to move within the skin, creating an undesirable look (which is why it is not recommended). However, if you want to remove permanent makeup, lasers are really the tool of choice because lasers can selectively target specific colors without targeting others – allowing us to break down the ink without breaking down your skin.

At-home lasers are not recommended because they do not have the same energy levels as the picosecond lasers used by doctors. Tattoo removal creams also exist, but lead to complications and scarring more frequently than they do great results for removing ink.

As with women, it’s important to many men to achieve great results without anyone knowing they had work done. That being said, many non-surgical skin tightening options are not as effective for men because they have thicker skin. ThermiTight can be a good option because it introduces tightening energy from inside the skin using a small incision for this reason. Conservative use of dermal fillers can also be an excellent option for sagging.

The most effective non-surgical skin tightening treatments for the face include ultrasound therapy (like Ultherapy), radiofrequency (RF) treatments, and laser skin tightening. These treatments use different types of energy to stimulate collagen production and tighten the skin.

The duration of results varies depending on the treatment type and individual factors. Generally, results from non-surgical skin tightening treatments can last anywhere from 1 to 3 years. Maintaining a good skincare routine can help prolong the effects.

Most non-surgical skin tightening treatments have little to no downtime. Patients can typically return to their normal activities immediately after the procedure, although some redness and swelling may occur temporarily.

The number of treatments required varies depending on the specific procedure and individual needs. Some treatments may show results after a single session, while others may require a series of 2 to 6 treatments for optimal results.

Yes, skin tightening treatments can target specific areas of the face. For example, ultrasound therapy can be used to tighten the brow, eye area, lower face, and neck. Radiofrequency treatments can also be customized to address particular areas of concern on the face.

The cheeks first start to sag for women as they lose fat volume in the apple of their cheeks (or the section of their cheekbone area closest to the nose). This is a very normal aspect of aging that all women experience – usually between ages 33 and 50. During this same time period, skin loses some of its firmness and elasticity due to collagen loss, making the skin more likely to develop fine lines and wrinkles, and a droopy appearance. Finally, we lose bone mass as we age, and our muscles often sag with gravity in our faces – these changes are usually visible further down the aging process, in the late 40’s to mid-60’s.

Many women notice their cheeks flatten in their mid-to-late 30’s. As the cheek deflates it starts to sag, and this will worsen if left untreated. By your late 40’s, most women have early jowling, which occurs because of volume loss in the cheek above (which is why cheek filler can actually remove jowls for women in their 40’s and 50’s).

It can be, if it’s done with fat transfer. It’s not permanent if it’s done with Hyaluronic Acid fillers, like Voluma or Lyft, or even if it’s done with more permanent fillers, like Sculptra or Radiesse, which do eventually fade over many years to decades. Fat transfer is the surgical removal of fat from one part of your body, and transfer to another. In this treatment, we usually take fat from your midsection, and a plastic surgeon uses it to precisely fill and sculpt your face, for a very natural and permanent result.

The best we can do is offer you some information about the price ranges to expect, because each patient’s treatment is unique, and thus the cost does vary. We provide an exact treatment plan and pricing during the free consultation, though, so you will have that information before you decide to undergo a procedure with us. You can do your treatment the same day, or schedule it for another date in the future. Radiesse is $750 per syringe, with most patients needing just 1 or 2 syringes for their chin. Voluma is $1,000 per syringe, with most patients using between 1 and 4 syringes of Voluma for their chin. Refyne and Defyne are each $750 per syringe, with most patients using 1 or 2 syringes of these for their chin.

No, we can make this procedure very comfortable, and we do that by providing our patients with a variety of numbing options.

Yes! Most people can safely have chin fillers. To find out if a specific procedure is right for you, please contact us to schedule a free consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians.

Getting rid of hyaluronic acid (HA) fillers is fairly easy – we just inject hyaluronidase or hyalenex into the treated area, and they will dissolve the filler. There are 3 popular non-HA options: Radiesse, Belotero, and Sculptra. Generally, Sculptra and Belotero Bellafill aren’t used in the chin. Belotero Bellafill cannot be dissolved or removed, and for that reason, we don’t use it very much at all at our practice because your face changes so much as you age and it generally ends up looking unnatural over time. Sculptra is very rarely used in the chin for augmentation, but both Sculptra and Radiesse can theoretically be at least partially dissolved, though it’s less of a guarantee than an HA filler and generally a slower process.

Dermal fillers for your chin could start at $750 and range upwards of $4,000. The total cost depends on which types of filler you have and how many syringes of each.

Chin filler is very long-lasting but the duration varies based on the individual’s metabolism, the product used, and the depth that product was placed at. Generally, Voluma or Lyft will last around 2 years. Radiesse lasts 1 year or longer. And Refyne or Defyne last around 1 year in the more superficial contours like the pre-jowl sulcus.

No, the fillers we use these days aren’t permanent, and that’s a good thing because it’s unlikely that filler placed today would look natural in 10 years if it stayed exactly the same, because so much changes about our faces as we age.

You can expect redness and point bleeding at the injection sites, numbness in the actual injected area that will last a few hours, and very mild swelling (often described as tightness or firmness) that you feel but others would not likely notice. Bruising can occur but is usually very mild and small (yellow or greenish cast, not deep in color or large in area).

Ideal candidates for the Dermapen are men and women who are looking to naturally address certain skin imperfections such as wrinkles, facial lines, and scars. Unlike certain skin enhancing treatments, this device can be used for all skin types to provide rejuvenating results. In general, this treatment is great for treating skin imperfections on just about anyone. To find out if you are a candidate, please contact Reflections Center and schedule a free consultation with the doctor.

In general, for light treatments, the sensation can be compared to that of a tingling, tickling sensation. Deeper treatments are still comfortable, but we recommend opting for a topical anesthetic.

We use a topical anesthetic for our Dermapen patients. Before the treatment begins, the physician will apply a topical anesthetic to the treatment area to help to prevent the patient from feeling any discomfort. This will numb the area for the duration of the treatment. Often, patients have reported that the treatment is very tolerable and the numbing cream is not necessary.

Once the treatment has been completed, the skin will begin to repair itself almost immediately; however, this natural process will take a few weeks to a month to be able to notice the results. Individualized post-treatment instructions will be provided before the patient leaves our office. The treated region will remain red and slightly inflamed for the first few days after the skin enhancing procedure; however, this is entirely normal and will subside on its own. The skin will be sensitive to the touch, like that of a sunburn. It is essential to keep the region clean and hydrated for the best recovery and results. Makeup should not be applied to the skin for at least 12 hours after the Dermapen session. Makeup should not be applied to the skin for at least 12 hours after the Dermapen session.

The cost of the Dermapen treatment will vary from patient to patient depending on the depth of treatment that is required. There are 3 depths – the most superficial of which is performed by a nurse or aesthetician. Typically, for a full face treatment with the nurse or aesthetician, Dermapen is $250-300. For full face treatment with a deeper setting, the price typically ranges from $450-500. This is purposeful, because we want our patients to get the best results possible, and this is typically how we’re able to achieve those results. It’s also why we caution patients strongly against treatment with Dermapen at spas and salons. Once you come into Reflections Center for a consultation with one of our talented physicians, you will be given a custom quote based on your condition and what you are looking to achieve.

For the Dermapen treatment, our physicians recommend receiving multiple treatments to achieve optimal skin enhancing results. Although the skin will improve after only one session, it is advised to undergo several Dermapen treatments for further skin rejuvenation. It is recommended to receive 4-6 treatments, each spaced about a month apart from each other. During the consultation with one of our physicians, they will be able to assess your case better and recommend the number of treatments you should receive.

The results of the Dermapen treatment are not immediate but they are long-lasting. Most patients have reported that their results lasted anywhere from six months to one year before seeking additional treatment for skin maintenance. The longevity of the results will vary depending on the patient, how quickly their skin degenerates with age, and the particular conditions treated. Typically, our patients receive the recommended 4-6 treatments and after about one year they will receiving one treatment every six months to maintain the results.

The Fraxel Re:Pair is a CO2 laser while the standard Fraxel Re:Store is an erbium laser.The Fraxel Re:Pair usually requires only one treatment while the Fraxel Re:Store Dual requires a series of three to five treatments. The Fraxel Re:Pair is a more aggressive approach of tightening and resurfacing the skin, yielding superior results in the treatment of lines, wrinkles, and laxity. This is because it actually vaporizes tissue, thereby removing old, damaged skin and allowing for new collagen formation. However, the downtime of the Fraxel Re:Pair is more considerable than the Re:Store. Both Fraxel lasers are state-of-the-art devices, each with their own advantages and set of indications. The physicians of Reflections own and utilize both Fraxel lasers and can help you decide which laser is most appropriate for you.

The benefits include smoother, fresher, younger, tighter appearing skin with fewer lines and wrinkles and a more even tone and color. The benefits continue to improve for several months.

Fraxel Re:Pair can be used on the face, neck, chest, hands, arms, and other areas that the doctor may determine appropriate. Eyelids can also be treated with this technology. The Fraxel Re:Pair CO2 laser is especially well-suited to smoothing out the vertical wrinkles that appear around the mouth, sometimes called “lip lines” and the horizontal “necklace” lines that form in the neck.

The new micro-peel option with this laser offers almost no downtime whatsoever. Patients experience a sunburn-like redness for up to a couple of weeks, but they miss a lot of the peeling, sensitivity, and other long-term recovery that CO2 lasers traditionally require. There is a minor tradeoff in results, and for that reason, some patients still do elect to do the more aggressive traditional Re:Pair treatment. We, of course, offer both.

Most patients experience a sunburn type sensation following the treatment, which can last for 90 minutes. The skin will be swollen for a few days and redness is expected. These are completely normal signs and reflect the healing process that is underway. Minor itching, oozing, crusting, dry skin, peeling, or flaking are other normal signs you might experience. These effects may vary in intensity and duration depending on your skin’s healing characteristics and the aggressiveness of your treatment. Moisturizers are helpful post-treatment and the use of sunscreen (30-60 SPF sunblock) is very important.

We typically recommend a series of 3-4 treatments, spaced about a month apart.

We offer Starlux IPL treatments at both of our office locations, in the Martinsville section of Bridgewater, NJ, and Livingston, NJ. At our offices, IPL treatments range from $300 to $450 per treatment, depending on the size and area treated.

Older IPL devices are often sold to spas, salons, family practices, or other medical offices. These devices tend to be operated by untrained professionals and can often be older, weaker technologies. Starlux IPL is widely regarded as the top system for IPL treatments.

The cost per treatment session is $1,250 for the face, or $1,750 for the face and neck – remember that you will want to do 2-3 sessions, for the best results. Botox, if added, must be billed separately at our standard rate of $17 per unit. We are offering a $250 off introductory promo for either area for a limited time, making is $1,000 for full face or $1,500 for full face and neck.

No, we use a numbing cream to ensure the treatment is comfortable. If you are anxious or concerned about your comfort during this or any other procedure at our office, simply let our doctors know during your consultation and we’ll create a custom plan to ensure you’re as comfortable as possible.

The entire treatment should take about 30-45 minutes, and since there’s no downtime, you can go right back to work or other activities. Facial cleansing: First we deep clean the skin to ensure it’s free from debris and ready to have the microparticles massaged deeply into your pores. Massage of Sebacia Microparticles into your skin: A gentle massage works the golden microparticles into the pores where they will help to heat-treat the oil glands. Skin Cooling: We cool the skin prior to treatment to make the procedure comfortable. Laser Treatment: A Nd:Yag laser is used to heat the microparticles up, which reduces the oil production of the sebaceous glands.

In clinical trials, patients were treated 3 times, with 6-10 days between each treatment.2 In practice, we find once a week on the same day, for 3 weeks in a row, is the easiest plan for patients to stick to, and sticking to the treatment plan is critical to getting the results Sebacia can create. The good news is that it’s just for 3 weeks, and then results usually last for around a year or more.

In clinical trials, most patients saw significant improvement in acne by week 12, but best results were measured at week 16.2 Those who follow a regular, prescribed skin care regimen can expect to see the best results, soonest. Your cosmetic physician at Reflections will discuss with you a specific skincare routine designed to keep your skin clear and healthy.

Because acne is created by several underlying causes – overproduction of oil, hormonal surges, stress, clogged pores, bacteria (p. acnes bacteria), etc., the most effective treatment plans treat all or most of the underlying causes. Sebacia works to reduce oil production, so it works best when paired with treatments that address the other underlying causes. For example, in a new study, patients who first used a daily topical treatment gel containing 0.1% adapalene and 2.5% benzoyl peroxide for 2-4 weeks before undergoing 3 treatments with Sebacia, spaced 1-2 weeks apart, saw an improvement of 66% at 3 months, as compared to those who had Sebacia alone (in the clinical trials), and showed 49% improvement at 3 months. Both groups continued to improve over time, and at 6 months those who only had Sebacia treatments were 65% improved, versus 79% for those who also did the pre-treatment. These improvements were the average among those treated.3

Like oral isotretinoin (brand name Accutane), Sebacia also targets the overactive sebaceous glands that are part of the multifactoral underlying causes of acne. Accutane is a closely controlled substance known to have many other effects, some of which can be very negative, including the risk of birth defects. For that reason, many patients try to avoid Accutane, and many doctors view it as a treatment of last resort. Sebacia can be a good option for those looking to avoid Accutane, but it’s not the right choice, or the only choice, for everyone. That’s why we warmly welcome you to our offices for a free in-person consultation with a physician, to discuss the best options for your acne treatment.

Spironolactone is often prescribed for acne, and it works to turn down androgen, a hormone that regulates oil production, and thus, reduces oil gland activity. Similarly, Sebacia reduces oil gland activity. Spironolactone is safer than Accutane, and so it’s very much preferred by many dermatologists these days, but that doesn’t mean treatment is convenient. Patients on Spironolactone can look forward to regular blood draws (for lab work-ups) and around 3 months of medication before they see results. Sebacia works much faster, and doesn’t interfere with your body’s other systems in the way Spironolactone does, and it doesn’t require rearranging your life around visits to the doctor – and we think that makes Sebacia the clear winner here.

PDT, or photodynamic therapy, is most-similar to Sebacia in that they both use a topical product and a light source to effectively heat-treat sebaceous glands and reduce their function (or in this case, over-function). The drawback with PDT is that it’s incredibly painful. This treatment was originally designed to remove skin cancers and pre-skin cancers, and it did so by basically burning off several layers of the skin. Doctors noticed patients had less sebaceous gland production, as well as nicely exfoliated, new skin afterward, and it became a treatment of last resort for some, and a way to avoid Accutane for others. But it has never gained widespread appeal because of the intense discomfort and long recovery. LED Therapy for acne works differently, using wavelengths of light that kill off the bacteria responsible for acne. In general, patients with moderate or severe acne tend to have overactive sebaceous glands that produce too much oil, which clogs pores, trapping bacteria in the pore, which then festers, creating painful blemishes. Killing off the bacteria is helpful in clearing up breakouts, but without treating the overactive oil glands, this treatment usually doesn’t produce the kind of long-lasting results patients are looking for. It’s a good adjunct, though, to add to Sebacia or other acne treatments. Acne Laser Treatments vary by laser. For example, Smoothbeam works to reduce the sebaceous glands, Vbeam works to reduce redness (and help prevent red/purple scars) as well as killing off the bacteria that cause acne. These 2 lasers are often used in combination and are most popular with patients who are well on their way to clear skin and are wanting to be proactive in preventing future scarring while treating their last few break-outs. Isolaz is often called an acne laser, though it’s technically a light-based therapy. Isolaz uses suction to gently remove clogs from pores, while a burst of light therapy kills bacteria. It’s one of our most popular treatments for patients with stubborn, medication-resistant acne.

It is a 20% solution of Aminolevulinic acid (ALA), a natural substance found throughout the human body. It is a precursor for hemoglobin synthesis. In the body, ALA is quickly synthesized into protoporphyrin IX, a photo-sensitizer that increases the skin’s reaction to the light therapy.

Skin should be free of all makeup, sunscreen, and moisturizers. An acetone scrub or microdermabrasion is done. The Levulan, which is a clear solution that sensitizes the skin to light, is applied to the skin and left on for 30 to 60 minutes. It is absorbed by skin cells and structures like sebaceous glands. It is washed off with soap and water. Next, skin is exposed to a specific wavelength of light with either the Blu-U, iClearXL, Vbeam laser, IPL, or GentleWaves. This takes about 8 to 15 minutes. At times, multiple lasers or light sources are sequentially used to activate the Levulan. This combined interaction of the Levulan solution and the laser or light is what gives rise to the term photodynamic therapy. Sunblock is applied and a hat is worn out of the office. Sun exposure needs to be avoided for 48 hours after treatment. If possible, patients should remain indoors for the first 24 hours after treatment. A minimum of SPF 40 sunblock should be worn for one week. Skin may become red with mild swelling and peeling for three to seven days. Three to five treatments are recommended at two to four-week intervals.

Following PDT, the face can appear red, followed by some flaking and peeling for several days. Rarely, some patients have a noticeable response to PDT, such as redness of their skin, or even temporary swelling of the lips and around your eyes for a few days after the treatment. Darker, pigmented patches or sunspots can temporarily darken, and then peel off over a week or so, leaving normal skin.

PDT is generally only covered by medical insurances when it is used to remove actinic keratosis, a type of pre-cancer of skin. We have not seen health insurance cover treatment for acne or acne scars, and cosmetic sun damage doesn’t meet their requirements for medical necessity. That having been said, we do not accept insurance of any kind at our practice. This allows us to significantly lower our costs to do business, since we don’t need a whole team of medical billers, and that allows us to offer PDT at a lower price than most practices. The pricing of your treatment will depend upon the type of light used and whether you purchase your treatments as a package or a la carte. Individual pricing is quoted during the free consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians. On average, PDT with Vbeam is $875 for the full face.

GentleWaves is the first device using effective LED photomodulation technology. The key to the science behind GentleWaves lies in using gentle light energy at specifically selected proprietary codes for optimum effectiveness. The modulated light is then delivered to target treatment areas by sophisticated pulsed technology. GentleWaves is not only able to stimulate the body to produce collagen but can reduce the level of the enzyme in the body that breaks collagen down.

The GentleWaves treatment is completely painless, can be performed in minutes and you can return to your normal activities immediately afterward. There will be no redness or peeling. A series of once-weekly treatments for eight weeks is advised, followed by maintenance.

If you regret a tattoo and want to look at your options, laser tattoo removal is the most effective treatment for eliminating it. Laser tattoo removal is safe for all kinds of skin tones and works on many types of inks. Usually it takes about 3 to 10 treatment sessions for removal, and these sessions are spaced at 4 to 6 weeks. Different kinds of laser treatments are used for removing different kinds of tattoos. For instance, the alexandrite laser is most effective in removing the green-colored tattoo pigment, even though it removes blue and black pigments as well. There are a few factors that need to be considered before deciding the effectiveness of the laser removal technique in your specific case. The cosmetic physician at your tattoo removal consultation will check factors like the nature of the ink that was used for your tattoo, the amount of the ink used, and how deep was the ink injected. Some other factors that are taken into account are the age of your tattoo, the location of the tattoo on your body, and whether you have had previous treatments. Tattoo removal is a process that requires patience, since it could take a year or more to fully remove certain tattoos; for instance, green color in a tattoo is the most difficult to remove. The reason why tattoo removal takes so long is because it is a cyclical procedure. Once the laser breaks up the ink molecules in your tattoo, the lymphatic system takes 4 to 6 weeks to absorb these molecules and clear them from your body. This is why the placement of your tattoo plays an important role in the amount of time it takes for its removal; the closer it is to your heart, the more quickly it can be eliminated. Even when your laser removal treatment cannot promise you complete removal of the tattoo after considering all the factors, it will often fade enough so that you can get a cover-up tattoo.

Yes, you may safely take Ibuprofen or Tylenol (or other NSAIDS) after tattoo removal. Aspirin, however is not recommended due to the potential risk of bleeding.

Yes, you may use Vaseline or Aquaphor after Tattoo Removal and we also recommend you protect the treated area with a mineral based sunscreen of at least 40 SPF.

We price tattoo removal by the size of the area being treated, with a single session ranging from $200 to $650 (and upwards if you’re looking to remove Almost all tattoos require multiple treatments, so the cost of a tattoo Some factors that affect the rate of tattoo removal include: Tattoo layering
• Location of your tattoo
• Your skin type
• The color and amount of ink
• Any pre-existing scars One of the most effective ways to reduce the cost of your tattoo removal is to decrease the number of sessions you need – and that means seeing a physician who has the best lasers and knows how to make each session as effective as possible. We cover that, as well as what you can individuall do before and after your treatments to make them more effective, in this blog. Most laser treatments will take multiple sessions for the complete removal of your tattoo. Even though it depends on your body’s ability to remove ink, most specialists recommend multiple sessions at a gap of 6-8 weeks.

After an initial Laser Tattoo Removal treatment, your skin may look swollen, discolored and may blister, flake and or peel. After a laser tattoo treatment, the skin can look swollen and irritated. This is normal. One should keep the area clean and moist and avoid the sun.

Itching after Tattoo Removal Laser sessions simply indicates that your immune system is working, and is very common. If your skin is well hydrated the itching is considerably less then if your skin is dehydrated. One can use oral antihistamines and over the counter topical steroids for a few days to help these symptoms.

The treatment will leave the skin mildly red and may result in pinpoint bleeding or blistering. One may notice a temporary whitening of the tattoo and swelling of the skin in the region. Over the next few weeks, the body’s scavenger cells remove pigment residues. One begins to notice lightening of the tattoo approximately two weeks post treatment and this will continue for two to three months. Following treatment, the doctor will apply an antibacterial ointment and dressing to the area. The skin should be kept clean with continued application of ointment as directed. A shower or bath the day after treatment is okay, but the treatment area should not be scrubbed. Your skin might feel slightly sunburned for a couple of days and the treated area may remain red for a few weeks. If the skin forms a blister or scab, this should be handled gently. After healing, the tattoo color will gradually and continually fade.

Side effects of laser procedures are generally few but may include hyperpigmentation, or the darkening of the skin at the treatment site, and hypopigmentation, where the treated area lacks normal skin color. Other possible side effects include infection of the site, textural changes in the skin and permanent scarring. Treatment of tanned skin increases the complication rate and should be avoided. The use of advanced lasers designed specifically for your skin type and the color of your tattoo and the experience of your physician factor into the risk of complications.

During treatment, the laser \u201cexplodes\u201d the ink under the skin and then through a variety of mechanisms, the body clears that ink through its immune system. Some of the ink actually goes right through the air and is excreted. So, over a period of time, the tattoo will get lighter and lighter.

There are several factors that will help ensure that you choose the right physician and facility for laser tattoo removal. First, make sure that the practitioner is indeed a physician. Next, ask the practitioner if he owns or rents the technology he will be utilizing. A physician who rents or uses a hospital-based system normally doesn’t perform enough treatments to warrant purchasing the lasers, leaving the possibility that they are inexperienced. Rental lasers may also be improperly calibrated and result in bad outcomes. Make sure the technologies are indeed lasers (sometimes the term is used loosely) and are new. Choose a physician who owns several tattoo lasers and has the full complement of wavelengths to treat all tattoo colors. If this is not the case, it may compromise care and result in inadequate removal of the tattoo pigment or even scarring. Lastly, choose a physician who focuses their entire practice on laser and aesthetic medicine, and not one who has a different area of interest and uses lasers part time. Look around the office carefully. Make sure it is clean and up to date. Look for other lasers used for hair removal, skin rejuvenation, acne, rosacea, skin resurfacing and acne scars, etc. This demonstrates experience and dedication to the field, which can make a big difference in the quality of care you receive.

The effectiveness and length of a laser tattoo removal treatment package depend on many factors. Each tattoo is different and comes with different pigments, techniques, quality, and reactivity. However, each tattoo will require multiple sessions to produce results. Some treatment packages can require as few as four treatments or as many as ten—or more. As a general rule, black inks are easiest to fade, while bright and pastel colors will be more difficult.

The key with tattoo removal is using the right wavelength of light— meaning the right laser for the color of the tattoo ink and the color of the skin. Unfortunately, there’s not a one-size-fits-all device that treats all the colors of tattoos that we commonly see. In this case, we may use what we call a YAG laser that treats a black tattoo, an Alexandrite laser that treats a green, and a Ruby laser that treats blue. So, when selecting a cosmetic physician to treat your tattoos, make sure they have multiple devices so they can tailor the treatment specifically to the color of the tattoo. Secondly, someone with darker skin is going to require a different technology than someone with lighter skin.

Yes, it’s the most efficient way to clear a tattoo, but a multiple-wavelength session is best left to experienced physicians.

The choice of laser treatment for tattoo removal is made depending on your skin type and the color of your tattoo. The best surgeons will use a combination of laser treatments to help you achieve optimal results. If you have laser tattoos, then Q switched lasers are required for their removal. These produce light energy in short nanosecond pulses which allows them to penetrate your skin in order to heat and shatter the tattoo ink. Different wavelengths of laser are used so that different colors in the tattoo can be targeted during the same session. However, you must know that green-colored tattoos are resistant to Q switching. Cynosure PicoSure is used on such stubborn ink. Here are some of the common laser treatment for tattoo removal:
• PiQo4 – it helps with a wide variety of ink colors and types; it is a safe alternative for dark skin tones which are difficult to treat with other lasers.
• Medlite 6 – with 4 wavelengths, it helps with multicolored tattoos. It can be used for all skin types.
• Alex TriVantage – it helps with the removal of multi-colored tattoos on most of the skin types. It is a great option for the removal of tattoos that include blue, green and black colored inks. For the complete removal of a tattoo, it may take 4 or more sessions that are spaced at an interval of 6 to 8 weeks. The number of sessions required to depend on the color and kind of ink, amount of ink used and the depth at which it was tattooed into your skin.

Like with any kind of any wound, you will want to treat the skin very gently. You don’t want to expose it to sun since that can create pigmentary issues. You’ll want to keep it moist using different things like Aquaphor or Bacitracin and keep it covered to prevent it from getting dirty. Resist the urge to scratch it and peel it. Avoid popping or poking at any blisters that might form.

Yes - Tattoo ink takes time to settle into the deeper layers of the skin. If treated with laser immediately, one may be able to remove a considerable amount of the ink in one treatment. If the tattoo is new and the ink has already settled, it may take longer to remove the tattoo because the ink hasn’t had any chance to fade and consequently there is more ink to remove

You can swim approximately 4 days post Laser Tattoo Removal treatment or when your skin has fully healed. It is ok to swim in a pool within two days of tattoo removal. One should be more careful with the ocean and wait 3-4days. Lakes commonly have harmful bacteria and one should wait a full week.

Blistering after Laser Tattoo Removal is a normal part of the healing process. One may notice blistering when removing certain color inks, namely red, orange, yellow and green. One should try to keep the blisters intact as long as possible to aid in the healing process.

Avoid tanning the skin before laser tattoo removal. Also, avoid applying makeup or cover up to the area before treatment. We recommend avoiding the use of aspirin before laser tattoo removal, instead choosing non-aspirin products, like Tylenol or ibuprofen for minor aches and pains prior to the procedure. Notify your physician if you are prone to keloid scarring to determine if you’re still a candidate for laser tattoo removal.

With tattoo removal, we can remove any part of a tattoo or the whole tattoo. One common scenario where we remove only part of the tattoo is employment with the military or police force. Very commonly, these two institutions don’t want a tattoo showing that extends beyond the sleeve or beyond the collar. Another scenario is when you just doesn’t like part of the tattoo, and we can remove that so you can go back and touch up the tattoo later.

Unfortunately, there are not a lot of great alternatives to laser therapy. There are creams available on the market, there are abrasives, there are devices to scrape, and there are chemicals that burn the skin. These are not effective, and the scarring and loss of pigment from trying to remove a tattoo by yourself at home can make it much more difficult and sometimes even impossible to produce great results with a laser.

No - While Laser Tattoo Removal does not cause baldness, nor does it cause permanent hair loss, it may temporarily remove hair in the treated area. The laser used to remove tattoos can temporarily remove the pigment from the hair in the area where the tattoo is. This is not typically permanent.

Yes, smoking does negatively affect Laser Tattoo Removal. Smoking restricts blood circulation near the skin’s surface, so the shattered ink particles are carried away at a slower rate than in a non-smoker. After laser tattoo removal, the immune system and lymphatic drainage system work together to remove the unwanted ink. It has been shown that both of these systems don’t work as well in a smoker, making tattoo removal slower in smokers.

The easiest tattoos to remove have the following components: they are all black, they are faded, they have not been done professionally (most amateur tattoo artists place the ink at a more- shallow depth). Additionally, when removing a tattoo from a very light skin type you can safely use the laser at a higher setting. Conversely, when removing a tattoo from a very dark skin type, you must proceed with caution and use a gentler setting so as not to create hyper or hypo pigmentation (dark or white spots).

Advanced tattoo removal lasers are much faster and less traumatic to the skin than previous technologies, making the treatment much more comfortable. The impact of the energy from the laser’s powerful pulse of light has been described as similar to getting snapped by a thin hot, rubber band. With each subsequent treatment, the discomfort fades. Methods for anesthesia vary from a Zimmer air chiller, topical, or injectable anesthesia.

No, the extent of the ink that can be removed depends on many factors, including the physical nature of ink used, its color, how much was injected into your skin, and how deeply it was placed.

Yes — some of the most flattering referrals we get are from tattoo artists who send their clients to Reflections when they wish to revise their artwork. They choose us because we send their clients back with their skin in great condition.

Go to a reputable practitioner who is using advanced and sterile instruments and choose a facility that is clean and up to date. Try to choose as few colors as possible and gravitate towards dark green, black and blue. Avoid pastel colors, yellow, orange, and white, as they are harder to remove. Consider having the tattoo placed in an area that is easily coverable with clothing in case you regret the decision later.

Laser tattoo removal is different for each patient since every person and their tattoo is unique. This means that it is not possible to predict the exact number of treatments that will be required to achieve complete removal of a tattoo. Most professional tattoos take around 6 to 12 treatment sessions for complete removal. A tattoo removal center will take into consideration several factors before the number of treatments can be decided. Some of these factors include your skin type, tone, layering of the tattoo, location, pigmentation, the amount of ink applied to your tattoo, the kind of pigment used, whether homemade pigment or professional ink was used, and any pre-existing scars from the tattoo. Other than these factors regarding the tattoo itself, your cosmetic physician will also want to know if your immune system is healthy and whether you are a smoker. Once all these and more factors are taken into consideration, your tattoo removal center will be able to decide on the number of treatments that will be required to completely remove your tattoo. The PicoWay laser procedure is able to remove professional tattoos within 4 to 6 treatments, whereas amateur tattoos take about 2 to 3 treatments. The success of your tattoo removal also depends on the ability of your body to break down the ink, which depends on your general health. When you consult experienced specialists who use the most advanced technology and effective laser treatments, they will be able to remove your tattoos in fewer treatment sessions.

We can treat tattoos in patients that have darker skin— the key is what wavelength or laser has been utilized. The specific wavelength of light is usually 1064 to remove a black tattoo in someone who has darker skin. So, lasers like Picosure may cause complications like white spots since it doesn’t produce the correct wavelength.

The most common lasers developed specifically for use in tattoo removal use a technique known as Q-Switching. Q-Switched lasers produce short pulses (billionth of a second) of intense light that pass through the top layers of the skin and are selectively absorbed by the tattoo pigment. This laser energy causes the tattoo pigment to fragment into smaller particles that are then absorbed by the body’s immune system2. The laser we use depends on the colors in your tattoo and your skin type, as different laser wavelengths are better absorbed by different colors of ink and are safer for certain skin types. For green tattoos that prove resistant to Q-Switched lasers, there’s a new class of tattoo removal lasers called “picosecond” devices (such as the Cynosure PicoSure) that can be used these types of stubborn ink. Treatment typically includes four or more sessions, spaced apart by six to eight weeks. Your number of treatments will depend on the type and color of ink used in your tattoo, how much of it was used to create your tattoo, and how deeply it was injected into your skin.

During treatment, the laser “explodes” the ink under the skin and then through a variety of mechanisms, the body clears that ink through its immune system. Some of the ink actually goes right through the air and is excreted. So, over a period of time, the tattoo will get lighter and lighter.

We price tattoo removal by the size of the area being treated, with a single session ranging from $200 to $650 (and upwards). Almost all tattoos require multiple treatments, so the cost of a tattoo may vary. Some factors that affect the rate of tattoo removal include: -Tattoo layering -Location of your tattoo -Your skin type -The color and amount of ink -Any pre-existing scars One of the most effective ways to reduce the cost of your tattoo removal is to decrease the number of sessions you need – and that means seeing a physician who has the best lasers and knows how to make each session as effective as possible. We cover that, as well as what you can individually do before and after your treatments to make them more effective, in this blog. Most laser treatments will take multiple sessions for the complete removal of your tattoo. Even though it depends on your body’s ability to remove ink, most specialists recommend multiple sessions at a gap of 6-8 weeks.

We can treat tattoos in patients that have darker skin— the key is what wavelength or laser has been utilized. The specific wavelength of light is usually 1064 to remove a black tattoo in someone who has darker skin. So, lasers like Picosure may cause complications like white spots since it doesn’t produce the correct wavelength.

Yes, black tattoos can be fully removed - and are best-removed by a 1064nm laser. The PiQo4 is the worlds highest-powered 1064 wavelength laser, and its picosecond and nanosecond technology allows for fast and safe removal of black ink from all skin types.

PiQo4 is a 1064nm wavelength laser (1064 best targets black and very dark ink - including all shading in tattoos) that can fire in a picosecond laser pulse duration (1 trillionth of a second). The other popular picosecond lasers are PicoWay and PicoSure - these have different wavelengths and thus target different colors, but the interesting thing about picosecond lasers is that they break up ink for faster removal than older technology, and because of the short pulse duration, they are much safer for skin of color.

PiQo4 laser is a picosecond and nanosecond laser with a 1064nm wavelength that can be used to remove black tattoos, freckles, and other dark spots on all skin types safely and quickly. Its the worlds highest-powered cosmetic laser and comes with few presets (and is one of the most expensive lasers you can buy), so you typically dont see them in every medspa or plastic surgery center, because theyre not for novice laser techs. This laser is amazingly effective - and that makes it dangerous in the hands of someone whos not a laser specialist. However, since only cosmetic physicians with years of laser training use this laser at our practice, you can be assured of its safe and effective use at our offices.

Yes, you can expect to feel discomfort and pain with the PiQo4 laser. We can greatly decrease this by numbing the area prior to treatment. And just like how the pain of getting a tattoo stops the moment the machine stops, the same occurs with this laser - its pain thats very quick and temporary (as the removal sessions are much, much faster than the tattooing itself).

Most tattoos that have more than 1 color are going to require treatment with more than 1 laser system, as most laser systems have only a single wavelength and each wavelength targets a specific color. However, we use the PiQo4 on nearly all tattoos as black ink is used in shading and exists in nearly all tattoos, and PiQo4 is the fastest and safest laser for removing black on all skin types.

This laser is excellent at removing green and blue ink in patients with light skin. For black tattoos, we recommend a 1064 Q-Switched Laser, or Picosecond pulse lasers such as Revlite or PIQO4.

Alex Trivantage laser is safe for use in patients with light skin and must be used cautiously in patients with dark skin due to risk of created unwanted pigmentation or light spots in the skin. When we are treating patients with darker skin tones, we generally use an Nd:Yag laser instead.

Alex TriVantage laser is well tolerated when removing unwanted pigmentation and is done without anesthesia. For tattoo removal, injectable lidocaine may be utilized.

The Alex TriVantage laser is an advanced technology that delivers rapid pulses of energy to the skin and is used to remove unwanted pigmented spots, sun spots, tattoos, etc. It is a very safe and effective way to treat pigmentation caused by sun damage. It is safe to use this laser in patients with lighter skin. The Alex TriVantage laser is also used to remove unwanted green and blue tattoos.

A Q-switched laser delivers very concentrated pulses of energy as fast as a billionth of a second. This class of lasers have the benefit of delivering less heat into the skin, thereby reducing the risk of complications of laser therapy, especially for those with skin of a darker tone or increased senstivity. Q-switched lasers are used for skin rejuvenation, pigment removal, and tattoo removal. There are four main wavelengths of Q switched lasers, including 1054, 755, 694 and 532, with each wavelength best targetting different colors or concerns.

What do you mean by naturally? If you consider growing your own collagen naturally then we recommend either hyperdilute Radiesse, Sculptra, Sofwave, or Ultherapy. If you mean without treatments of any kind, you may consider trying to stop smiling (dont laugh! - this will truly work if youre very young and only have very fine lines or no lines in the skin at rest).

Thread Lifts or a skin tightening treatment like Sofwave or Ulthera are the best treatments for smile lines that dont involve fillers. Fat transfer and facelift surgery would be 2 other options that work well, if plastic surgery is something youre open to exploring.

Laugh lines are caused by the repetitive motion of smiling! Many people find these endearing, as they indicate a happy life. But for those who want theirs lessened or removed, treatments are available.

For most people, fine lines appear (at rest) in your smile lines around 30. This is dependent upon both your genetics and your environment - those who smoke, laugh or smile more frequently, or who dont protect themselves from the sun, will experience them earlier in life than if they had not had these negative environmental factors.

Fillers, Thread Lifts, Non-Surgical Skin Tightening treatments (Ultherapy, Sofwave, Thermage, Exillis Ultra), and Plastic Surgery (facelift or fat transfer filling) are all options to eliminate smile lines.

Fillers and Thread Lifts can make your smile lines disappear overnight - no, really, they work immediately, and you can be ready to show off your results the very next day!

Yes! You can get rid of the lines, folds, and wrinkles - but you will always naturally have an indentation in the face as it transitions from cheek to lip. Check out our before and after photos above if you want to see what were talking about.

There are 3 causes of cellulite: 1. Fat trapped in the upper layers of the skin pushing up against the skin 2. Thin skin that shows more of the bumpy fat cells below 3. Fibrous septae that are tighter in certain areas (creating deep dimples)

If you truly must stick to non-invasive (no needles, no surgery, no downtime), then the 2 best treatments are Exillis Ultra for skin tightening and firming, and CoolSculpting or SculpSure for removing excess fat bulges. Like with all things, the best treatment varies by person and symptom. If youre willing to consider injections, lasers, and microneedling, there are a ton more treatment options - and again, the best one will be different for each person, based on their needs.

You can improve your cellulite, temporarily as a woman. If you treat it early and aggressively, you may be able to spend decades cellulite-free. But almost all women reach a point past menopause where their hormones simply make skin too thin to be cellulite-free.

Qwo cellulite dissolving injections for deep dimples and Exillis Ultra skin tightening are probably the 2 fastest ways to get rid of cellulite.

Men seem to naturally grow their fibrous septae in a different way than women, and they also store fat in other areas - these 2 differences seem to be the reason why even very heavy men rarely experience cellulite, but almost every woman has cellulite.

Cellulite happens when underlying fat begins to push through the layers of collagen fibers in the skin. These collagen fibers pull the skin down in certain areas, causing the telltale dimples we recognize as cellulite.

There are a lot of products and at-home methods that promise to reduce cellulite. Although there are some steps you can take (like maintaining a healthy lifestyle), most patients find that professional treatments are the most effective way to reduce cellulite.

The female body can have less supportive connective tissue when it comes to holding fat on areas like the hips and thighs. This contributes to the appearance of cellulite. However, men can and do experience cellulite (some estimates state this can be around 10% of men).

Cellulite can happen to anyone. In fact, it’s believed that there’s a genetic component to cellulite that causes it to occur even in people that are otherwise slim. However, maintaining a healthy lifestyle can certainly help reduce the appearance of cellulite.

There are plenty of unscientific claims out there about what can clear up cellulite. The best way to learn about your best options is by speaking with our cosmetic physicians about what treatment options will work best for you.

With a healthy lifestyle, you can gradually burn off fat which can reduce the appearance of cellulite. Cellulite won’t respond on its own, rather, you can treat the underlying causes by reducing fat and undergoing professional treatments.

The effectiveness of cellulite treatments varies. Some minimally invasive procedures like Avéli™ and Cellfina™ show promising results lasting up to 3 years or more. However, many treatments offer only temporary improvements, and no single treatment is universally effective for all patients.

Currently, Cellfina is indicated as the longest-lasting cellulite treatment, with results lasting up to 3 years. Other treatments like Avéli™ also offer long-lasting, near-permanent results.

Most cellulite treatments have minimal side effects. Common ones include temporary soreness, mild bruising, and swelling. However, the severity and duration of side effects can vary depending on the specific treatment and individual patient factors.

The number of sessions required depends on the treatment type. Some minimally invasive procedures like Avéli™ or Cellfina™ may require only one session, while non-invasive options might need 4-8 sessions for optimal results.

The cost of cellulite treatments varies widely. Prices can range from around $200 per session for less invasive treatments to $3,000-$7,000 for more advanced procedures like Avéli™, Cellulaze®, or Cellfina™.

Vitamin C can be good for certain people with melasma. Its not going to be sufficient on its own, and you need to really take sun protection seriously when you use Vitamin C, especially as sun exposure will darken melasma.

Naturally means something different to each person. But usually our patients who ask about natural remedies are looking to avoid systemic medications. For melasma, that means laser treatments and natural skincare routine, and good sun protection (which can be a mineral sunscreen or even UPF clothing).

Over-the-counter creams and skincare work better for preventative maintenance than for removing dark spots. But when we talk about ingredients in creams that are good for melasma, we like to look for 1 or more of these ingredients: tranexamic acid, vitamin C, and hydroquinone. Sunscreen will also be critical in keeping melasma from darkening.

The best way to treat melasma depends upon the individual, but all treatment needs to include both active treatments to remove the pigment in the skin AND a proactive skincare and medication routine to prevent new pigment from developing. An example of this might be clear + brilliant laser treatment to remove the spots you have, plus tranexamic acid prescription to use everyday, plus sunscreen used daily.

No, currently melasma cannot be cured. However, we can usually manage it with ease when patients are consistent with their prevention using medications and skincare at home.

Major risk factors for melasma include sun exposure, hormonal changes, genetics, and having a darker skin type.

There are three main types of melasma, including epidermal, dermal, and mixed. Dermal melasma is considered the most difficult to treat, as the pigment lies deeper in the skin.

Melasma primarily affects the face and occurs symmetrically on the cheeks, bridge of the nose, forehead, chin, and above the upper lip. It is less common for it to appear on other areas of the body and does not usually “spread” from existing patches. However, it can develop in new areas with sufficient triggers.

There are various treatment options available for melasma. These include topical creams, chemical peels, laser treatments, and sun protection. Our team will create a personalized melasma treatment plan to help you achieve your skin goals.

Melasma may be triggered by sun exposure, hormonal changes, cosmetic products that are irritating to the skin, stress, and thyroid disease.

Deep wrinkles between the breasts react best to filler placed directly beneath them. This result can be improved by using an aggressive laser along with a biostimulatory filler (like hyperdilute sculptra or radiesse), which will restore and repair the collagen in this area, as well as erase sun damage and deep wrinkles.

Avoid sun exposure, smoking, side-sleeping, and other environmental damage. Treat your chest and cleavage the way you do your face and neck and use kincare products to help exfoliate, moisturize, treat, and protect that skin.

Lasers are the best option for erasing sun damage and widespread visible aging (texture changes, pigment changes, etc.). For individual wrinkles, fillers work best to smooth them out.

Deep individual chest wrinkles can often be treated with filler injections. Some will get a satisfactory response with this alone. For those who aren’t candidates, there is generally a lot of sun damage that’s causing various signs of aging on the chest, and that is better treated with lasers or skin tightening treatments, depending upon the individual’s needs. When sun damage is significant, we almost always recommend a biostimulatory filler be used with laser or ultrasound treatment, as this provides the greatest improvement in skin quality.

We accept financing from select third party vendors for bills totaling $1000 or more, which allows you to pay for your treatments in small monthly payments. Use the icons at right to apply now!

We have not seen where any insurance companies cover these treatments. However, some patients have been able to use their HSA to pay for their treatments at our practice. You’ll want to call your insurance carrier or account administrator to ask them about the specifics of your coverage. Our practice will accept HSA debit cards backed by Visa or Mastercard, but we do not accept or file insurance coverage at our offices.

Filler injected behind the individual wrinkles would be the fastest way to smooth out wrinkles between the breasts.

Laser or ultrasound treatment, sometimes with multiple lasers in one day, would be the fastest way to remove sun damage from the chest.

Almost everyone can have laser skin resurfacing and rejuvenation treatments for their chest at our offices because we have so many lasers to choose from. Each of these layers is designed to treat specific skin types and skin conditions.

Almost everyone can have wrinkle filling & smoothing treatments for their chest at our offices because we utilize every FDA-Approved filler available. Reflections is unique in that these fillers are only injected by physicians with an in-depth understanding of how the filler will sit in the skin.

Almost everyone can have non-surgical skin tightening & firming treatments for their chest at our offices because we have a large variety of lasers and other technology available. For more significant skin tightening, we also offer surgical options.

Laser Chest Rejuvenation pricing depends upon 2 factors: The laser used (as certain lasers are more costly to own, use, and maintain) The size of the area being treated This table should give you an approximate idea of the costs involved, but a free consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians is the only way to get a personalized price quote and ensure you’re choosing the right treatment(s) for you. Cost of Chest Treatments Near Me Treatment Approximate Costs Laser Sun Damage Removal $300 – 1500 per session. The number of sessions depends on the amount of sun damage and the therapies chosen. Lasers + Biostimulation $1000 – 2500+ per session, depending on the size of the treatment area Wrinkle Filler Smoothing $650 – $750 per syringe (1 syringe usually needed) Laser Redness Removal $300-450 per session, 1-3 sessions needed Laser Lipo & Skin Tightening for Gynecomastia $4,500 – 6,000+

Loose skin on the stomach can be caused by Aging, Weight Fluctuations, and Pregnancy. All of these share a commonality in that hormonal balances within the body shift through pregnancy, weight fluctuations (metabolic changes), and pregnancy - and really its the hormonal impact on collagen production that causes the skin to bounce back, or not. When hormones are working in your favor, skin grows new collagen, creating a shrink-wrap-like effect with skin thats firm, tight, and elastic. When hormones are not working in your favor, we use treatments that encourage collagen production to try to create similar results. Of course, there is some degree of variability in results with these types of treatments, because how well your body reacts depends upon its max output ability for collagen creation, which declines with age and is always less for certain people (genetic predisposition). When collagen-induction therapies dont create enough of a result, we can explore surgical removal of loose skin, through a tummy tuck.

Crepey skin is always caused by a lack of collagen support. In the case of thin, crepey skin with many small wrinkles, the skin lacks its youthful support of collagen - and that can be corrected with collagen-induction therapies (there are non-invasive, non-surgical, and surgical options - generally speaking there is a trade-off between less invasive procedures needing more treatment sessions to achieve the same result as a more invasive procedure within this category of treatment). In the case where you have stretch marks, the collagen support below the skin has irreparably torn (a stretch mark occurs where the collagen below is torn and the skin remains intact above, with no support below it - thats why it feels thin). With Stretch marks all we can do is try to improve them by blending the color in with surrounding skin and improving the collagen support in the surrounding skin - but the tear can never be completely repaired (though it can be removed with surgery, which will also leave scarring behind in its stead - most patients dont want that, which is why we rarely recommend that option).

Yes - you can tighten skin using precision heating (Jplasma/Renuvion, ThermiTight, Smartlipos PrecisionTX 1064nm Laser, Thermage, Ulthera, Sofwave, and CO2 Lasers) or you can remove excess skin surgically to create a tightened appearance (Tummy Tuck or Abdominoplasty Surgery). Skin tightening treatments provide about a 30-50% improvement and are dependent upon: 1. the quality of your skin before treatment (stretch marks are a sure sign of very poor skin quality), and 2. your bodys reaction to the treatment (this part is somewhat unpredictable unless youve tried other similar treatments in the past, and then that can give us some indication of how good your body is at responding to these treatments).

Yes, you can! There are 3 ways you can lose belly fat without surgery: 1. Freeze the fat cells to death with CoolSculpting - your body will eliminate those dead cells, just as it does when its regularly decommissioning and repairing old cells in the body. 2. Overheat the fat cells to death with SculpSure - your body will eliminate those dead cells, just as it does when its regularly decommissioning and repairing old cells in the body. 3. Enzymatically break down the fat cells with Kybella - your body will eliminate those dead cells, just as it does when its regularly decommissioning and repairing old cells in the body. Of course, if this fat is hanging that also indicates loose skin - and for that you can sometimes see a small improvement in skin retraction just by taking away the weight of that fat hanging on it - but you may also need skin tightening or skin removal surgery to achieve your goals. This is something our doctors discuss at length during our free consultations!

The fastest way to see a big result is liposuction. It’s the most complete fat removal technique, allowing us to remove the most fat and sculpt a completely new silhouette.

There are two potential reasons your belly fat may be stubborn: Genetic predisposition: Women are more likely to have fat that’s extremely difficult to lose in their lower abdomen (many call this a belly pouch), whereas men tend to hold stubborn fat in their love handles, and some men have a harder time losing the visceral fat that’s below their abdominal muscle. This gives them a very large circumference, though it may not feel so squishy because it’s underneath the muscle layer. Hormones and medical conditions: One of the reasons we require blood work from our patients is to ensure nothing more serious is going on health-wise, as that can lead to fat that’s very stubborn on your abdomen or elsewhere. For women, PCOS is a common culprit, as is normal menopausal weight gain.

Loose skin has lost the strength and support of the collagen network that exists at the deepest layers of the skin. This can happen from normal aging (we lose 10-20% of collagen per decade after 30) or by over-stretching the collagen layer and creating rips in it. When those rips are through-and-through, they show up as stretch marks. Overstretching makes it very difficult to repair the collagen, and that means once skin has been damaged to a certain point, skin tightening procedures (which all work by stimulating remodeling and repair of the collagen support structures) will have a limited impact. That’s why some people genuinely need to have loose skin removed, such as with a tummy tuck procedure.

Think of fat cells like storage containers. When you lose fat naturally, you’re emptying out what’s inside those containers, but the cells remain, ready and waiting for you to eat just a little extra, so they can fill back up. Once you’ve filled up all the space in your existing fat cell “containers,” your body will make more fat cells, so it can store the extra fat. Of course, making new cells uses more energy than storing fat in existing cells. When you have a fat reduction treatment, whether that’s by liposuction, CoolSculpting, SculpSure, Kybella, or any of the other methods we offer, you’re removing those fat cells along with the fat. It’s important that we say “that we offer” because there are treatments out there that work by temporarily causing your fat cells to release their stores and then trying to get your body to flush just that stored fat. This can work, but it’s generally not as effective and not as long-lasting because the second you overeat, those cells fill back up. So, can you overeat after we’ve removed these cells, and do so in a way that’s going to get your body to build some new fat cells? Yes, you can. Fat cells tend to multiply, so the area where we’ve removed fat cells with this treatment is less likely than other areas with a higher amount of fat cells to be the place your body decides to grow those new cells – that’s why you’ll sometimes hear that people gain weight in weird new places after lipo, especially after liposculpting where they’re removing nearly every single fat cell in one area (we secretly suspect that’s why Kim K can gain weight but never on her tummy!).

Non-invasive means nothing enters the body – so no needles, no numbing, no surgery. When we talk about non-invasive fat removal, the two top treatments are SculpSure and CoolSculpting. They remove the most fat (20-25% per treatment) in the most comfortable manner. When we talk about non-invasive skin tightening, there are more options, including Exilis Ultra (the new upgrade on this machine has really made it the standout favorite among our patients), Ultherapy, and Thermage. Additionally, EmSculpt provides muscle tightening and toning non-invasively, which is important if you’re looking to repair diastasis recti or to get six-pack abs.

Lipo under local anesthesia is the fastest in terms of seeing results. Patients will see an immediate result that will improve over the next six months. However, the majority of that improvement is seen by the end of one week, making it a great choice for those looking for fast, big results. Traditional liposuction and tummy tucks have more intense recovery, although they can be more appropriate for patients with severe skin laxity and large amounts of fat to remove. Because of that recovery, patients should not expect to be showing off results before 2-4 weeks after surgery. Non-invasive fat reduction procedures take 6-12 weeks to show results, whereas skin tightening procedures, which rely on collagen creation, need longer – about 3-6 months.

Yes. Even though excess skin can be the easiest to identify on your body, stubborn fat may be underneath it, only adding to the complexity of the body contouring process. However, with the right combination of treatment options, the trained cosmetic physicians at Reflections can suggest the right course of action.

Yes – the amount of belly fat not only affects which treatments you may be a candidate for, but also which treatments will be best to help you reach your goals, especially when accounting for cost, downtime, and time to see results. Those with more significant fat stores are generally more likely to choose liposuction because the number of non-invasive treatment cycles it would require to remove as much fat as a single liposuction procedure makes lipo the much less expensive option and also means patients will achieve their desired results much faster with lipo.

Yes – loose skin, especially when that skin is weighed down by fat, can create health problems. The most common complication is skin infection. When the skin is folded over on itself, bacteria multiply. When that skin rubs against itself, it can create small abrasions where that bacteria can enter the skin and create an infection. These kinds of infections can be extremely difficult to heal. Generally, this is only a problem for patients who are severely overweight or were at one time, or who have compromised immune systems.

All fat can be removed by these types of procedures, but those who are significantly overweight may be disqualified from certain procedures due to their increased risk of complications (for example, anesthesia in a patient who is severely overweight should be avoided).

Removing fat is the first step to making your abs visible. There are two other factors to consider: skin and muscle tone. Loose skin will often camouflage your abs, and a lack of strong muscles may make it even more difficult to define your abs. We do find using EmSculpt to build muscle definition, in combination with lipo or a non-invasive fat reduction technology like CoolSculpting or SculpSure, is effective at both toning and revealing abs.

None of these treatments will in any way reduce your ability to have a normal, healthy pregnancy in the future.

As long as you’ve finished breastfeeding, you can safely have a fat reduction and skin tightening treatment. We typically recommend women wait at least 6 months after giving birth to have a treatment, as many women naturally and easily “bounce” back during this period, and we want to give your body the proper chance to heal itself first.

Your cheeks first start to sag for women as they lose fat volume in the apple of their cheeks (or the section of their cheekbone area closest to the nose). This is a very normal aspect of aging that all women experience - usually between ages 33 and 50. During this same time period, skin loses some of its firmness and elasticity due to collagen loss, making the skin more likely to develop fine lines and wrinkles, and a droopy appearance. Finally, we lose bone mass as we age, and our muscles often sag with gravity in our faces - these changes are usually visible further down the aging process, in the late 40s to mid-60s.

Many women notice their cheeks flatten in their mid-to-late 30s. As the cheek deflates it starts to sag, and this will worsen if left untreated. By your late 40s, most women have early jowling, which occurs because of volume loss in the cheek above (which is why cheek filler can actually remove jowls for women in their 40s and 50s).

It can be, if its done with fat transfer. Its not permanent if its done with Hyaluronic Acid fillers, like Voluma or Lyft, or even if its done with more permanent fillers, like Sculptra or Radiesse. Fat transfer is the surgical removal of fat from one part of your body, and transfer to another. In this treatment, we usually take fat from your midsection, and a plastic surgeon uses it to precisely fill and sculpt your face, for a very natural and permanent result.

Treating jowls to remove them completely requires that you do all of these things: 1. Restore lost volume in the cheek above (this is the source of the extra loose skin that creates jowls - not skin laxity - for the most part) - this is usually done with dermal fillers 2. Eliminate the fat in the jowl (if there is any - this is something that occurs in a later stage of jowling) - Kybella injections work wonderfully for this 3. Restore any lost volume along the jawbone (we lose 50% of our jawbone mass by the age of 50) and in the prejowl sulcus - by filling in the areas of deficit in front of and behind the jowl, we give that area a chance to not stand out as out-of-alignment 4. Resurface the skin and stimulate collagen, to remove those series of fine lines that appear in the jowls - this can be done with lasers, biostimulatory filler injections, or microneedling 5. Lift any remaining loose skin - this can be done surgically or with a thread lift

Yes - for most people, especially those who are under 55 and who are treating mild or moderate jowls, they can be significantly or completely removed non-surgically. How they are removed - which exact treatments are needed - is very individualized. Our doctors will help you understand which options are the best for you during your free consultation.

Yes! Thread lifts, Kybella, and Fillers are the best non-surgical treatments for the jowls.

Jowls are caused by: Step 1: fat in our cheeks starts to disappear in our 30s and skin slips down the face toward the jawline, and forward toward our mouth (it starts to accumulate outside the smile lines, which are a natural connection of skin to fascia, and will become the point at which most skin and fat accumulates behind, creating jowls) Step 2: Fat slowly starts to lose its connection points within the cheek and slips downward and forward Step 3: Left alone, that fat weighs on skin thats already starting to lose a lot of its elasticity due to natural aging processes. The skin starts to break down and sag more, causing fat to become more noticeable as it droops below the natural jawline. Step 4: Muscles and ligaments in the face start to loosen and bones have now started to resorb. There is less and less support, allowing jowls to descend further and skin to become crepey and thin. We can intervene at any step in this process and make meaningful changes, but the most cost-effective changes with the least invasive measures are made early on in the process. Weight fluctuations and hormonal changes can accelerate this process.

At or before age 55, youre going to see jowls (unless you are actively treating to prevent them). At which exact age depends upon how steady your weight is throughout your life, your genetic predisposition, and how carefully you protect your skin from sun and other environmental damage. You can treat to prevent jowls with non-surgical treatments, starting in your late 30s, and delay or prevent jowls by decades. Ask us how!

Jowls are caused by fat moving down the face and forward - but if they are left to weigh on the skin, it will become a skin issue too as the skin breaks down and loses its ability to bounce back even if all the fat is removed. At some point in our 50s or later, muscles drooping throughout the lower face mean that complete tightening along the jawline and jowls cannot be achieved without also addressing and tightening the muscles below.

If you get down to a very low body fat, it may be possible to lose the fat out of your jowls. At this point you would likely be unhappy with how gaunt your face looks overall. However, losing weight will not fix skin sagging issues, which is usually at least part of the equation by 50, if not sooner. Kybella is a great injectable option for jowls because it dissolves the fat in the jowls and encourages skin to retract. Its much easier than dieting down to the low, low body fat percentage youd need in order to burn off this fat - and its much faster, too!

Yes - liposuction will remove the fat tissue of love handles, and sometimes patients also need skin tightening, which can be done with either ThermiTight or Smartlipos 1064 wavelength.

Whether you go the surgical route with laser lipo, or you opt for a nonsurgical treatment like CoolSculpting or SculpSure, it generally costs around $5,500 - 6,500 to have your love handles removed at our New Jersey MedSpa. With CoolSculpting and SculpSure it may seem like youre getting a better deal, with single sessions around $1500, but remember you have 2 love handles, and youll need at least 2 sessions for each love handle.... in the end, the choice is probably better made on other factors (and we price it that way on purpose - because we feel you shouldnt have to sacrifice on choosing the right technology just because its less expensive).

Skin tightening procedures can only do so much. Patients who have lost a significant amount of weight may have severely damaged their skin beyond repair. In that case, the only option may be surgical removal of this excess skin via a tummy tuck or body lift surgery. The best way to find out if your skin is too loose to benefit from one of the treatments we offer is to schedule a free consultation with one of our cosmetic physicians who specialize in body sculpting procedures.

The advantage of liposuction is that, in one treatment, we can remove whatever extent of fat is desired — even 75%, 80%, or 85%. Non-surgical treatments can reduce about 20% of the fat with each treatment. This happens over a 3-month period. So, the advantage of these non-surgical treatments is that they’re non-invasive, there’s no downtime, and they’re very comfortable.

As long as you’ve finished breastfeeding, you can safely have any procedure performed that you’d like. However, we do recommend moms wait until at least 6 months after giving birth for hormones and weight fluctuations to normalize before treating.

These are the best products for under-eye bags: 1. Retinol or chemical peels (with physician supervision and Rx strength) can be used to tighten and thicken skin in the under eye - and these strong resurfacing chemicals are really the only skincare products that can reverse damage in this area. 2. Allergy Medicines - if youve got puffiness and itchy eyes, the culprit could be allergies! Try an OTC Zyrtec or Claritan to see if this helps. 3. Products with Caffeine or Cold Products can help temporarily reduce swelling - if the issue is water-related and not fat pad herniation 4. Hydroquinone and other skin lighteners work for those with dark pigmentation under their eyes (although do seek a doctors opinion first because usually darkness under the eyes is actually very thin skin with blood vessels showing through it - and lightening agents will not help, but could hurt thin skin) 5. Botox and Fillers and Lasers - truly, this is what most people need to achieve their goals

Yes, when the issue is that you have areas of indentation, fillers work wonderfully to correct under eye bags and dark circles.

The most reliable and consistent way is with Botox injections. We have tried every technology and treatment thats available for this - and many do work, but only for select patients (and without reliable forecasting of which patients will get good results) - including Miradry, Ultherapy, Axilase, and Laser Lipo. So we only offer Botox now - and its only injected by our physician injectors, to ensure you get a safe and effective treatment, reliably.

Effective May 2024, our price for this treatment is $1,100. This is a significant savings over purchasing the 100 units by vial because this treatment is different than Botox injections used to create a cosmetic result, and therefore Botox purchased at this rate is only to be used for this treatment.

Various factors, including stress, anxiety, heat, and certain foods or drinks, such as caffeine or spicy foods can exacerbate hyperhidrosis. Emotional and psychological stress are particularly common triggers that can intensify sweating episodes.

Hyperhidrosis most commonly affects the underarms, palms of the hands, soles of the feet, and face. However, hyperhidrosis can also occur in other parts of the body.

Physical activity, warm temperatures, emotional stress, and certain foods or beverages can trigger hyperhidrosis. In some cases, hyperhidrosis may occur without any apparent trigger, leading to spontaneous episodes of excessive sweating.

While hyperhidrosis does not necessarily get worse with age, it can persist throughout a person’s life if left untreated. In some cases, the condition may improve over time, while in others, it can remain constant or even worsen due to increased stress levels or other health changes associated with aging.

If hyperhidrosis is left untreated, it can significantly impact a person’s quality of life. Chronic excessive sweating can lead to skin infections, emotional distress, social embarrassment, and difficulty performing daily activities.

The papules and pustules symptomatic of rosacea may respond quickly to prescription medications, but the redness and flushing are less likely to improve without other types of therapies. Rosacea is a chronic condition and requires ongoing management following treatment. Many patients find it helpful to avoid certain “triggers” such as sun exposure, certain foods, or alcohol, and to follow an effective skin care regimen including sunblock, gentle cleansing, and moisturizing.

Pricing for rosacea treatment varies by the technology used, and overall cost of treatment will vary by the severity of your symptoms and the number of treatments you require. However, the range of cost per treatment session for the targeted treatments above typically ranges from $250-$450, depending on the technologies used and the size of the area treated, with one exception – CO2 Laser skin resurfacing (generally used only in the most severe cases) is much more expensive, at $2500 or more per treatment. The tradeoff is that this laser provides a very substantial improvement for the most severe cases of rosacea in a single treatment. Your complimentary rosacea consultation will include an exact price quote and a detailed treatment plan.

When it comes to downtime for rosacea treatment, we have to clarify what that means. In terms of taking time off from work or social events, almost all of these treatments have no downtime whatsoever (except the CO2 Laser treatments which are really reserved for the most severe cases). MicroBotox, Skin Classic, IPL, GentleYag, and Vbeam Perfecta, the most commonly used rosacea treatments, can leave some redness for a few hours and while your skin is red and sensitive, so we ask that you not reapply makeup or skincare products. However, that redness is almost always gone after an hour or two. PDT can vary in intensity based on the needs of the individual patient, but usually, redness does not persist after 24 hours of our rosacea treatments. You can find much more detailed information about the downtime of each of these treatments by clicking on their titles above and visiting their information pages on our website.

Every patient is different. The severity and type of rosacea varies by patient, as does the individual’s triggers and response to certain treatments. This is why treating rosacea effectively can take some trial-and-error, even with the best physicians. Our physicians have experience working with patients who are resistant to standard treatment protocols, and that means we have the most knowledge about how to remove redness and prevent flare-ups in patients who have failed with prescription medications, dietary changes, and other at-home remedies. We do recommend patients try these options, which are generally covered by insurance, before coming to see us for Botox, lasers, and other treatment options that are not covered by health insurance. That having been said, the best treatment for your rosacea is going to be unique to you and that’s why our consultations are complimentary because we believe every patient has the right to the information they need in order to make the best choices about their treatment and care.

It’s unlikely your flare-ups will resolve without interventional treatment, but once you have cleared up any flare-ups, it’s important you work to prevent future flare-ups, and that can be done through the treatment of your rosacea at home with: Wearing sunscreen (sunlight is a trigger for many, and sunburn is certainly going to create more broken blood vessels and red spots) Avoiding triggers like red wine, certain skincare products (that produce a stinging sensation), and anything that causes your skin to flush Using any and all prescribed treatments consistently If you are dealing with a current flare-up, please contact us. We can help you develop a plan to reduce your current symptoms and help you maintain those results.

This is very common because those red spider veins are broken capillaries, and they are too deep and too big to be treated by anything other than a laser or radiofrequency treatment (i.e. they’re not able to be treated by your medications or skincare). For those, generally, we use Vbeam, which is a pulse-dyed laser that is specifically attracted to red pigment. It works very well to permanently remove these visible blood vessels (telangiectasia). Most can be removed in a single treatment, but some bigger vessels will require a few treatments to completely remove. We can give you an idea of what the treatment plan will look like for you during your free consultation with the doctor. The good news is Vbeam laser is very affordable and produces substantial results for rosacea sufferers.

Collagen and elastin are two proteins in the skin that give it structure and support. As we age, collagen production slows down which leads to sagging skin. In the forehead, this creates folds and loose skin without a smooth appearance. When talking about treating forehead wrinkles and frown lines, using anti-aging treatments that are focused on stimulating collagen and elastin (like microneedling and laser skin rejuvenation) will not address the root cause of the wrinkles. The muscles that cause these wrinkles are very strong and they will continue making wrinkles no matter how much your skin cells are stimulated. This is why using wrinkle-relaxing ‘tox and hyaluronic acid fillers, which work at the root cause of the wrinkles, are the preferred choices for enhancing the appearance of the forehead. Some studies have even suggested that the act of injecting filler can stimulate collagen to a small degree, so you can benefit from both skin rejuvenation and wrinkle reduction with an injectable treatment.

While the effects of aging occur to all of us, there are some ways to prevent wrinkles if you start early and stay consistent. Our aesthetic experts know that starting to use Botox in your late 20s and no later than 30 can help prevent the appearance of wrinkles that occur due to frequent muscle movement, including lines and wrinkles throughout the upper face. You should also wear sunscreen and sunglasses to prevent skin damage and unnecessary squinting in the sun. Other than wearing sunscreen, these are behaviors you can adopt to help prevent and improve these wrinkles and other signs of aging: Invest in high-quality skincare – there’s a big difference in the impact of a 0.1% retinol from Olay vs. a 1% Retin-A prescription, both in cell turnover and skin quality. The same goes for other results-focused skincare products. You don’t need to invest in a ton of different products either, just 4 quality skincare products can make a huge difference in your appearance. Treat early with Botox and be consistent – you can get away with longer between treatments when you’re younger, but as you age, if you want to prevent frown lines and forehead wrinkles from needing filler as well as Botox, you need to be retreating every 4-5 months, max. Try to retrain your muscles to not make as intense or frequent facial expressions. Frowning and raising your brows are things you can improve upon with dedicated effort. Both frowning and squinting are often signs you need to wear darker, larger sunglasses (or you need a Rx change on your glasses). Consider how you can make this a part of your “new normal” – Botox can help you along this path, if you are intentional about using it to help retrain those muscles.

Frown lines on the forehead can be effectively treated with injectables like Botox or Dysport. These neuromodulators relax the muscles that cause wrinkles, smoothing out lines between the eyebrows and the forehead.

Frown lines, also known as “11s,” are the vertical lines that form between the eyebrows due to repeated muscle contractions when frowning. Forehead lines, on the other hand, are horizontal wrinkles that appear across the forehead when you raise your eyebrows or express surprise.

Repeated facial movements, such as raising eyebrows, are the primary cause of forehead wrinkles. Over time, the skin loses elasticity, and repeated muscle contractions form permanent lines.

A typical Botox or filler treatment for frown lines or forehead wrinkles usually takes about 15–30 minutes, depending on the extent of the treated areas.

The effects of Botox or Dysport injections typically last 3 to 4 months, depending on your body’s metabolism and how often you undergo treatment. Dermal fillers can last longer, ranging from 6 months to over a year.

Laugh lines are caused by the repetitive motion of smiling! Many people find these endearing, as they indicate a happy life. But for those who want theirs lessened or removed, treatments are available.

Thread Lifts or a skin tightening treatment like Sofwave or Ulthera are the best treatments for smile lines that don’t involve fillers. Fat transfer and facelift surgery would be 2 other options that work well, if plastic surgery is something you’re open to exploring.

What do you mean by naturally? If you consider growing your own collagen naturally then we recommend either hyperdilute Radiesse, Sculptra, Sofwave, or Ultherapy. If you mean without treatments of any kind, you may consider trying to stop smiling (dont laugh! – this will truly work if youre very young and only have very fine lines or no lines in the skin at rest).

Yes! You can get rid of the lines, folds, and wrinkles – but you will always naturally have an indentation in the face as it transitions from cheek to lip. Check out our before and after photos above if you want to see what we’re talking about.

Fillers, Thread Lifts, Non-Surgical Skin Tightening treatments (Ultherapy, Sofwave, Thermage, Exillis Ultra), and Plastic Surgery (facelift or fat transfer filling) are all options to eliminate smile lines.

Smile lines filler and thread lifts can make your smile lines disappear overnight – no, really, they work immediately, and you can be ready to show off your results the very next day!

In a clinical trial, the majority of LATISSE users saw a significant improvement by two months. Optimal results can take up to 16 weeks for some people.

If you miss a day, don’t try to “catch up.” Instead just apply it like normal the following day. Using LATISSE more than once a day will not increase the growth of your eyelashes more than daily use.

Your lashes will eventually return to their previous appearance over several weeks or months.

The safety and effectiveness of LATISSE has been supported in many clinical trials. The most common side effect after using the LATISSE solution was itchy or red eyes, reported in about four percent of users during testing. These symptoms went away after patients discontinued use of LATISSE.

LATISSE is a great, safe and effective way to increase the fullness of your lashes. Call today to consult with one of our expert physicians to see if LATISSE is right for you!

Eyelid lift surgery (blepharoplasty) is an effective solution to repair sagging or drooping upper eyelids.

Drooping eyelids may be present at birth, or caused by certain illnesses, including diabetes, Horner syndrome, Myasthenia gravis, stroke, or swelling due to a stye.

Eyelid skin can be tightened during eyelid lift surgery. Excess skin will be removed, and the remaining skin sutured in a position to tighten the skin for a more youthful appearance.

Dermal filler and Botox can help to tighten excess skin and smooth wrinkles around the eyes and eyelids for a more youthful appearance.

To eliminate excess skin on the upper eyelids for good, blepharoplasty surgery is the most effective option. Excess skin and fat are removed from the eyelid, creating a more open eye and rejuvenated appearance.

Male and female-pattern hair loss is also called androgenic alopecia. We know the hormone androgen plays a big role in how this hair loss occurs. But while we know it is androgen-dependent, we also know that high androgen levels alone won’t necessarily cause hair loss. You need the perfect mix of receptors, hormones, oxidative stress, genetics, nutrition, health, and even prostaglandin changes working together to create hair loss. Because we know that there are multiple forces at play causing the hair loss, we want to attack from multiple pathways when treating androgenic alopecea, or female and male-pattern hair loss. Genetic factors predispose certain men and women to hair loss and balding, but the way in which we inherit these traits isn’t fully understood yet. For example, we know 80% of Caucasian men will experience male-pattern hair loss by age 70.

Absolutely! Everyone deserves time to relax and give their bodies a healthy refresh. Aesthetic or medspa treatments are for everyone.

Some of the most popular cosmetic procedures for men are liposuction and dermal fillers, which can be used for a non-surgical nose job, neck lift, or chin augmentation. Men commonly wish to treat acne and acne scars, undereye bags, the jawline, and forehead wrinkles or frown lines.

Men receive cosmetic treatment for a variety of reasons. Sometimes treatment is reconstructive and other times men simply want to enhance their appearance or reduce signs of aging.

Yes! Plastic surgery for men is extremely common and there are even some procedures such as gynecomastia that are designed specifically for men.

Although the same plastic surgery procedures can be performed on men and women, there are some slight changes in the surgical technique. For example, a male rhinoplasty may be performed to broaden the nose while a female rhinoplasty often slims and lifts the nose.

Sun exposure, looking down at your phone repeatedly, smoking, and poor diet could be factors speeding up the aging process of your neck.

Facial exercises that involve lifting the chin can be helpful. Try pointing your chin to the ceiling and make a chewing motion or purse your lips then repeat this motion for a minute or two.

Retinol stimulates collagen production and can give your sagging neck skin a slightly tightened effect.

A surgical neck lift is perhaps the best treatment since it can treat more severe cases of aging skin. However, every person responds differently to different treatments and surgery may not be necessary if you have a mild case of sagging skin.

Neck creams can be worth your money if they have effective ingredients. Look for ingredients like hyaluronic acid, vitamin C, peptides, and zinc.

Your nose will stop growing once you reach adulthood. If you think your nose is too large, you should consider rhinoplasty to remove cartilage from inside the nose and slim down its appearance.

The most desirable nose shape varies between each person, but a popular nose shape is slightly small and straight with a gently upturned tip.

As you age, collagen production slows down and your skin begins to lose its structure. The weakened skin can cause your nasal tip to droop which makes the nose appear longer.

A saddle nose deformity happens when the nasal bridge collapses in the middle or you do not have enough height on your nasal bridge. This often causes your nasal tip to appear significantly upturned.

Dermal fillers add volume to various spots on the nose to create a straighter appearance. This is an effective solution for minor cosmetic changes.

Although you cannot always shrink your pores, you can minimize the appearance of enlarged pores by keeping your skin clean and healthy with a quality skincare routine.

The holes left behind when you extract blackheads are enlarged pores. Overtime, these holes may reduce by using retinol or glycolic acid or by receiving aesthetician services.

As you get older, your skin becomes lax and starts to sag because collagen production decreases. As your skin stretches and sags, your pores enlarge.

Make sure to thoroughly remove all your makeup before you go to bed and clean your skin with a gel-based or water-based cleanser twice a day. Exfoliate regularly and make sure to wear sunscreen every day to protect your skin from harmful UV radiation.

Retinol has been proven to increase cell turnover which plumps the skin and reduces the appearance of enlarged pores.

Every person’s skin is unique so each person may respond to treatment differently. Some of the best cosmetic procedures are laser treatments, microneedling, and exfoliating chemical peels.

If blackheads are not removed, your skin may become irritated or inflamed. Untreated blackheads can lead to acne as a result of skin infection.

The cost to get rid of sebaceous hyperplasia will depend upon a variety of factors: How large are the sebaceous hyperplasia? The small S. H. do well with one treatment of Skin Classic. However, the larger sebaceous hyperplasia will often require 2 treatments. What type of skincare are you using? If you use products that are too rich or occlusive, or if you do not manually exfoliate and or use a retinoid, you are precipitating a cycle of creating an environment where sebaceous hyperplasia thrive and results will be difficult to achieve or maintain. Pricing for most treatments we use for sebaceous hyperplasia is based on the total number of spots or lesions we are treating.

Sebaceous hyperplasia is seen more commonly in the male population and more specifically in Caucasian males. Women also get sebaceous hyperplasia and we do see it in some darker skin types as well. We generally see it more in middle aged patients.

While chemical peels do not eliminate sebaceous hyperplasia, they can help to keep the pores clear and to remove the old dead skin cells. Also depending upon the ingredients in the peel, it may reduce the size of the sebaceous hyperplasia.

Microneedling does not eliminate sebaceous hyperplasia – however, microneedling can foster a healthy, smooth skin environment where sebaceous hyperplasia may not be as prevalent. RF microneedling is a bit more effective as it also uses radiofrequency heat. However, that is not the treatment of choice at Reflections Center. We prefer Skin Classic as it can direct the heat into the individual bumps with greater precision.

No, unfortunately not – wrinkles are the result of repetitive movements damaging the skin’s collagen support network and killing off the thin layer of fat that supports the skin from underneath. Water will make your skin glow, and it will help make your skin more resilient to wrinkles (keeping them at bay for longer), but it cannot reverse the damage once it’s done.

Between 25 and 30, most people start to notice fine lines across their forehead, between their brows (frown lines or 11’s in the glabella), on the outside corners of their eyes (crow’s feet), or around their mouth (smile lines or nasolabial folds). All except for smile lines are well-treated with a light sprinkling of Botox. Smile lines react well to filler injections.

Darkness on the thighs, particularly around the bikini line and on the inner thighs, is a reaction to friction and/or heat. People who experience this kind of hyperpigmentation reaction are unlikely to be able to get and maintain any clearance of this darkness on their thighs unless they can also stop the thighs from overheating and rubbing together. For this reason, it might be important to either lose weight or have a fat reduction treatment in this area, as a part of your treatment (although that will not remove existing pigmentation). To remove the darkness, you’ll need either lasers or skin lighteners, or a combination of the two. Hydroquinone can be effective, as can a Q-Switched Yag Laser. However, because people with this condition have already proven their skin is sensitive and can react poorly to irritation, using lasers or prescription-strength lighteners requires a gentle approach and the nuance a provider acquires over decades of treating complex skin concerns.

As you age and the skin on your knees becomes thinner and more crepe-like, you have some options of helping to slow the process but little hope of completely reversing it.

Increasing age Having family members with vein problems Hormonal changes during puberty, pregnancy, and menopause, or from birth control pills Increased amount of blood and pressure of the expanding uterus during pregnancy Obesity, leg injury, prolonged standing, and other things that weaken vein valves

The force of gravity, the pressure of body weight, and the tough task of carrying blood from the legs to the heart are all responsible.

The symptoms of varicose veins can include: Aching pain Easily tired legs Leg heaviness Swelling in the legs Darkening of the skin (in severe cases) Numbness in the legs Itching or irritated rash in the legs

You can take these steps to help prevent visible veins and circulation problems: Exercise regularly to improve your leg strength and circulation Maintain a healthy weight Do not cross your legs when sitting Elevate your legs when resting as much as possible Do not stand or sit for long periods of time Wear elastic support stockings and avoid tight clothing around the waist or legs Eat a low-salt, high-fiber diet

Spider veins, also called telangiectasias, are tiny visible vessels just underneath the skin. They develop most commonly on the face and legs. Varicose veins are distended veins beneath the skin. They may appear as bluish bumps and often cause discomfort. Those with unsightly varicose veins and aching pain often choose to visit a vascular specialist for surgery or endovenus therapy to remove them. If you have both varicose and spider veins, your varicose veins must be treated first. Treating spider veins first is not recommended because, in the presence of varicose veins, they are bound to return.

As we age or go through hormonal fluctuations (pregnancy, birth control, menopause, certain disease states, etc.), our skin takes a beating as women, because a drop in estrogen is a drop in collagen production for us. Many women find that as their estrogen drops in their 50s and beyond, that they develop a series of very fine lines at the back of their arms, just above their elbows. This is skin that has lost its elasticity and firmness due to a lack of collagen. Most people aren’t going to have this surgically removed, though you could. Instead, we’ve found you can stimulate the body to regrow the collagen in this area with biostimulatory fillers. These seem to work particularly well for areas with this very thin skin. Of course, lasers, microneedling, RF Microneedling, Ultherapy, Thermage, Sofwave, ThermiTight, and all of the other wonderful collagen-inducing technologies at our disposal would work in this area as well – but we’ve found these injections are able to be targeted to a specific area with precision, are relatively affordable and easy to have done (no downtime, no numbing, very rarely any swelling or redness), and that makes it an easy choice for this area.

Some people have genetic predisposition to carry fat in their arms, just like some women tend to carry weight in their hips more than their abdomen. You might just be predisposed to carrying more fat in your arms. Liposuction is a great option for people who naturally carry more fat in their arms and who want a different proportion to their body.

Body contouring refers to surgical or non-surgical procedures that reshape and tighten certain areas of the body.

Muscle sculpting is a non-invasive body contouring procedure that builds muscle and eliminates fat.

Sculpting eliminates fat to slim down certain areas of the body and toning increases muscle mass and muscle definition. Muscle sculpting and toning are combined in our body contouring procedures.

Exercises like crunches, planks, and cross-training can tighten your stomach muscles and tone your abdomen. We also offer non-surgical sculpting and toning procedures that can tighten loose skin on the stomach.

Simply put, muscle sculpting lasts for as long as you maintain it. As long as you continue to live a healthy and active lifestyle with regular weight training and sufficient protein intake, you can enjoy your results.

It’s possible to see minor changes with a single session of body sculpting, but the best results come with subsequent treatments. We typically recommend a package of four to six treatments with results peaking at around 4-6 weeks afterward.

Muscle sculpting is not painful per se – rather, it feels similar to an intense workout. You may have some soreness the next few days after treatment, but for most patients, it’s perfectly manageable.

Body sculpting is one of the few ways in which you can specifically reduce belly fat. Spot reducing is not otherwise possible with diet and exercise, making body sculpting one of the best ways to lose fat in areas where you tend to carry it.

Body sculpting does not necessarily cause you to lose pounds – rather, it helps change the composition of your body to include less fat. Although you may see changes on the scale, they are typically minor and will not have a significant impact on your overall weight.

It depends - but most patients age 35+ will have significant enough loss of fat volume in their cheeks, that some cheek filler could benefit them. If were not just talking about age-related changes - perhaps youve lost weight and thats caused your cheeks to prematurely deflate, or you want to tweak your natural cheeks and change their contour - in that case, fillers can be used as early as age 16 (though usually in minors theyre reserved for reconstructive work).

1ml or 1cc of cheek filler is only about 1/5th of a teaspoon, which in the majority of cases does not yield a substantial result for cheek augmentation. Typically check augmentation results warrant at least 1 syringe per cheek. We offer a complimentary consultation where we can access how much dermal filler will be necessary for you to achieve your goals.

Any medical procedure including cheek fillers can \u201cgo wrong\u201d. We do see regularly see complications from cheek fillers done by untrained providers, mostly non physicians (nurses, physician assistants and dentists) who have a paucity of knowledge, training and experience. Often patients are left with unnatural looking results due to overinflation of the cheeks or from injections into the wrong areas. Many of these patients were not candidates for cheek fillers in the first place. Other complications we see are wound infections and lumps and bumps. The most catastrophic complication from a dermal filler injection is blindness due to inadvertently injecting filler into a blood vessel. Deep understanding of facial anatomy and proper techniques dramatically minimizes the risk of such a complication. Our Physicians are properly trained and highly experienced. They are also meticulously clean and take every precaution to prevent side effects. Cheek injections achieve great results when done properly. The results are natural appearing and long lasting and result in incredible patient satisfaction.

Not exactly - but it can create a lifted look. As you age, your mid-face (cheekbones area) will naturally lose fat volume. This becomes noticeable in most people in their 30s and 40s. Think of your skin like a balloon - if you take out the air, that balloon will sag downward. So jowls are actually the impact of fat loss in the cheeks, and when we use filler to replace that volume in the cheeks, were not exactly lifting the face, but we are restoring it to a more youthful appearance, and the skin (which actually doesnt stretch out and lose elasticity for several more decades) will be smooth and lifted, like it was before.

Our physicians at Reflections generally prefer to use thinner fillers such as Restylane, Restylane Silk or Volbella for vertical lip lines. In some people who desire greater improvement, an ultrasound or laser treatment may be used in combination with filler. Recently biostimulatory agents like Radiesse have also been used to create structure in the white part of the lip.

Yes, and most of the time we use Botox in combination with a thin dermal filler in the white part of the lip to give the lip more support without changing its size. Vertical lip lines may be caused by repeated pursing, sleeping on the side and loss of some of the underlying bone or dental support. While Botox may help soften vertical lip lines, a very small amount must be used so as not to completely wipe out muscle movement. Therefore, it will need to be repeated at a shorter interval than when using Botox for the upper face.

There are several techniques in providing hand injections. For example, some doctors make multiple injections in small amounts between the tendons, while others may make one large injection in the center of the hand, and then direct the filler to where it needs to go once it’s under the skin. At Reflections, the physicians used blunt tipped instruments called cannulas to inject, as this is a more comfortable, less traumatic means of injections. Non the less, due to the large number of blood vessels in the hands, bruising after treatment is possible. All of the fillers that we use at our New Jersey offices are proven safe and FDA-Approved, but only Radiesse & Lyft have clinical trials and FDA approval proving they are effective at reducing the impact of aging in the hands.

On average, patients can expect to spend between $750 – $1600 for their hand filler procedure performed by our physician injectors in our New Jersey offices. The final cost of your dermal filler will vary, depending on the product used for the procedure and the number of syringes necessary. Regardless of which one you and your injector choose to use, you’ll likely need 1-2 syringes per session – and some patient find they do need a second session (which can be planned after 6 weeks, when the finalized results from the filler have settled in – before then expect some swelling, which can actually make your hands look smoother, so not a bad thing afterall, right?).

All fillers can work fine, but the selection is based on the firmness of the support needed. Before your procedure, a proper diagnostic evaluation will be carried out on your hands to determine which filler will work best. While Lyft and Voluma work effectively for restoration of soft tissue, Radiesse produces more firm results. Therefore, the question about which filler is best fit for your hands depends largely on which tissue you’ve lost due to aging, and not choosing the cheapest option. It’s important to consult with an experienced injector to get the right results.

Like most injectable procedures, there should be no true downtime after receiving hand fillers. Patients may return to their normal activities after the procedure. However, in some people, there are transient side effects such as minor swelling and bruising, that may make certain activities less comfortable. Usually with hand fillers, this won’t prevent you from doing normal activities, especially after the first day. You may also have bruising, but it will heal quickly as well. Most people return to their normal routine immediately after their appointments. Meanwhile, you’re advised to avoid strenuous activity and exercise for at least 24 hours after the procedure, because raising blood pressure can make any small bruising into a much bigger bruise. If you do find you have large bruises, please contact us – we offer free laser therapy in each of our New Jersey locations to help speed up bruise healing to all of our injectables patients.

Hand filler treatments can last anywhere from 9 to 12 months, depending on the filler used and your body’s metabolism. Some patients may see longer-lasting results, but maintenance treatments are recommended to keep the hands youthful and smooth.

Regular touch-up treatments every 9 to 12 months are suggested to maintain volume and hydration in the hands, which helps prevent the appearance of wrinkles and veins.

On average, 1 to 2 syringes per hand are needed for a noticeable improvement, though some may require more.

Most patients achieve their desired results with one-hand filler treatment. To maintain results, follow-up treatments are typically spaced out by 9 to 12 months.

Hand filler treatments are generally well-tolerated and cause minimal discomfort. The fillers usually contain lidocaine, a numbing agent, to help reduce pain during the injection process.

Swelling is going to happen any time you are injected with anything, that’s the body’s normal response. But it’s not always visible to others (think about the soreness in your arm after an immunization – that’s swelling, but it’s not usually visible to others). The lips are an area that’s very prone to swelling (think of those lip-plumping glosses – that’s how those work!). So everyone should expect to have some swelling in their lips if they are injected in that area. The degree of swelling depends upon your body’s sensitivity, which filler or product is used (some cause more swelling than others), and what technique is being used to inject.

Lip fillers are a non-surgical procedure so you can expect a quick treatment with little recovery time. Lip fillers will also help you meet your aesthetic goals and give you a more youthful appearance by adding volume to the lips.

Although these risks are minimal, bleeding, scarring, and infection are possible with lip filler injections, so it is important to receive treatment from a licensed medical practitioner.

Lip fillers are a safe procedure that can boost your self-esteem. There are minimal risks or complications associated with this procedure.

If too much lip filler is used, you can permanently stretch the skin or create an asymmetrical appearance.

A topical anesthetic or numbing cream can be applied to your lips to minimize any discomfort you might feel while the lip filler is being injected.

Lip fillers are not permanent which makes the procedure easily customizable. Depending on the filler used, results can last anywhere from a few months to a year.

It is recommended that you do not receive lip fillers while you are pregnant or breastfeeding. Lip fillers tend to stay within the injection sites, but it is possible for the filler to spread.

Lip filler recovery is very minimal. Swelling, redness, and soreness around the injection site are common but these symptoms will subside within a couple of days after treatment.

At Reflections, we price our dermal fillers and Botox, the FDA-approved products used to achieve youthful facial contours, by the amount used. For Botox, that’s $17 per unit, with most patients using between 15-45 units. For dermal fillers, we price by the syringe, starting at $650 a syringe. Most liquid facelifts range between $2,500 – 3,500 at our New Jersey office locations. You’ll receive a quote on your exact pricing based on your individual needs and wants during your free consultation with the doctor. We also offer financing options for all our procedures, as well as an exclusive Reflections Rewards Plus program, which will allow you to enjoy loyalty savings on your treatments at either of our offices.

You should expect some swelling and redness after your treatment. For most patients any redness resolves in a couple of hours and can be easily covered with makeup, allowing people to return to normal activities immediately after treatment. Swelling should be mild to moderate, although certain areas, like the lips, are more prone to swelling, and may stay swollen for a few days. Most patients find this swelling is mild enough that others wouldn’t notice it, and so it shouldn’t prevent you from returning to work or attending social events. Bruising is rare but possible. Activities that raise your blood pressure, such as intense workouts, can increase your risk of bruising, so we suggest you avoid this for 12 hours following treatment. Should you develop a bruise, we will happily provide you with complimentary laser treatments to help speed up the healing process. Vigorous rubbing of the treated area may negatively affect your results. Washing your face gently shouldn’t create a problem, but laying face-down in a massage chair for an hour could be problematic, so plan to avoid anything like that for at least 24 hours.

A liquid facelift is a minimally invasive injectable procedure that is generally considered to be very comfortable by our patients. Botox injections are superficial and patients find these small pricks to be quick and easy. Filler injections are often placed deeper, but most filler products come with lidocaine, a local anesthetic, mixed into their formulation, which numbs the area as it’s being treated. On the rare occasion that we use a filler without lidocaine, or for patients who are sensitive to treatment, we can use both topical numbing creams and lidocaine injections to ensure the experience is comfortable.

There are several different named techniques for liquid facelift floating around the internet these days. The 8 Point Facelift is a formulaic approach to the liquid facelift. It outlines exactly where to inject, in what order. While it may be a good framework for teaching newbie injectors how to view the face, we don’t subscribe to a one-size-fits-all approach like this technique advocates. A One-Needle Liquid Facelift is a technique that uses a single opening to inject the dermal fillers beneath the skin throughout the lower half of the face. We try to limit the number of injection points we use, and we use cannulas like this technique does (because it helps limit swelling and bruising), but we don’t limit ourselves to a single injection point for everyone. Why? Because we care most about your results. Whether you have one, two, or more injection points doesn’t affect your comfort during the procedure, overall risk, or the timing of the procedure. Our physician injectors are trained in all of the top injection techniques and focus on creating the most natural results. We promise you’ll be pleasantly surprised with what we’re able to achieve during your liquid facelift procedure.

A vampire facelift uses platelet-rich plasma, a component of blood responsible for wound-healing and regeneration, to help patients look younger with regenerated skin. Paired with a technique like microneedling, lasers, or fillers, a vampire facelift is an effective way to jumpstart your skin’s natural healing and re-growth process. A liquid facelift, on the other hand, simply uses dermal fillers to improve the profile of the face.

No, a liquid facelift does not require surgery. This procedure uses injectable treatments, such as dermal fillers and neuromodulators, to restore volume, reduce wrinkles, and lift facial features without invasive techniques.

Most patients experience minimal discomfort during a liquid facelift. The treatment typically causes a mild stinging sensation, and any post-treatment tenderness or swelling usually subsides within a few days.

Typically, one liquid facelift treatment can provide noticeable results, although touch-up sessions may be recommended depending on your aesthetic goals.

A liquid facelift addresses various signs of aging, including volume loss, fine lines, and sagging. It helps lift and contour areas like the cheeks, jawline, and under-eye regions, resulting in a youthful appearance.

Results from a liquid facelift typically last between 6 and 18 months, depending on the types of fillers or neuromodulators used and individual factors like metabolism and lifestyle.

Yes, it is very common to see a brow lift after having temple fillers. Though you shouldn’t expect an improvement for hooded eyes where the excess skin in the eyelid is the primary cause (because that tends to be due to loss of volume in the eyelid and loss of elasticity in that eyelid skin, which cannot be influenced too much by an area so far away as the temples).

There are different techniques to inject temple filler. The safest approach is injecting temple filler deeply close to the bone. With this technique it is rare for the temple filler to migrate. Migration occurs commonly with superficial injections, which are not indicated for this area, as they are more dangerous. Temple filler can move if it is injected too superficially. The patient may notice a lump of filler which can move (migrate) over time.

Choices of treatment for hollow temples include Hyaluronic Acid fillers such as Juvederm, Volbella or Restylane. Additionally, a bio-stimulatory filler such as Sculptra may be used. The other options for temple hollows, which are not recommended by our physicians, are fat transfer or Radiesse. The reason these are not recommended is that they are not reversible. In the event that there was a nodule, or you didn’t want them, they cannot be removed.

Temple fillers should only be injected by an experienced physician. It is not an area to be treated by non-physician practitioners such as physician assistants or nurses due to the risk of severe complications, when not injected properly. Knowledge of patient anatomy and experience is essential to a safe and effective result. The risk of a poor injection technique is intravascular occlusion, which means it was injected into a blood vessel. This can lead to severe complications in the skin as well as visual defects. The safest plane to inject temple filler is near the bone where blood vessels do not exist. In addition, we try to inject from an exact location on the skin where blood vessels are less likely to be.

Temple fillers generally last between 1-2 years and in some cases longer.

Sleeping on your side will not ruin the fillers placed in your temples, but it can flatten out dermal fillers (as well as the natural fat) on cheeks, especially shortly after your treatment. Sleeping on your side shortly after having cheek filler can not only cause the filler to depress, but can also cause it to migrate (move) to other areas.

Temple fillers are extremely comfortable, provided the physician injector is highly experienced and uses the proper technique.

Although many different fillers can be used in the temples, the “ideal” fillers are Voluma, Restylane Lyft, and Juvederm ultra plus. It is not advised to use Radiesse as a temple filler due to the fact that any potential complication cannot be reversed.

Temple fillers help improve the proportions of the face and notably help a patient to look more youthful and attractive. Furthermore, the effect from temple filler is “under the radar”, meaning people will notice you look better, but not what happened!

No, Botox is not implicated with sunken temples. Aesthetically over-injection of cheeks can sometimes make temples look hollow even if they are not, but Botox isn’t causing the fat or muscle in the temples to prematurely wane.

These are the best products for under-eye bags: 1. Retinol or chemical peels (with physician supervision and Rx strength) can be used to tighten and thicken skin in the under-eye area, and these strong resurfacing chemicals are really the only skincare products that can reverse damage in this area. 2. Allergy Medicines – if you’ve got puffiness and itchy eyes, the culprit could be allergies! Try an OTC Zyrtec or Claritin to see if this helps. 3. Products with caffeine or cold medicine can help temporarily reduce swelling, assuming the issue is water-related and not fat pad herniation. 4. Hydroquinone and other skin lighteners work for those with dark pigmentation under their eyes (although do seek a doctor’s opinion first because usually darkness under the eyes is actually very thin skin with blood vessels showing through it – and lightening agents will not help, but could hurt thin skin) 5. Botox, fillers, microneedling, lasers, regenerative cosmetic treatments, and/or surgery – truly, this is what most people need to achieve their goals.

Yes, when the issue is that you have areas of indentation, fillers work wonderfully to correct under eye bags and dark circles.

The best treatment for dark circles under the eyes depends on the underlying cause. Options include dermal fillers, fat transfer, lasers for hyperpigmentation and blue veins, and topical medications.

Yes, it is possible to reduce and sometimes eliminate under-eye circles through consistent skincare routines, lifestyle changes like getting adequate sleep and staying hydrated, and using targeted treatments to address specific causes such as allergies or pigmentation. At Reflections Center for Cosmetic Medicine, we offer an array of treatment options to address dark circles.

Dark under-eye circles can be caused by various factors, including genetics, thinning skin due to aging, lack of sleep, dehydration, allergies, pigmentation irregularities, and lifestyle habits like smoking or excessive alcohol consumption.

Preventing under-eye circles involves practicing good skincare habits such as using sunscreen and gentle moisturizers, getting enough sleep, managing allergies, staying hydrated, avoiding smoking and excessive alcohol, and addressing any underlying health issues contributing to the dark circles.

The duration of results from treatments for dark circles can vary depending on the cause and the specific treatment used. For example, topical treatments, fillers, and laser therapy may offer temporary results that require ongoing use for sustained benefits.

The best treatment for dark under-eye circles varies based on the cause. Options include injectable fillers to address volume loss, laser therapy to improve skin tone, and topical creams with ingredients like vitamin C or retinol.

While some people may experience complete resolution, others may need ongoing treatment to manage the appearance of dark circles, as genetics, skin type, and lifestyle habits can influence their persistence.

As we age, the skin under the eyes becomes thinner, making blood vessels more visible and creating a shadowed appearance.

Preventing dark under-eye circles involves a combination of skincare and lifestyle adjustments. Using sunscreen, getting adequate sleep, staying hydrated, and maintaining a balanced diet can help.

Absolutely! Injectables and dermal fillers such as Botox, lasers, and a quality skincare routine will all help to get rid of and prevent crows feet.

Crows feet are small wrinkles around the eyes that are caused by facial expressions, especially eye movements like squinting or laughing. The loss of skin elasticity (its ability to bounce back) combined with normal facial expressions causes wrinkles to gradually develop around the eyes.

Crows feet can begin to develop as early as your mid-20s but most commonly become apparent by the time you are in your mid-late 30s. It depends on many factors like how well you care for your skin and the natural

Botox is one of the most effective ways to get rid of crows feet and the results are instant.

Although Botox is one of the most common treatments, there are several other injectables and fillers we use that create beautiful results and effectively treat wrinkles around the eyes. Laser treatments and skin care products with retinoids are also great treatment options.

You’ll start your journey with a consultation with our plastic surgeon, Dr. Joseph Fodero. He will discuss your medical history with you and perform a physical exam to determine your health and current needs. Then the two of you will discuss the best options to help you reach your goals, and you’ll cover all facets of your needs and goals, including ability to take time off work, budget, any lifestyle concerns (like wanting to get back to working out quickly, or picking up small children), as well as your feelings about scarring and anesthesia. He will help you to understand what the realistic expectations for your outcome are, as well as what tradeoffs you may have between different treatment options. Finally, our patient care coordinators will help you to schedule your procedures, either in the Reflections Center private surgical suite located within our Martinsville Office, or at another private surgical suite (there are many options across New Jersey). Before you schedule your procedure, Dr. Fodero will explain the individual healing timeline and intensity you can expect based on the surgery you two have decided upon.

This varies based on the surgical procedure options that are being combined for your surgery, as well as the details of your medical history and anatomy. However, here are some general ideas to help you understand what might be involved: Most people are going to be wearing a compression sleeve garment after the surgery to help with keeping swelling down, improve circulation as you heal, and support the tissues along the scar line to encourage as little scarring as possible. You should expect swelling and bruising that’s going to last around 2 weeks. It’s going to be worst around day 2 and then start to taper off. You will likely feel significantly less sore around day 4 or 5. You won’t be allowed to work out with your arms or pick up heavy loads until around 4-6 weeks after this procedure, though you will likely feel like you could before then – it’s best not to stress your sutures, for the final result of the scar.

Like with all surgeries, there are risks to arm lift surgery. Under the care of an experienced, board-certified plastic surgeon like Dr. Fodero, those risks are minimal and extremely rare. Most people experience soreness for up to two weeks or more after their surgery, and other minor complications might be a poor appearance of a scar or less-than-desired results.

Most people can be good candidates for arm lift surgery. People with blood clotting disorders, serious underlying health concerns, active infections, or other conditions might not be good candidates at the current time.

We don’t perform surgical arm lifts under local anesthesia because it’s nearly impossible to make a patient comfortable for this level of surgery, without the use of general anesthesia. Minimally invasive options, including Laser Lipo and Skin Tightening, can be performed under fully local anesthesia.

You can have an arm lift surgery so long as you are healthy enough for surgery. However, if your weight is fluctuating, we recommend you hit and maintain a stable weight for at least 6 months before your surgery, so that future weight fluctuations do not hurt your results.

Smoking is a problem not only for your safety during general anesthesia, but also as it can lead to situations where you don’t heal well after surgery. Since arm lifts leave a large, long suture line that needs to heal, we cannot risk a non-healing wound with smokers. You would need to stop smoking at least 1 month prior to surgery and for at least 3 months after surgery. We do not perform laser lipo or skin tightening on smokers, either, due to concerns about healing.

Most women are good candidates for breast augmentation when they are in overall good health. Breast augmentation candidates usually feel that their breasts are too small, asymmetrical, or have become “deflated” after drastic weight loss, pregnancy, breastfeeding, or aging. You should avoid smoking and taking blood thinning medication before and after your procedure and your plastic surgeon will give you more detailed instructions to follow.

After breast augmentation, you can expect some soreness, bruising, and swelling. A special supportive bra should be worn as advised by your plastic surgeon and drains will likely be put in place to collect fluid. Pain medication can help alleviate discomfort and minimize swelling and your plastic surgeon will give you detailed instructions on how much to take and when. After your surgery, you’ll need to rest and recover for at least a week before returning to everyday activities such as work or school. Swelling and some residual discomfort can persist for several weeks after surgery. However, most patients can return to their normal routines and activities, including exercise, about a month after the procedure. Your plastic surgeon will monitor your healing during follow-up appointments to ensure you achieve your ideal results. As your implants settle and swelling continues to go down, you’ll see your final results emerge after a few months.

Breast augmentation is very common and generally safe. There are some complications that may arise, such as implant rupture or capsular contracture. Capsular contracture occurs when the scar tissue around the breast implant becomes hard, which puts pressure on the implant and can even displace it. Capsular contracture and breast implant rupture can both be resolved surgically and by taking some preventative steps during recovery.

Breast augmentation cost varies because it’s a highly customizable procedure. In the United States, the average cost of a breast augmentation is between $3,000-$4,000.

Breast implants should generally not interfere with your ability to breastfeed. Because breastfeeding can change the breasts, it’s often recommended to wait until after you are done having children so that your results are not affected. Additionally, certain incision types can make it easier to breastfeed in the future.

Good candidates for breast augmentation are women looking to improve the size, shape, and projection of their breasts. You should be in good overall health and able to undergo surgery.

Your plastic surgeon can recommend the right implants for you based on your goals. Keep in mind that implants do not directly translate to cup sizes, but are rather measured in cubic centimeters (CCs). This means it can be more helpful to have a general idea of your ideal size rather than a specific cup size.

Your plastic surgeon can take care to ensure your scars are not visible by placing them in the natural creases of your skin. Additionally, we can recommend the right silicone scar treatments or professional skincare options to reduce the appearance of scarring.

Teardrop-shaped implants are a new kind of implant that offer more natural-looking results than traditional round implants. They are sometimes called ‘anatomical’ implants because they mimic the natural shape of the breast, providing less volume at the top of the breast and tapering downward.

Breast implants are designed to be life-long medical devices. However, it’s common to have them replaced based on factors like complications, changing preferences, or new implant technologies.

Although both types of implants are made with a silicone shell, they differ in their filling (silicone gel or saline). Each comes with pros and cons— for example, silicone implants can offer a more natural feel while saline implants can come with a lower cost. Your plastic surgeon can recommend the right kind for you during your consultation.

You should plan on taking around two weeks away from work and regular activities. Although swelling will continue to subside in the months after surgery, everyone recovers at different rates so your plastic surgeon will assess when you can return to your exercise regimen and regular schedule.

This is always a possibility with surgical procedures. If you’re concerned about losing sensation, you can discuss the right incision options with your plastic surgeon.

If you opt for breast implant surgery, you’ll need to take some extra steps during your mammogram screenings in the future. You should make sure to tell your technician you have implants, as well as what type. Often, breasts with implants require a different type of screening and assessment.

After your breast lift, you’ll have bandages or other dressings placed over your incisions. You’ll also need to wear a supportive surgical bra or elastic bandage to minimize swelling while you heal. Drainage tubes may be put in place after your surgery as well. You’ll receive specific instructions about what you can expect, including steps you’ll take during recovery and information about follow-up appointments and when stitches will be removed. Generally, you can expect some discomfort while healing, particularly in the first 2-3 days after your procedure. Bruising, redness, and swelling are also common, and your plastic surgeon will ensure you have prescribed medications to take to manage these. Most patients need to rest and recover for the first week or two after surgery before returning to work and other activities. You should wait about a month before resuming exercise but should expect longer for activity that puts pressure or strain on your chest like lifting or running. Healing is usually complete at about six weeks, but your results will continue to emerge over the course of the following months.

A breast lift is performed under general anesthesia. An incision is made around the nipple and may also extend vertically between the nipple and breast fold. The incision technique used depends on your unique anatomy, among other factors. Through the incision, your plastic surgeon will reshape and reposition the underlying breast tissue. In some cases, excess skin or other tissue can be removed to improve the contours and make up for lost elasticity. Enlarged areolae may be reduced, and the nipple and areolae will be lifted into a more upright position. Finally, the incisions will be closed. The result is a lifted, firm, and more youthful breast contour.

Because the aging process continues after your surgery, sagging is possible after your breast lift. However, most patients enjoy long-term results with a breast lift procedure.

A breast lift can reshape and recontour the breasts, but does not noticeably reduce size. Excess skin is usually removed during a breast lift, but this is for the purpose of reducing skin laxity. In most cases, the underlying fat and breast tissue is simply repositioned and lifted.

Most patients feel some discomfort after their procedure. However, this can be managed with medications prescribed by your plastic surgeon or by taking over-the-counter painkillers. To avoid unnecessary discomfort, you should follow your plastic surgeon’s directions during recovery and avoid strenuous activity.

A breast lift does not require implants, although implants with a breast lift are very common, especially for those looking to increase their breast size in addition to reducing signs of sagging. The procedure manipulates the existing breast tissue into a tightened and lifted position that results in a “perkier” appearance.

A breast augmentation is ideal for patients looking to increase breast volume and size, while a breast lift is best for restoring perkiness to breasts that have started to sag or lose volume due to breastfeeding or aging. However, there are many patients who can opt for both. Be sure to ask about the best options for you during your consultation.

With many breast lift procedures, each nipple and areola are usually surgically repositioned in order to provide greater symmetry. Since breasts are naturally asymmetrical, it’s possible your breast lift procedure will require a certain degree of repositioning, which will ultimately result in a more balanced appearance of the breasts.

A breast lift shouldn’t limit breastfeeding ability in the future, but with most breast lift procedures, it’s recommended that you are finished having children before undergoing one. There’s a likelihood that if you were to breastfeed after a breast lift, it could affect your results. As with any procedure, each patient is different, so please ask your plastic surgeon during your consultation if this is a concern for you.

Many patients opt for a breast lift procedure after having children, and it’s recommended that you finish childbearing before having a breast lift to ensure long term results. If you were to have a child after a breast lift, it’s possible to reverse your results and require another procedure.

For most women, nipple sensation will return during the recovery phase of a few months. It’s rare to see cases where there is long-term loss of nipple sensation, and more often that will happen to patients with larger implants and more extensive reductions or lifts. If this is a concern of yours, be sure to bring it up during your consultation.

An areola reduction is a procedure that can be done alongside a breast lift, which has the goal of reducing the overall size of the areola, making it complement the new appearance of perkier, more upright breasts. If this is something you want to address in your breast lift procedure, be sure to connect with your plastic surgeon about this during your consultation.

Some women experience some increase in cup size after a breast lift, but this is not the intended result. Breast lifts are best for lifting sagging breasts and reshaping them back to a more rounded, perkier appearance, and in fact, many patients report a reduction in breast size after a breast lift. What’s more important with a breast lift is the appearance — size is better addressed in a breast augmentation procedure.

As long as you’re generally healthy, you’re likely a good candidate for breast reduction surgery. Many patients find that their excessively large breasts cause both physical and emotional discomfort. This can include: Once your breast size has stabilized (usually as a late teen or into your early 20’s, but could be later) Difficulty performing certain activities such as running Back, neck, or shoulder pain Skin chafing Self-image problems If you are bothered by your large breasts, are a nonsmoker, and are at a stable and healthy weight, you are likely a good candidate for breast reduction. You’ll discuss your goals for breast reduction surgery during a consultation with our board-certified plastic surgeon to create the right surgical plan for you.

After your breast reduction, you can expect some soreness and discomfort for the first several days which can be alleviated with a prescription or over-the-counter pain medication. You’ll need to wear surgical support garments to alleviate swelling and drainage tubes may be put in place. Most patients will need to rest for about a week before returning to normal activities such as work or school. After about two weeks, most patients are ready to resume more strenuous activities like exercise routines. Your recovery process will be monitored through follow-up appointments to ensure proper healing and you’ll receive detailed aftercare instructions from our team before your surgical date.

Breast reduction does not require implants. During breast reduction surgery, excess tissue is removed and the remaining skin is excised and reshaped for an enhanced breast contour. Some patients may consider implants to change the shape of the breasts but that is very rare.

Because breast reduction surgery improves back and shoulder pain, among other issues, it can be covered by some health insurance plans. However, most insurance providers require proof that you have tried other solutions, such as physical therapy, without success before you turn to surgery. We encourage each patient to discuss their coverage with their insurance provider before their consultation in order to maximize their benefits.

Your cup size after breast reduction will vary based on several factors. Your plastic surgeon will help you select a size that relieves your problems and flatters your figure. That being said, most breast reduction patients go down about two cup sizes after surgery.

Potential risks include infection, scarring, changes in nipple sensation, difficulty breastfeeding, asymmetry, and in rare cases, partial or total loss of the nipple or areola. Other complications may include hematoma, seroma, and delayed wound healing.

Breast reduction surgery usually takes about 2 to 5 hours, sometimes longer, depending on the extent of the reduction and the surgical technique use.

Yes, you will have scars. The most common incision patterns are the lollipop (around the areola and vertically down) or the anchor (additional horizontal incision along the breast crease). While scars will fade over time, they are permanent.

Breast reduction surgery may limit a womans ability to breastfeed. While many women can still breastfeed after the procedure, its not guaranteed and depends on the surgical technique used.

Breast reduction surgery is typically performed under general anesthesia, which means youll be asleep during the procedure.

After earlobe repair surgery, patients can expect swelling, redness, and discomfort around the surgical area. Sutures are generally removed after a week; complete healing can take several weeks to a few months. During this period, patients should avoid activities that could put pressure on the ears, like wearing heavy earrings or engaging in contact sports.

Earlobe repair surgery is generally safe, but potential complications may include infection, bleeding, scarring, and allergic reactions to anesthesia. In rare cases, there may be asymmetry or the formation of keloids, which are raised scars.

Initial recovery from earlobe repair surgery typically takes one to two weeks, with most patients returning to normal activities within a day or two. Full recovery, including complete healing of the incision site and final scar maturation, may take several months.

Earlobe surgery, or earlobe repair, helps address issues such as torn, stretched, or split earlobes, often caused by wearing heavy earrings, trauma, or intentional stretching (gauging). The procedure can also correct congenital deformities, asymmetry, or earlobe sagging due to aging.

Earlobe repair surgery is usually performed under local anesthesia, meaning the area will be numb during the procedure, and the patient will feel little to no pain. Some discomfort or mild pain may occur once the anesthesia wears off, but this can typically be managed with over-the-counter pain medications.

The ideal candidate for an eyelid lift is a patient who has noticed their eyelids are heavier, overly wrinkled, or drooping and sagging, and is ready to consider a procedure for lasting correction of these concerns. Despite the skincare industries’ claims, eye creams and serums cannot reverse the aging process. They are helpful in slowing down the aging process, but eyelids cannot be lifted with skin care products alone. Some lifting can be achieved by nonsurgical procedures, but for those with moderate to significant drooping, surgical procedures are the best option for significant rejuvenation.

Most people only have this procedure done once, though you could need another if you have your first done very early in life. Your consultation will include a discussion of realistic expectations for results you could expect from each treatment option that is suitable for you. Each treatment performed at Reflections is tailored to the individual patient to account for their needs, wants, and anatomy. Many patients want to know how long they can expect results from an eyelid lift procedure to last. If you define the longevity of the result by the length of time until a patient has another similar procedure, then an eyelid lift is as near to permanent a result as possible. It is very rare that an eyelid lift patient would ever undergo another surgical eyelid lift procedure. After the procedure, you should expect that, over time, your face will continue to age naturally.

Your consultation will include a discussion of realistic expectations for results you could expect from each treatment option that is suitable for you. Each treatment performed at Reflections is tailored to the individual patient, to account for their needs, wants, and anatomy. Many patients want to know how long they can expect results from an eyelid lift procedure to last. If you define the longevity of result by the length of time until a patient has another similar procedure, then an eyelid lift is as near to permanent a result as possible. It is very rare that an Eyelid Lift patient would ever undergo another surgical eyelid lift procedure. After the procedure, you should expect that, over time, your face will continue to age naturally.

The eyelid’s wonderful blood supply reduces the risk for complications caused by poor circulation during the healing process, including scar deformities and skin necrosis. However, this blood supply also lends itself to increased swelling and the risk of bruising. All eyelid lift patients will experience swelling, and many will experience bruising. Generally bruising is light (often a yellow tone) and usually resolves within a week. Upper Blepharoplasty does have risks, though they occur very rarely. Some of those risks include Hematoma, scar deformities, skin necrosis, infection, bleeding, and eye injury. Hematomas are generally quick and easy to resolve with the help of specialized aftercare with your surgeon. Scar deformities and skin necrosis can create serious, long-lasting complications. However, these are very rare complications, particularly in the eyelid, because the area has such good blood circulation and the surgery creates very little stress on the skin. Patients are given specific instructions prior to the procedure to minimize risks and speed their recovery.

During the consultation, patients are provided with a gallery of photos documenting normal time-lapsed healing of our patients, so they can best understand how the scars will heal and fade over time. Scarring from a cosmetic procedure is a big concern for most patients. It’s natural to wonder what type of scarring to expect It’s important to note that hundreds of thousands of patients undergo eyelid lift surgery each year. The ones we notice are usually not because they are a good result. We tell patients the best results are never noticeable as a surgical result, but rather look very natural. We prefer to conceal these incisions in the natural fold of the eyelid, as we find this provides the most natural results, with the best-healed scars.

Each patient will be given specific and comprehensive pre-operative instructions before their surgery. However, the following are some of the instructions we give to every patient who undergoes an Eyelid Lift: Discontinue blood-thinning vitamins and supplements prior to surgery. These include Vitamin E, Fish Oil, Tylenol, and Aspirin. You will not resume these supplements until at least 1 week after surgery. Avoiding blood thinners is especially important for eyelid surgery, because the area is so prone to swelling and bruising. I recommend that patients start arnica tablets one week prior to surgery and continue to take arnica tablets until any bruising has resolved after surgery. Arnica is a powerful supplement that helps your body to heal bruises and inflammation, but can have some side effects. I make sure patients are checking in with me regularly while taking it.

Want to see exactly how our patients look day-by-day as they heal? We offer patients the option to few a private gallery of healing timeline photos during their consultation. This allows our patients to feel prepared and confident in their recovery process. The following are generalized instructions for eyelid Lift Aftercare: Most patients do not take any pain medication after the procedure. Although a prescription for pain medication is given, patients are often surprised about how little discomfort there is after an upper eyelid surgery. For the patients who decide to take pain medication, they usually do so for the first day or two and very often find that extra-strength Tylenol is enough. Recovery is typically easy and quick. You will be given an antibiotic following surgery. It’s important to take the entire course of the antibiotic as prescribed, and to avoid any substance which might affect its efficacy. You will also be given a list of supplements, herbals (including drinks such as Kombucha), “metabolism boosters”, “fat burners”, and medications that must be stopped before and not taken after the procedure until it is permitted by your surgeon. Strenuous workouts should be avoided for the first 2 weeks following surgery to avoid complications and delays in healing. You will likely feel up to resuming normal activities much sooner, so sometimes patients have difficulty holding off on their workouts. It’s important not to strain the area around your eye while it is healing, and though you likely don’t realize it, these muscles are often tensed during difficult exercise. Keeping activity light during this time will ensure the fastest recovery with the best-healed incisions. Patients who wish to conceal their eyelid lift procedure from co-workers will want to take 7-10 days off from the time of surgery. After days 9-10, incision lines can typically be well-covered with makeup and swelling and bruising is minimal. If your work is physically strenuous, you will need to take 14 days off from work, as straining during this time can delay healing and possibly cause complications. Patients typically feel “runway ready” around 7 days after an Eyelid Lift surgery. This is generally when you will resume normal social activities. However, any big events, like a wedding, should be spaced at least 3 weeks after your procedure, to ensure you have plenty of time for any lingering swelling or bruising to resolve. Protecting your incisions from sunlight is very important while they are healing. You will want to keep sunglasses on while outdoors (including while driving) until your incisions are completely faded.

Your individualized quote will be provided during your consultation. Financing is available at our office, through Prosper Credit and Care Credit. Major credit cards are also accepted, if you prefer.

One of the best ways to delay a full-fledged facelift is to strategically restore certain key areas, like the neck and jawline, at an earlier age. Most patients will start to see mild to moderate changes through the lower face and neck by the time they’re in their 40s, if not sooner. Addressing moderate sagging and deflation can turn back the clock, with a smaller procedure. Once you’ve reset to an earlier position in the aging process, you will continue to age in the same way as before; however, this should delay major procedures by several years.

First, small incisions are made along the natural intersections of ear, face, and scalp. Muscles and fat that have loosened and are drooping along the jawline are returned to their more youthful positions, higher up in the cheek. Next, skin is gently relaxed back into a more youthful position and excess is trimmed away. Because the surgeon has carefully rebuilt the underlying structures, skin is not tight or pulled, but rather restored to a more natural, smooth positioning across the lower cheeks and jawline. The location of your incisions, as well as the details that are specific to your unique aging pattern, will be discussed by your board certified facial plastic surgeon at your personalized consultation. However, you can rest assured that you will be well-cared-for and made to feel comfortable throughout the process, and you will find enjoyment in your results for years to come.

Almost anyone who wants to turn back the clock on aging along their jawline is a good candidate for a lower facelift. The vast majority of our patients choose this procedure to start their rejuvenation journey. In general, the ideal candidate is someone who: Has both skin and muscle laxity along their jawline (“jowls” and pooling skin and fat at the bottom of their smile lines). Is willing to achieve maximal improvement in the jaw through surgery. Is medically eligible.

You should plan for a few days of rest immediately following your procedure. You will leave the office with a temporary compression garment that you will not remove for two days. You will follow up with the doctor on the day after surgery to have the temporary compression garment changed and to be fitted for a compression garment that will be worn only at night starting about 48 hours after surgery. This will help minimize swelling and speed up the recovery process. You will wear this until the night after your one-week follow-up visit. Most patients feel “restaurant ready” and comfortable returning to their normal activities around 7 days after surgery. Exercise and strenuous activity must be avoided for 14 days. Bruising and swelling are usually minimal. During the days when patients might experience bruising, makeup can be worn to disguise the discoloration. Our physicians have a long history of making recoveries as comfortable and easy as possible. Every care will be taken to ensure your discomfort and downtime are minimized while your results are maximized.

With most of the surgeries we perform, there is usually very little discomfort afterward. Most patients will take pain medication for 1 to 3 days following surgery to control any discomfort. You can expect that you will feel tightness along your jawline and in your lower face following the lower facelift procedure, but it will come to feel natural within a few days after surgery.

Our physicians believe natural-looking results include discreet incisions well disguised in natural folds. Artful placement of incision lines, a gentle surgical technique, and skilled suturing are key in minimizing scar appearance. For more in-depth information about the healing process after facial plastic surgery, please visit our healing after facial surgery page.

One of the greatest advantages our facial plastic surgery team offers is the ability to forgo general anesthesia, which poses additional risks and concerns for many patients. Instead, our patients enjoy a local anesthesia experience that can only be found at Reflections, which we refer to as Comfort Calm™ Local Anesthesia. Patients are comfortable and relaxed, with no sensation other than light pressure or touch during the procedure. We offer the option to watch television, listen to your favorite music, or even take a nap during the procedure, whichever makes you feel most comfortable.

We pride ourselves on our safety record. Your plastic surgeon will make sure to go through all of the potential risks with you and answer any questions you have about your specific situation. Each patient is different, and we want to be able to speak to your specific health concerns individually. However, you should know Reflections is meticulous and has an excellent safety record.

After you have relaxed with Comfort Calm Anesthesia™ in our private surgical suite, your surgeon will make small incisions following the natural crease where the ear and cheek meet, following the curve of the ear back and around. First, muscles along the jawline are lifted into a more youthful position. Then fat is recontoured across the lower cheeks. Finally, he will remove any excess skin if needed and then suture the incisions. The whole procedure usually takes about 60 – 90 minutes.

By addressing the underlying structural changes caused by the aging process, a lower facelift makes changes that will ensure you’ll always look better than if you hadn’t had the surgery at all. Over time, you may find great benefit from procedures, which before your lower facelift, would have given only minimal to negligible results.

There isn’t an exact answer to the question regarding how long your facelift results will last. The area covered and the technique adopted by your surgeon play a major role in the results as well as how long they last. On average, facelift results will last a minimum of 5 years even when aging continues. After 10 years, you may see some changes in your face that would require some work like wrinkles and sagging skin. These signs usually begin on the neck and later, on your jowls.

A facelift is major surgery and once you have decided to undergo the procedure, you must want to know everything about the surgery itself as well as the recovery period. Facelift recovery varies from one patient to another since everybody’s body heals differently and it depends on several factors. The most important, though, is to follow the aftercare instructions of your surgeon carefully. Most people are able to feel good enough to return to their normal activities within 2 weeks of their surgery. The first week after your facelift surgery, you will be mostly resting. This is the time when the medication will make most patients feel tired and nauseous. Even though there is still swelling and bruising by the end of the week, most people are able to walk around by the second day after their facelift surgery. The second stage in facelift recovery lasts from 7 to 14 days and some patients feel sensations of numbness, tingling or burning caused due to the swelling and bruising. This will be minimal by the 3rd week. By this time, the incisions will begin to look better as well and any puckering will begin to settle down. Some areas may still look tight, but mostly you will feel and look better by the end of the month.

Most patients wish to retain their youthful appearance for as long as possible. Early signs of aging can be eliminated with non-invasive procedures like laser therapy or Botox, but after some time, when the definition of your face and neck softens, these procedures may not be as effective. With a natural-looking facelift, you can restore your youthful facial definitions. During your facelift, small incisions are made within the natural creases of facial features like the ears and scalp. Any loose fat and muscles are returned to their youthful position, the skin is brought back to a higher position, and any excessive skin is trimmed. The underlying structure is rebuilt, which allows the skin to be restored to a smooth position across your jawline and lower cheeks. This leads to natural-looking facelift results rather than a pulled appearance that has kept many people away from this beneficial surgical procedure. One of the main reasons why you should choose your facelift surgeon carefully is that your results will correlate directly to your surgeon’s skill and experience. A surgeon who understands how important it is for you to appear naturally-rejuvenated will make sure the incisions are well disguised within the natural folds of your face. In addition to the discreet placement of incisions, your surgeon should be skilled in the facelift technique as well as with the suturing procedure. It is natural for any patient to be worried about scarring from a facelift. However, in the hands of an experienced and skilled surgeon, any visible signs of having undergone a facelift are greatly minimized. Your surgeon can also recommend skin treatments to reduce the appearance of scarring.

With a facelift procedure, you can reverse the harmful effects of time, as well as years of exposure to the elements. Also known as rhytidectomy, this procedure can help to reduce the appearance of facial wrinkles and other aging signs. This is done by lifting and tightening the underlying muscles of your face to achieve the desired contours and youthful appearance. Since everybody faces different degrees of changes to their face, the amount of correction required also varies. There are several factors that affect the cost of your facelift surgery including: Type of facelift – There are different kinds of facelift procedures that are designed to address specific aging signs and improve the appearance of some targeted features. Usually, a traditional full facelift will cost you more than a mid-facelift or a mini facelift, which requires smaller incisions. Type of anesthesia – Certain types of facelift will require either local or general anesthesia. General anesthesia will cost more; also, different anesthesiologists have varying fees. Facelift technique – Your cost will be higher for an advanced method like the endoscopic facelift because of additional tools and technologies. Skill and reputation of your surgeon – Highly-respected surgeons who have undergone advanced training have a higher fee than surgeons who are less experienced. When choosing your facial cosmetic surgeon, cost should not be the most important factor, but rather their reputation and skills. Additional procedures – Many people combine other procedures with their facelift to get comprehensive results. Other than this, the location of your chosen practice will also affect the cost of your facelift surgery. It’s also important to remember that facelift is an elective surgery and your insurance will not cover it; however, most practices offer excellent financing options. On average, a facelift procedure costs around $6,000, which does not include associated costs like anesthesia, preparatory tests, and prescriptions. You’ll get a full estimate of these costs during a consultation.

There are several reasons besides genetics that lead to your facelift results not lasting long. Your results can last longer with some factors like taking the right diet, changing your lifestyle, stop smoking and avoiding sun exposure. These changes also make the quality of your life better. When you begin to see any signs of change when your facelift results begin to diminish, you can resort to various natural facelift methods like injectables and CO2 laser treatments. Most changes involving sagging skin are usually in the neck area and an alternative to a lower facelift, like a laser treatment, will offer skin tightening. Together, these are procedures that reduce wrinkles and boost collagen production may help you retain your facelift results longer.

You should take precautions to protect the transferred fat during your recovery. Because there aren’t any suture lines, and most patients feel really good after surgery, we often have to remind patients that they are still in a recovery period after surgery. Your newly grafted fat cells will need to be protected from any physical trauma or compression that might cause them to lose blood supply. Establishing blood supply to these cells is the key to your fat surviving and thriving in its new home. During your consultation, we will discuss how to avoid any activities or movements that might cause undue stress or otherwise slow the healing process.

When considering fat transfer for facial rejuvenation, patients should meet a few criteria to be considered ideal candidates: You should have excess fat – preferably in your abdomen or love handles. It doesn’t have to be a large amount of fat, but you do need some of your own fat to transfer (fat donors are not considered a healthy, viable option at this time). You should be willing to undergo a small surgical procedure to achieve long-lasting rejuvenation for your face You should be healthy and medically eligible for the procedure

After fat transfer, you will be swollen for a few weeks, and you will likely experience some mild bruising. Bruising can be covered with makeup during your recovery. Most patients feel “restaurant ready” about 5-7 days after their procedure. You should limit certain activities, such as strenuous exercise and any unnecessary touching of your face for two weeks after your procedure to allow your fat to settle into its new home and establish a healthy blood supply. Most patients feel very comfortable throughout their recovery and require very little pain management. When patients are sore, usually Tylenol is sufficient. Your surgeon and coordinator will be in close contact with you throughout your recovery, so if you feel discomfort, please do reach out. We give surgical patients a special phone number to call during their recovery so that they never have to wait for an answer or support.

The techniques our plastic surgeons use for fat transfer lend themselves to a speedy and comfortable recovery. With this procedure, our patients are very comfortable throughout the recovery, and usually don’t require medication beyond Tylenol. There will be some swelling and bruising. This is easily and safely covered by makeup.

Fat is transferred to the face with a cannula the same way we inject a dermal filler. There might be injection site redness for a day or two afterward, similar to what you would expect with a vaccination. It is highly unlikely that would ever turn into a visible scar.

No – our office is proud to offer patients an alternative to general anesthesia: Comfort Calm Local Anesthesia. During your procedure, you will be gently awake and completely relaxed with Comfort Calm Local Anesthesia. Our private, state-of-the-art surgical suite feels more like an oasis than an operating room. You’ll be able to listen to relaxing music and speak with your nurses and surgeon. Most of our patients doze in and out during the procedure.

A lip lift with most lip filler brands will last about 3-6 months, but a surgical lip lift is a permanent treatment.

A lip lift is a relatively minor surgical procedure so you should only experience some discomfort during the first few days while your lips are swollen. The swelling and bruising should reduce in about two weeks.

A lip lift should not change your nose but the shortened distance between your nose and lips will change the proportions of your lower face.

Lip lift surgery is permanent, but even the best lip filler and Botox will have to be touched up every few months.

If done properly, your lip lift will appear natural. It is important to find an experienced provider since overfilling the lips with filler or shortening the philtrum too much can create unnatural results.

If you choose to have a lip lift surgery, a small scar will be left. However, if done by an experienced surgeon, the scar will be small and easily concealed.

Yes! One reason to get a lip lift is to enhance the volume of your lips and the appearance that may have changed due to aging.

When injected by an experienced injector, your smile will not be effected by lip fillers. In the case of a lip lift, by adding more volume and shortening the length of the philtrum, your teeth will be more visible which creates a beautiful smile.

Lower eyelid surgery, or lower blepharoplasty, is any surgery that’s performed on the lower eyelid. In our practice, these types of surgery are used to reverse the signs of aging or to correct abnormal or unattractive undereye features.

After your lower blepharoplasty, you can expect some swelling, bruising, and dry eyes. Cold compresses and ice packs can help to alleviate swelling and may be used during the first two days after the procedure. Your surgeon will likely prescribe pain medication for your initial days of the recovery period as well as ointments and eye drops. Patients should also wear darkly tinted sunglasses during the healing process to protect the skin of the eyelids as you heal. You can expect to return to most normal activities within a week, except for vigorous workouts (think Crossfit, not a walk in the neighborhood) which need to wait for at least 2 weeks or until you are cleared by your plastic surgeon. A majority of bruising and swelling dissipate within two weeks after the procedure.

Many times, patients will come to us and say “I just don’t want to have surgery” and that’s a very valid choice to make, but your feelings about whether you want to have surgery or not are not the only factors that should be considered when deciding whether or not to have surgery. Did you know that nonsurgical treatments generally accomplish different results or work for a different subset of people than surgical procedures?

Lower eyelid surgery can be performed under either general or local anesthesia. Reflections Center prefers to limit general anesthesia use, but it is necessary in cases where there is more extensive treatment to the muscle, fascia, or fat pads around the eye. Generally, a simple skin pinch procedure or microfat transfer can be performed under local anesthesia. Your consultation will include not only a discussion of your anesthesia preferences but a frank discussion of your health and well-being in relation to anesthesia choices. Your health is our first priority.

The cost of lower eyelid surgery varies from patient-to-patient depending on factors including the type of anesthesia used, the techniques used during your procedure, and the extent of correction necessary. Generally speaking, the cost of a lower eyelid surgery starts at about $5,500. Financing Your Surgery At Reflections Center, financing is accepted for any procedure over $1,000, including lower blepharoplasty. We partner with Prosper Healthcare Financing and Care Credit, and patients can apply for financing in advance before their appointment.

Yes, upper and lower eyelid surgery can be performed in a single surgical session. This is one of our most common combinations of treatments.

One thing most patients don’t realize is that surgery will not improve skin quality, thickness, or texture – even though it will fix skin laxity (or excess skin). This is especially important for the lower eyelids, where pulling tight skin that is already very thin, delicate, and crepey will create a bad result. Since nearly everyone experiences thinning and loss of elasticity in their undereye skin, this is an important factor to consider. When skin has lost its elasticity and you stretch it tight (remove all the excess skin), the skin once healed will continue to stretch out over time and become thinner and thinner. This is why we almost always recommend both a treatment to improve skin quality in addition to surgery. Most patients have these treatments performed during their surgery session, so it doesn’t have to feel like it’s another procedure and another recovery period. Here you can learn more about improving skin quality and elasticity for the under eyes.

Patients are allowed to begin wearing makeup the day after surgery, but they must be careful to avoid applying that makeup in their incisions. For example, with any surgery performed on the eyes, it’s quite common to have some bruising. There are so many tiny blood vessels in these areas that it’s really impossible to avoid them all, and most patients will have at least light yellow bruising that appears in the first few days. This bruising tends to be on the upper cheek and lower eyelid junction area – and that’s usually an inch or two below where the incisions are. Some patients cover this with large sunglasses (others want to use makeup) and that is perfectly fine. You just want to avoid makeup above the eye that could fall down into the incision line, so avoid placing makeup too close up to those incision lines.

Good candidates for a mommy makeover are moms who have seen significant or unwanted changes in their bodies due to pregnancy, childbirth, and breastfeeding. Before you undergo a mommy makeover, you should be generally healthy and fully recovered from childbirth. It’s best to be a nonsmoker, avoid taking blood thinners, and be at or near a healthy weight. For best results, you should be finished having children so that future pregnancies won’t affect your results. If you think you’ll get pregnant again in the future, you can explore some non-surgical options.

Recovery from a mommy makeover varies based on the individual procedures you opt for and which areas of the body you choose to address. Generally, you can expect swelling, redness, and bruising in your treatment areas. Swelling can usually be alleviated using compression garments and ice, as well as anti-inflammatory medications. Your plastic surgeon will prescribe pain medications to help with any discomfort. Most mommy makeover patients require at least a week to rest and recover before returning to work and other normal day-to-day activities. Be sure you have arranged for help with caring for your children as you recover. Your plastic surgeon will advise when you can return to more strenuous activities, such as an exercise routine. This usually occurs at about four weeks.

Mommy makeovers are typically not covered by insurance since they are considered cosmetic procedures. Certain components of a mommy makeover, such as breast reduction, may be deemed medically necessary or beneficial and are therefore covered by certain insurance plans.

The cost for a mommy makeover is something that can vary greatly from patient to patient and will ultimately depend heavily on which procedures you choose. With other costs associated beyond just the procedure itself, it’s best to consult with your plastic surgeon to determine your final pricing.

A few factors go into determining your candidacy for a mommy makeover procedure. You’ll first want to consider that your results are better maintained if you’re done having children. Secondly, you shouldn’t be breastfeeding or lactating leading up to the procedure. It’s recommended to wait six months to a year after childbirth to give your body time to recover. If you otherwise have a normal healthy life, those will be the main considerations when discussing this procedure with your plastic surgeon.

Physically, most women still can bear children after a mommy makeover procedure. However, the risk of reversing your mommy makeover results is higher since pregnancy comes with the potential for weight gain and stretching of the skin.

It’s recommended to wait for six months to a year at the earliest for a mommy makeover procedure. Mothers can become candidates for this procedure after they’ve stopped lactating or breastfeeding their children. When consulting with your plastic surgeon, the timeline for when to complete this procedure will be discussed.

It’s possible to breastfeed after a breast augmentation, but with certain incisions there is a risk of impairing nerves and ducts in the breasts that could impair your ability to do so. As with the entire procedure, it’s recommended to be done having children and finished breastfeeding before completing a mommy makeover procedure.

To maintain your mommy makeover results, be sure to invest in long-term healthy habits. This includes maintaining a stable weight through diet and exercise, avoiding smoking, and taking care of your incisions during the early part of your recovery journey. It’s also highly recommended to be done having children since future pregnancies can reverse your mommy makeover results.

If you’re an otherwise healthy candidate, these past surgeries shouldn’t exclude you from having a mommy makeover. It’s important to note that every patient is different and including these procedures in your patient history is important to ensure your plastic surgeon has all the right details during your consultation.

The mommy makeover is a combination of procedures in which not all of them are necessarily surgical. Some patients opt for more non-surgical approaches to certain areas that are addressed in a mommy makeover. Ultimately, your plastic surgeon will help determine if there are non-surgical options that may work better to achieve your aesthetic goals.

This is dependent on each patient and the recommended set of procedures for the mommy makeover procedure. For safety reasons, sometimes long, complex surgeries can be spread out over multiple surgical sessions, but these factors won’t be determined until you’ve had a consultation and discussion with your plastic surgeon.

Each stage of a mommy makeover recovery will be different based on the procedures completed. Most patients can expect to return to their normal routines within 3-4 weeks and resume physical activity after 5-6 weeks of recovery. What’s most important to remember is everyone’s healing process is different, and the healing time you endure is temporary.

In general, the procedure is performed by first making a small incision in the natural crease under the chin, which allows the doctor to remove any excess fat above the muscle. Next, the two vertical bands of muscle are reconnected and tightened back to a youthful position. Any excess fat under the muscle can be removed at the same time. Finally, if there is excess skin, it may be gently trimmed away by using very thin incisions that are hidden in a natural skin crease and behind the ear for a smoother, toned look. The location of your incisions, as well as the details that are specific to your unique aging pattern, will be discussed by your board-certified plastic surgeon at your personalized consultation.

Almost anyone who wants to see a dramatic rejuvenation of their neck is a good candidate for a neck lift. In general, the ideal candidate is someone who: Has both skin and muscle laxity in their neck (vertical neck bands, a “turkey wattle,” or a “double chin”) is willing to achieve maximal improvement in the neck through surgery is medically eligible

Every care will be taken to ensure your discomfort and downtime are minimized while your results are maximized. You should plan for a few days’ rest immediately following your procedure. You will leave the office with a temporary compression garment that you will not remove for two days. You will follow up with the doctor on the day after surgery to have the temporary compression garment changed and to be fitted for a compression garment that will be worn only at night starting about 48 hours after surgery. This will help minimize swelling and speed up the recovery process. You will wear this until the night after your one-week follow-up visit. Most patients feel comfortable returning to their normal activities within 3-5 days after surgery. Exercise and strenuous activity must be avoided for 14 days. Bruising and swelling are usually minimal. During the days when patients might experience bruising, makeup can be worn to disguise the discoloration. Our physicians have a long history of making recoveries as comfortable and easy as possible.

With most of the surgeries we perform, there is usually little to no discomfort afterward. You can expect that you will feel a tightness in your neck following the procedure, but it will come to feel natural within a few days after surgery. Patients have usually been prescribed some pain medication for their recovery period, but most find by day 2-3 that they no longer need something that strong and are comfortable with just over-the-counter pain medication, like Tylenol. Patients will be in close contact with their surgery coordinator during the recovery and we will take every precaution to ensure you are comfortable throughout the process.

Our physicians believe natural-looking results include discreet incisions disguised in natural folds. Artful placement of incision lines, a gentle surgical technique, and skilled suturing are key in minimizing scar appearance.

We pride ourselves on our safety record. Your plastic surgeon will make sure to go through all of the potential risks with you and answer any questions you have about your specific situation. Each patient is different and we want to be able to speak to your specific health concerns individually. However, you should know Reflections is meticulous and has an excellent safety record.

We will begin by making an incision in the natural crease just below the chin. This is followed by liposculpting of the neck and jawline. Next, we will tighten and realign the muscle structures that have loosened with aging. In many cases, fat will be removed from under the muscle. Finally, we will remove any excess skin if needed and then suture the incisions. Sometimes this will include the removal of excess skin along the crease between the ear and neck as well. The whole procedure usually takes about 60 – 90 minutes.

By addressing the underlying structural changes caused by the aging process, a neck lift makes changes that will ensure you’ll always look better than if you hadn’t had the surgery at all. Over time, you may find great benefits from procedures that, before your neck lift, would have given only minimal to negligible results.

Depending on the type of procedure you are having and how complex the operation will be, you can expect your rhinoplasty to take anywhere from 1.5-3 hours.

A rhinoplasty is not as painful as you might fear, and most patients can treat their pain with Motrin. This minimal to moderate pain will only last six days after surgery and your doctor can also prescribe stronger pain medication if needed.

During the first six days, your nose will swell, and you will have moderate pain. After these six days, the cast will come off and you can return to all your normal functions. Within 2-6 weeks, your nose will appear normal, and you can see the complete results. Full recovery can take as little as 3 months or up to 18 months, depending on how well your body heals.

After rhinoplasty, patients have varying degrees of bruising and swelling. One risk is that if too much cartilage is removed, the nose will appear abnormal, and the function can be impaired. It is important to find a qualified surgeon who understands this risk and has the technical skills to make the right amount of changes to your nose.

During the first week post-op, avoid strenuous activities, showering, sunbathing, and blowing your nose. Stop smoking and drinking alcohol since this can impair your body’s natural healing process.

There is no “right” time to get a rhinoplasty, but you should wait until you are at least 16 years old and your body has stopped growing. Ultimately, when you choose your rhinoplasty is up to you.

Before your rhinoplasty, you should consult with your doctor about your current medications since you may need to stop taking certain ones, including anti-inflammatories like aspirin. You should also maintain a healthy diet and stop smoking so that your body is in a healthy condition for surgery.

The best time to have your surgery is ultimately up to you but you should be mentally and physically prepared for the changes that will result from your rhinoplasty. If you have an important event coming up, plan to have your rhinoplasty at least six weeks before so that you will be fully healed in time.

Your smile may appear a bit different while your nose is swollen, but it should return to normal once your nose is healed.

A keloid is essentially the overgrowth of scar tissue. The appearance essentially a “raised scar” that can often grow larger than the original wound. Many patients are concerned about the possibility of a scar such as this forming after a surgery or injury due to the more noticeable nature of a keloid. While one’s tendency to keloid over a scar cannot be prevented, early treatment of a scar can promote healthier healing allowing it to be less noticeable.

Scar revision can be highly effective in improving the appearance of scars, making them less noticeable and smoother. Patients with large, raised, or functionally problematic scars may find scar revision particularly beneficial.

For minor treatments, recovery can be immediate or take a few days. For more extensive revisions, initial recovery typically takes one to two weeks, while complete healing and scar maturation can take several months. Patients may need to avoid strenuous activities and follow specific care instructions during healing.

After scar revision, patients can expect swelling, redness, and tenderness around the treated area. These symptoms usually subside within a few days to weeks. The new scar may appear pink or raised initially but will gradually fade over several months.

The length of scar revision treatment varies depending on the technique used. Treatments may take 15 to 45 minutes per session, with multiple sessions required for optimal results.

Patients should disclose their medical history, medications, and any allergies. Dr. Fiorillo may recommend stopping certain medications or supplements that could increase bleeding risk.

Tummy tucks, also known as “abdominoplasty,” are usually performed under general anesthesia. An incision is made from hip to hip, low enough to ensure that any scars can be easily concealed under a swimsuit. Through this incision, the abdominal muscles are sutured together to repair any damage or looseness. Liposuction can be used to remove any stubborn fat deposits in the area if necessary. After these steps, any loose, excess skin is removed. The area is then closed with sutures.

Following a tummy tuck procedure, you’ll need a trusted friend or family member to drive you home and care for you during the first few days of recovery. Soreness, swelling, and bruising are common, especially in the first several days. Pain medication, prescribed to you by your plastic surgeon, can be taken to alleviate discomfort and swelling. You’ll wear a compression garment to support the area, reduce swelling, and help the skin adhere to the new contours. Drains can also be used to ensure proper healing and you may need to manage these according to instructions. Most patients return to work or other normal activities after about one to two weeks. However, you should refrain from a strenuous activity like exercise or lifting heavy objects for up to a month after your tummy tuck. Your plastic surgeon will give you more detailed instructions about your healing process as well as when to return for follow-up appointments. To ensure you heal properly, it’s important to follow all directions carefully.

The cost of a tummy tuck varies according to factors like your plastic surgeon, the geographic location, and fees for facilities, materials, and anesthesia. In New Jersey, you can expect a tummy tuck to cost between $8,000-10,000 on average. You’ll receive a full estimate of your tummy tuck costs during your consultation.

Tummy tucks are considered safe, but there are risks that come with any surgical procedure. These include adverse reactions to anesthesia and infection. To minimize your risk, make sure to discuss any and all health concerns with your plastic surgeon during your consultation and follow your aftercare instructions carefully during recovery.

Tummy tucks are permanent in the sense that any skin or tissue removed will not return. You can maintain your tummy tuck results by keeping up a healthy lifestyle including regular exercise and a good diet. If you get pregnant in the future, you might require another tummy tuck procedure to restore your results.

Abdominoplasty procedures offer a few different positive cosmetic advantages. Although the results for each patient will be different, patients who have had an abdominoplasty see improvement in things like ventral hernia, stress during urination, and improvements to posture and decreases in back pain. If you have other complications you experience, be sure to communicate those to your plastic surgeon during your consultation.

While the commonly held belief is that a mini tummy tuck means a smaller incision, a mini tummy tuck refers to removing skin in the lower abdomen without incising it around the belly button or tightening the muscles above it. It’s rare for someone to be a “qualified” candidate for this procedure, but it may be an option discussed by your plastic surgeon.

As two of the most popular abdominal procedures, there can be confusion about the difference between a tummy tuck and liposuction. What’s important to remember is that a tummy tuck removes excess fat and skin which otherwise cannot be removed while liposuction focuses on small fat deposits that can be removed from the hips, thighs, butt, or stomach.

Some aspects of the tummy tuck procedure can excise skin that has been affected by stretch marks, but if not, there are plenty of laser resurfacing solutions that can help reduce their visibility. If you’re concerned about stretch marks, be sure to visit Reflections Center’s page dedicated to treating stretch marks.

A tummy tuck procedure shouldn’t complicate a future pregnancy, but a future pregnancy can negatively impact your tummy tuck results. It’s recommended that you complete your family and childbearing before you investigate a tummy tuck.

Tummy tuck results are considered permanent since the skin and fat cells removed cannot come back; however, significant weight gain or future pregnancies can reverse your results. To maintain your results long term, it’s recommended to maintain a stable weight through healthy diet and exercise and avoiding smoking and damage to any of your incisions.

In the process of tightening and reshaping the skin and fat cells in your abdomen, the belly button is a key part that is integrated at the end of the procedure. Once enough skin and fat are removed, a hole is made to place your belly button into its new aesthetic location on your stomach. Through this process, fixing a loose belly button can be adjusted, but if you have concerns about your belly button beforehand, be sure to communicate that during your consultation.

A tummy tuck is viewed as a huge step forward in transforming your motivation for a healthier lifestyle. While slight weight gain will likely not impact your results, anything more than that can start to increase mass on the abdomen, if not other areas more likely to gain fat due to the presence of existing fat cells like the buttocks, thighs, and back.

For male and female patients, the procedure is almost identical. There aren’t a lot of aspects of a tummy tuck that are gender specific; the important factors are ones that relate to your medical history like previous weight loss, pregnancies, or other complications.